micom p220 - schneider electricms.schneider-electric.be/op_main/micom/micom-p220_technicalgui… ·...

MiCOM P220

Motor protection

Technical Guide

P220/EN T/B43

Technical Guide P220/EN T/B43 MiCOM P220 Page 1/2

MOTOR PROTECTION MiCOM P220

CONTENT

Safety Section Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

Getting Started P220/EN GS/B43

Connection Diagram P220/EN CO/B43

Technical Data P220/EN TD/B43

Application Guide P220/EN AP/B43

User Guide P220/EN FT/B43

Menu of the HMI P220/EN HI/B43

Communication P220/EN GC/B43

Default Setting Value P220/EN SV/B43

Installation Guide P220/EN IN/B43

Commissioning and Maintenance P220/EN CM/B43

Test Report P220/EN RS/B43

P220/EN T/B43 Technical Guide Page 2/2 MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

SAFETY SECTION

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Safety Section Page 1/10

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 3 2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3 3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4

3.1 Symbols 4

3.2 Labels 4

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4 5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7 6. EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS 7 7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 7

7.1 Protective fuse rating 7

7.2 Protective Class 7

7.3 Installation Category 7

7.4 Environment 8

8. CE MARKING 8 9. RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA 9

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Page 2/10 Safety Section

BLANK PAGE


1. INTRODUCTION This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment and also includes descriptions of equipment label markings.

Documentation for equipment ordered from AREVA Energy Automation & Information is despatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Guide.

Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced.

Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.

It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide.

When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.

Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.

Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.

Qualified personnel are individuals who

• are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected;

• are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;

• are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices;

• are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

The operating manual for the equipment gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary information.


3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or commissioned.

3.1 Symbols

Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.

Functional/Protective Conductor Earth terminal Note – This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.

3.2 Labels

See "Safety Guide" (SFTY/4L M) for equipment labelling information.

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections

Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.

The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or servicing the equipment.

Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.

Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken.

If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.

Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used.

The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram.


Protection Class I Equipment - Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective

conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.

- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.

The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm² (3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations.

The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible.

All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.

Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked: - Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation); - CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections; - Protective fuse rating; - Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where

applicable); - Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the

application.

Equipment Use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.

UL and CSA Listed or Recognized Equipment To maintain UL and CSA approvals the equipment should be installed using UL and/or CSA Listed or Recognized parts of the following type: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation.

Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.

Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it.

For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies.

For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module.


External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.

Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons.

Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.

Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and pcb cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised, since this may result in damage.

Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards

Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card.

Insertion and withdrawal of integral heavy current test plugs

It is possible to use an integral heavy current test plug with some equipment. CT shorting links must be in place before insertion or removal of heavy current test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.

External test blocks and test plugs

Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.

*Note – when a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe.

Fibre optic communication

Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.

Cleaning

The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energised. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly which should not be removed.


5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Decommissioning:

The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning.

Disposal:

It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of batteries.

6. EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS

Electrical adjustments

It is possible to change current or voltage settings on some equipment by direct physical adjustment e.g. adjustment of a plug-bridge setting. The electrical power should be removed before making any change, to avoid the risk of electric shock.

Exposure of live parts

Removal of the cover may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts, these should not be touched before removing the electrical power.

7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

7.1 Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible.

DANGER - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may

produce lethal hazardous voltages. 7.2 Protective Class

IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001

Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.

7.3 Installation Category

IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001

Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III):

Distribution level, fixed installation.

Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 500Ω, 0.5J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits


7.4 Environment

The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).

Pollution Degree – Pollution Degree 2 Altitude – operation up to 2000 m IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001

Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards.

8. CE MARKING

Marking Compliance with all relevant European Community directives:

Product safety: Low Voltage Directive - 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC EN 61010-1: 2001 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 60255-5: 2001 IEC 60664-1: 2001

Compliance demonstrated by reference to safety standards.

Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) 89/336/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC.

The following Product Specific Standard was used to establish conformity:

EN 50263 : 2000

Compliance demonstrated via the Technical Construction File route.

Where applicable :

II (2) G

ATEX Potentially Explosive Atmospheres directive 94/9/EC, for equipment.

The equipment is compliant with Article 1(2) of European directive 94/9/EC. It is approved for operation outside an ATEX hazardous area. It is however approved for connection to Increased Safety, “Ex e”, motors with rated ATEX protection, Equipment Category 2, to ensure their safe operation in gas Zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas.

CAUTION – Equipment with this marking is not itself suitable for operation within a potentially explosive atmosphere.

Compliance demonstrated by Notified Body certificates of compliance.

Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R & TTE) directive 95/5/EC.

Compliance demonstrated by compliance to the Low Voltage Directive, 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC, down to zero volts, by reference to safety standards.


9. RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA CSA - Canadian Standards Association

UL - Underwriters Laboratory of America

– UL Recognized to UL (USA) requirements

– UL Recognized to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements

– UL Listed to UL (USA) requirements

– UL Listed to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements

– Certified to CSA (Canada) requirements


BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P220/EN GS/B43 MiCOM P220

Getting Started

Technical Guide P220/EN GS/B43 Getting Started MiCOM P220 Page 1/22

CONTENTS

1. RECEPTION OF THE PRODUCT 3

1.1 Reception of the relay 3

1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 3

2. HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 3

3. INSTALLING THE RELAYS 4

4. UNPACKING 4

5. STORAGE 4

6. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM P220 5

6.1 MiCOM series relay 5

6.2 MiCOM P220 Functions 6

6.3 Front view 7

6.4 Relay rear description 9

7. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION 10

8. STARTING THE MiCOM P220 IN 5 MINUTES 11

8.1 Check the wiring of your installation 11

8.2 Connecting the MiCOM P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage 11

8.3 MINIMUM CONFIGURATION TO START UP THE MiCOM P220 12

8.3.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu 12 8.3.2 CONFIGURATION Menu 14 8.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu 19 8.3.4 PROTECTION G 1 Menu 19 8.4 COMPLETE CONFIGURATION OF THE MiCOM P220 21

9. COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 22

P220/EN GS/B43 Technical Guide Getting Started Page 2/22 MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE


1. RECEPTION OF THE PRODUCT

1.1 Reception of the relay

Protection relays are generally robust. However it is appropriate to treat them with care before installing them on site. As soon as they arrive, the relays should be examined immediately, looking for any deterioration which could have occurred during transport. If there is any deterioration, make a claim against the forwarding company and inform AREVA T&D as soon as possible.

Relays not intended for immediate installation must be stored in their protective polyethylene packaging.

1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Relays use components sensitive to electrostatic discharges. The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal housing. Consequently, the internal module must not be taken out pointlessly. When handling the module outside its housing, be very careful to avoid any contact with electrical connections and components. If it is removed from its housing for storage, the module must be placed in electrically conductive antistatic packaging.

No configuration setting is possible in the module. We therefore advise you not to dismantle it pointlessly. The printed circuit boards are interconnected. They are not designed for disconnection by the user. Avoid touching the printed circuit boards. They are made with complementary metal-oxide semiconductors (CMOS) and the static electricity discharged by the human body has an adverse effect on them.

2. HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

The usual movements of a person easily generate electrostatic energy which may reach several thousand volts. The discharging of this voltage into devices comprising semiconductors, when handling electronic circuits, can cause severe deterioration. Such damage is not necessarily visible immediately. Nevertheless, it reduces the reliability of the circuit.

Electronic circuits are completely protected against any electrostatic discharge when inside their housing. Do not expose them to any risk by needlessly taking the modules out of their housings.

Each module has the best possible protection for its devices consisting of semiconductors. However, should it be necessary to withdraw the module from its housing, please take the following precautions to preserve the great reliability and long service life for which the equipment was designed and manufactured.

1. Before taking the module out of its housing, touch the housing to balance your electrostatic potential.

2. When handling the module, hold it by its front plate, or by its frame or by the edges of the printed circuit board. Do not touch the electronic components, the printed circuit conductors and the connectors.

3. Before passing the module to another person, shake hands with him or her for example to balance your electrostatic potential

4. Place the module on an antistatic surface or an electrically conductive surface with the same potential as yourself.

5. To store or transport the module, place it in conductive packaging.


If you carry out any measurements on the internal electronic circuits of a device in service, earth yourself to exposed conductive parts by linking yourself to the housing by a conductive strap attached to your wrist. The resistance to earth of the conductive strap which you attach to your wrist and to the housing must be between 500 kΩ and 10 MΩ. If you do not have a device of this type, you must remain permanently in contact with the housing to prevent any static energy accumulating. The instruments used to take the measurements must be earthed to the housing insofar as this is possible.

For further information on the procedures for safe working with all the electronic equipment, please consult standards BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. In a special handling area we strongly advise you to undertake a detailed analysis of the electronic circuits and working conditions according to the BS and IEC standards mentioned above.

3. INSTALLING THE RELAYS

The relays are supplied either individually or mounted in a cubicle. If separate relays have to be installed according to a particular drawing, please follow the mounting details indicated in publication R7012. If a MMLG test unit has to be incorporated, position it to the right of the set of relays (looking at them from the front). The modules must still be protected in their metal housings during installation on a cubicle. The design of the relays makes it possible to reach the mounting holes easily without taking off the cover. For individually mounted relays, a positioning diagram is normally supplied to indicate the centre of the holes and the layout of the cubicle. The corresponding dimensions are also indicated in the corresponding sales publication (N 1550-B).

4. UNPACKING

When unpacking and installing relays, take great care to avoid damaging the parts and changing the settings. Relays must be handled only by people who are experts in this field. As far as possible, the installation must remain clean, dry, free from dust and free from excessive vibration. The site must be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays removed from their housings must not be exposed to dust or humidity. To this end, it is necessary to take great care when installing relays whilst construction work is taking place on the same site.

5. STORAGE

If the relays do not have to be installed immediately on reception, they must be stored protected against dust and humidity in their original carton. If dehumidifying crystals are placed in the relay packaging, it is advisable not to remove them. The effect of the dehumidifying crystals is reduced if the packaging is exposed to ambient conditions. To restore their original effectiveness, you need only to heat the crystals slightly for around an hour, before replacing them in their delivery carton.

As soon as the packaging is opened, the dust which has accumulated on the carton risks settling on the relays. In the presence of moisture, the carton and the packaging can become humidified to the point where the effectiveness of the dehumidifying crystals is reduced.

The temperature for storage should remain between - 25 °C and + 70 °C.


6. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM P220

6.1 MiCOM series relay

The range of MiCOM protection relays follows on from the success of the MIDOS, K and MODN ranges by incorporating the last changes in digital technology. The MiCOM P220 is fully compatible and use the same modular box concept. MiCOM P220 provides more protection elements for the most demanding applications.

This relay has a large number of control functions and collecting data. This can form part of a fully integrated system covering protection, control, measurements data acquisition and recording of faults, events, and disturbances. The relay is equipped on the front panel with a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 2x16 back-lit alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 push keypad (to gain access to all the parameters, alarms and measurements) and 8 LEDs simply displaying the state of the relay.

In addition, the use of the RS485 communication port makes it possible to read, reinitialise and change the settings of the relay, if required, from a local or remote PC computer equipped with appropriate software.

Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allow the MiCOM P220 to provide an evolving solution for the problems of the protection of motors.


6.2 MiCOM P220 Functions

Function MiCOM P220

[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD X

[50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT X

[50N/51N] EARTH FAULT X

[46] UNBALANCE X

[48] EXCESS LONG START X

[51LR-50S] BLOCKED ROTOR X

[37] LOSS OF LOAD X

[49/38] RTD (optional) X

[49] THERMISTANCE (optional) X

[66] START NUMBER X

MIN TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS X

EMERGENCY START X

RE-ACCELERATION. AUTORISATION X

SETTING GROUPS 2

MEASUREMENTS (True RMS + direct Current, indirect + MAX Value )

X

PROCESS MENU X

Circuit Breaker SUPERVISION X

Circuit Breaker MONITORING X

TRIP STATISTICS X

LATCHING RELAYS X

AND LOGIC EQUATIONS X

FAULTS RECORDS X

EVENTS RECORDS X

DISTURBANCE RECORDS X

COMMUNICATION PORT FRONT PANEL (RS232) X

COMMUNICATION PORT REAR FACE (RS485) X


6.3 Front view

The front panel is described in figure 1. Extra physical protection for the front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover. This allows read access only to the relay settings and data but does not affect the relay IP rating. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open.

P0176ENb

FIGURE 1 - RELAY FRONT VIEW

The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in the figure1:

− a 16 character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD)

− a 7-Keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (!, ", #, $,.an ENTER key %, a CLEAR key &, and a READ key ').

− 8 LEDs ; 4 fixed function LEDs and 4 programmable function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel.

− Under the top hinged cover:

• The relay serial number, and the relay voltage rating information (see figure 3 in this chapter)

− Under the bottom hinged cover:

• battery compartment to hold the ½ AA size battery which is used for memory back-up for event, fault and disturbance records.

• A 9 pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) via a RS232 serial data connection (SK1 port).


The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate the following conditions:

LEDs Colour Labels Significance

LED 1 RED TRIP LED 1 indicates when a trip order has been issued by the relay to the cut-off element (circuit breaker, contactor). This LED recopies the trip order issued to the trip output contact (RL1). Its normal state is unlit. It will light as soon as a trip order is issued. It goes out when the associated alarm is acknowledged (by pushing the & key).

LED 2 Yellow Alarm Upon detection of a fault (thermal O/V) or an alarm (CB state) by MiCOM P220 relay, the LED will start flashing. After reading of the alarm(s) message(s) by pressing the ' key, the LED will change from flashing to constant illumination, and will extinguish when all the alarms are cleared (Key &). The alarms are either threshold crossings (instantaneous), or tripping orders (time delayed).

LED 3 Orange Warning LED 3 is dedicated to the internal alarms of MiCOM P220 relays. When a non critical internal alarm (typically communication Fault) is detected, the LED flashes continuously. When the fault is classified as critical, the LED is illuminated continuously. The extinction of this LED is only possible by the disappearance of the cause that caused its function (repair of the module, disappearance of the fault).

LED 4 Green Healthy LED 4 indicates that MiCOM P220 relays are working correctly.

LED 5 to LED 8

Red Aux1 to Aux4

These LEDs can be programmed by the user on the basis of information on available thresholds (instantaneous and time-delayed). The user selects theinformation he wishes to see associated with a LED. Each LED illuminates when the associated information is valid. The extinction of each LED is linked to the acknowledgement of the associated alarms.


6.4 Relay rear description

Connector 1 Connector 2

OPTION:This connector (Orange) is designed for the use of- 6 RTD or 2 Thermistances.- Analogical Output.

P0177ENa

FIGURE 2 - MiCOM P220 RELAY REAR VIEW

Connector 1 Connector 2

Common TC4 1 Common TC1 2 Case Earth 29 RS485 (Resistance)

30

TC4 (NC) 3 TC1 (NC) 4 RS485 (+) 31 RS485 (-) 32

TC4 (NO) 5 TC1 (NO) 6 Auxiliary Supply (+)

33 Auxiliary Supply (-)

34

Common TC5 7 Common TC2 8 WD (NO) 35 Common WD 36

TC5 (NC) 9 TC2 (NC) 10 WD (NC) 37 38

TC5 (NO) 11 TC2 (NO) 12 39 40

Input L3 (+) 13 Common TC3 14 IA (Input - Ph.A /5 amps)

41 Common IA (Ph.A/ 5 amps)

42

Input L3 ( - ) 15 TC3 (NC) 16 IB (Input - Ph.B /5 amps)

43 Common IB (Ph.B/ 5 amps)

44

Input L4 (+) 17 TC3 (NO) 18 IC (Input - Ph.C /5 amps)

45 Common IC (Ph.C/ 5 amps)

46

Input L4 ( - ) 19 20 I0 (E/F input) (5 amps)

47 Common E/F (5 amps)

48

Input L5 (+) 21 Input L1 (+) 22 IA (Input - Ph.A /1 amp)

49 Common IA (Ph.A/ 1 amp)

50

Input L5 ( - ) 23 Input L1 ( - ) 24 IB (Input - Ph.B /1 amp)

51 Common IB (Ph.B/ 1 amp)

52

25 Input L2 (+) 26 IC (Input - Ph.C /1 amp)

53 Common IC (Ph.C/ 1 amp)

54

27 Input L2 ( - ) 28 I0 (E/F input) (1 amp)

55 Common E/F (1 amp)

56

NOTE: The terminals of MiCOM P220 are represented with power supply off.


7. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION

Prior to applying power, unclip the top cover and check that the model number of the relay listed on the front panel (top left) corresponds to the model ordered.

P220 C00M11100 CE

No. 2501511 Cde 37982/007

0,002 - 1 Ion Modbus

Vx 130 - 250Vcc / 100 - 250Vca

P0178ENa

FIGURE 3 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The significance of each information is described below:

− P220 C00M11100 : cortec code. In particular, this code allows the user to know what is the protocol used for remote communications (code 1 means MODBUS).

− No 2501511 and Cde 37982/007: these numbers are the serial number and the reference number of the order: they are necessary in case of problems.

− 0.002 1 Ion : This is referred to the sensibility of the E/F current input.

− Modbus: Communication protocol available through the rear RS485 communication port.

− Vx 130 250Vdc / 100 250Vac : Power supply range . In this example, the power supply can be either ac or dc voltage.


8. STARTING THE MiCOM P220 IN 5 MINUTES

The object of this chapter is to enable you to make the MiCOM P220 operational in 5 minutes before starting the motor.

8.1 Check the wiring of your installation

• First check that you have thoroughly taken note of Handling and Safety, chapter T00.

• Check that the wiring of your installation is in compliance with the connection diagram shown in chapter.2

• Check that the output relay No. 1 (terminals 2-4-6) is correctly inserted into the trip circuit of the breaking device.

• Verify that the logic input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) is correctly connected to an o/o interlock copying the position of the breaking device.

8.2 Connecting the MiCOM P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage

Before energising the MiCOM P220 relay, check that the electrical characteristics of the MiCOM P220* protection correspond to those of the auxiliary voltage of the installation.

− Switch on the auxiliary source.

− Push the live part of the MiCOM P220 relay into its housing. Once the relay is plugged in and the auxiliary source is energised, the green LED marked "Healthy" (or "Uaux" in French) should light up. This is the 4th LED down from the top.

ATTENTION : THE EXTRACTION OF THE ACTIVE PART OUT OF THE CASE COULD BE DONE BY OPENING THE TWO FLAPS (THE UPPER AND THE LOWER), THEN WITH A SCREWDRIVER OF 3MM,BY MAKING A SWIVEL OF THE EXTRACTOR LOCATED UNDER THE UPPER FLAP AND FINALLY BY EXERTING A TRACTION ON THE TWO NOTCHES SITUED BEHIND THESE SHUTTERS.

(IT IS NECESSARY - AFTER PIVOTING THE EXTRACTOR - TO WAIT 2 OR 3 SECONDS BEFORE MAKING COME OUT THE ACTIVE PART, TO LEAVE DISCHARGING THE CAPACITORS IN THE ACTIVE PART THUS AVOIDING POSSIBLE ELECTRIC ARCS IN THE EVENT OF DIRECT CONTACT OF THE CONNECTOR BLOCKS WITH METAL LIMP).


8.3 MINIMUM CONFIGURATION TO START UP THE MiCOM P220

8.3.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu

8.3.1.1 Activation of the parameter mode

From the default display of the menu which appears when connecting the MiCOM P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage, double click on the " button, the PASSWORD cell appears.

OP PARAMETERS

PASSWORD = * * * *

Click on the % button, and the flashing cursor appears. The following cell appears:

PASSWORD = A A A A

There are two possibilities:

• The relay leaves the factory with the default password AAAA. Press the % button again. The following message appears for 2 seconds to indicate that the password has been entered correctly. The MiCOM relay thus goes into parameterisation mode.

PASSWORD OK

• If a password other than the AAAA has already been loaded since MiCOM P220 relay left the factory, enter this new password by using the buttons %, $,! and ". After the validation of the new password using the % button, the cell below appears for 2 seconds. The MiCOM P220 relay goes thus into the parameterisation mode.

PASSWORD OK

NOTE : The parameterisation mode is deactivated if no button has been pressed for 5 minutes. If the relay was already in parameterisation mode when the password was entered; the cell

PASSWORD = A A A A

will be replaced by

NEW PASSWORD OK


8.3.1.2 Indication of the motor frequency

Once the password is confirmed, press the " button 4 times. The following cell appears:

FREQUENCY = 50 Hz

Then there are two possibilities:

• If the motor has a rated frequency of 50Hz, do nothing.

• If the motor has a rated frequency of 60Hz, then press the % button.

A flashing cursor appears under the 0 of the term 50 Hz.

FREQUENCY = 50 Hz

Press the ! button, and the cell below appears:

FREQUENCY = 60 Hz

Confirm this by pressing the % button.


8.3.2 CONFIGURATION Menu

After having entered the motor frequency, press the ! button 5 times.

The following menu heading appears:

OP PARAMETERS

Press the $ button, and the heading of the CONFIGURATION menu appears:

CONFIGURATION

8.3.2.1 CONFIG SELECT Submenu

Press the " button once. The heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu appears:

CONFIG SELECT

Selection of the type of analog output

This can be set only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "analog output" option.

Starting with the heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button 5 times, and the following cell appears :

ANALOG. OUTPUT 0 - 20 mA

Two possibilities arise:

• If you need an analog output signal on a 0-20 mA current loop, do nothing

• If you need an analog output signal on a 4-20 mA current loop, press % button and then the ! button.

The following cell appears:


Confirm by pressing the % button.

Selection of the information available on the analog output

This can be parameterised only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "analog output" option.


Starting from the preceding cell, press the " button, and the following cell appears:

TYPE OF ANA. INFO IA RMS

Using the % and ! buttons, select the type of information you wish to bring onto the analog output, then confirm by pressing the % key.

Selection of the type of RTD

This can be set only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "monitoring of 6 RTDs" option or monitoring of 2 thermistors + 4 RTD option.

Starting from the preceding cell, press the " button, otherwise starting from the heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button 7 times.


Type RTD = PT100

Using the % and ! buttons, select the type of RTD with which the motor is equipped, then confirm by pressing the % key.

Selection of the type of thermistors

This can be set only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "monitoring of 2 thermistors and 4 RTD" option.


• The MiCOM P220 relay is not equipped with the "analog output" option; starting from the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button 5 times. The following cell appears:

Type Thermist 1 = PTC

The MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "analog output" option; starting from the following cell:

TYPE OF ANA. INFO IA RMS

(The type of information to be brought onto the analog output can be different from IA RMS).


Press the " button once. The following cell appears:


If the No.1 group of thermistors equipping the motor is of the PTC (positive temperature coefficient) type, do nothing. On the other hand, if the motor is equipped with a group of thermistors of type NTC (negative temperature coefficient), press the % button then the ! button. The following cell appears:

Type Thermist 1 = NTC

Confirm by pressing the % button.

Press the " button , then the following cell appears :


Repeat the same operation if the No. 2 thermistor group of the motor is of type NTC.

8.3.2.2 CT RATIO Submenu: adjustment of the primary and secondary ratings of the current sensors

From inside the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button as many times as necessary to reach the heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu. As indicated below:

Press the $ button once. The heading of the CT RATIO submenu appears:

CT RATIO

Value of the primary rating of the phase CTs

Press once on the " button. The following cell appears:

PRIM PH = 1000

In this cell, indicate the value of the primary rating of the phase CTs. For example, for a CT with a ratio of 200/5, set the value 200 as explained below.


Press the % button. A flashing cursor appears under the last 0 of 1000:

PRIM PH = 1000

Using the ! and " buttons, increase and/or decrease the 1st digit. Then press the # button.

The cursor moves under the 2nd digit. Using the ! and " buttons, increase and/or decrease the 2nd digit. Then do the same for the 3rd and 4th digits. Confirm by pressing the % button.

Value of the secondary rating of the phase CTs


SEC PH = 1

If the current circuits coming from the secondaries of the phase CTs are connected to the phase current inputs with a rating of 1 A (terminals 49-50; 51-52; 53-54) of the MiCOM P220, do nothing. This implies that the secondaries of the phase CTs have the rating of 1 A. On the other hand, if the current circuits are connected to the phase current inputs with a rating of 5 A (terminals 41-42; 43-44; 45-46) of the MiCOM P220, this implies that the rating of the secondaries of the phase CTs is 5 A, press the % button. A cursor appears under the 1:

SEC PH = 1

Press the ! button. Confirm by pressing the % button. The following cell appears:

SEC PH = 5

Value of the primary of the earth sensor.

Press once on the " button. The following cell appears:

PRIM E = 1000

Press the % button. A cursor appears under the last 0 of 1000:

PRIM E = 1000



• The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT. In this cell, set the value of the ratio of the core balanced CT using the buttons !, " and #. Confirm by pressing % .

• The earth current input is connected to the residual connection of the three secondary circuits coming from the phase CTs. In this cell, set the value of the primary rating of the phase CTs using the buttons #, !, and ". Confirm by pressing % .

Value of the secondary of the earth sensor


SEC E = 1


• The earth input is connected to a core balanced CT. Do nothing, leave this value at 1.

• The earth input is connected to the residual connection of the three secondary circuits coming from the phase CTs. In this cell, set the value of the secondary rating of the phase CTs (this implies that the residual connection circuit is cabled to the earth current input corresponding to the secondary rating of the phase CTs).

If the rating is 1A, do nothing. On the other hand, if the rating is 5 A, press the % button, and a flashing cursor appears.

SEC E = 1

Press the ! button. Confirm by pressing the % button.


SEC E = 5


8.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu

Starting from the preceding cell, press the " button once. The heading of the CT RATIO submenu appears. Press the ! button once. The heading of the CONFIGURATION menu appears. Then press the $ button 4 times. The heading of the COMMUNICATION menu appears.

COMMUNICATION


COM. OK = YES

You wish to use the MiCOM P220 relay for communication, so check that the word YES appears. If it does not appear, press % once and then ! once. YES appears, so confirm with % .

If the relay MiCOM P220 is used for communication (via the RS485 port at the rear), set the various parameters of the COMMUNICATION menu using the buttons:

− " to move from one line to another and also to reduce the value of a parameter;

− % to select a parameter to be modified and also to confirm the entry of a parameter,

− ! to increase the value of a parameter.

Then press the " or ! button as many times as necessary, to return to the heading of the COMMUNICATION menu.

8.3.4 PROTECTION G 1 Menu

Press the $ button once. The heading of the PROTECTION group 1 menu appears.

PROTECTION G1

8.3.4.1 Setting the threshold of thermal current Iθ>

Press the " button once. The heading of the THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu appears :

[49] THERMAL OVER-LOAD

Press the " button once, the following cell appears.

THERMAL OVERLOAD FUNCT ? YES

Check that the word YES actually appears. If not, press once on %, then once on ! the word YES appears, confirm with %.

Press the " button twice. The following cell appears :


Iθ > = 0.2 In

Press the % button. A flashing cursor appears:

Iθ > = 0.2 In

Using the !, " and # buttons, set the value of the thermal current threshold Iθ> corresponding to the machine. Confirm by pressing the % button.

From this point, a minimum configuration has been given for starting up the MiCOM P220 relay.

This minimum configuration makes it possible to start up the MiCOM P220 relay. It is not in any way sufficient to ensure that the motor is protected. For this, it is appropriate to configure the MiCOM P220 relay completely.


8.4 COMPLETE CONFIGURATION OF THE MiCOM P220

The MiCOM P220 relay can be completely configured:

− Either by using the interface on the front (buttons !, ", $, # and % and the display unit);

− or by using the control and setting software MiCOM S1.

You can set the protections and automatic controls of the MiCOM P220 you wish to use in the following submenus:

− [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD.

− [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT.

− [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT.

− [46] UNBALANCE.

− [48] EXCES LONG START

− [51LR-50S] BLOCKED ROTOR.

− [37] LOSS OF LOAD.

− [49/38] RTD (optional).

− [49] THERMISTOR + RTD (optional).

− [66] START NUMBER.

− MIN TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS.

− RE-ACCELER AUTORISATION.

You can also set :

− the binary inputs, INPUTS submenu;

− the AND logic equations, AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu;

− the time delays associated with AND logic equations, AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu;

− the auxiliary output relays, AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu;

− the holding of the auxiliary output contact, LATCH OUTPUT Submenu;

− the tripping output relay, TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu;

− the holding of the tripping command, LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu.

Other parameters can be configured:

− monitoring of the breaking device, CIRDCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION submenu;

− characteristics of the disturbance recording, DISTURB RECORD submenu;

− motor feeder reference name, OP PARAMETERS submenu;

− motor start detection criterion, CONFIG. SELECT submenu;

− allocation of illuminated indicator LED 5, LED 5 submenu;



− allocation of illuminated indicator LED 8, LED 8 submenu.

For further information, refer to chapter 4 and 5 of the MiCOM P220 User Guide.

Do not forget to configure the trip output relay (Relay No. 1, terminals 2-4-6) in the TRIP OUTPUT RLY. Submenu.


9. COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION

If you need information regarding the operation of the MiCOM product that you have, please contact your local AREVA agent or the After Sales Service Department of AREVA T&D. and mention the reference of your MiCOM product.

The MiCOM product references are mentioned under the upper flap of the product front plate.

PLEASE MENTION THE FOLLOWING DATA WHEN YOU CALL US :

− CORTEC code of the MiCOM relay

− Serial number of the MiCOM relay

− AREVAs order reference

− AREVAs operator reference

AFTER SALES SERVICE DEPARTMENT ADDRESS AND PHONE/FAX NUMBER:

Service Après Vente/After Sales Service AREVA T&D

95 avenue de la Banquière BP75 34975 Lattes Cedex

FRANCE

Phone : 33 (0)4.67.20.55.58 ou 33 (0)4.67.20.55.55 Fax : 33 (0)4.67.20.56.00

E-mail :franç[email protected]

Technical Guide P220/EN CO/B43 MiCOM P220

Connection Diagram

Technical Guide P220/EN CO/B43 Connection Diagram MiCOM P220 Page 1/14

CONTENTS

1. CONNECTION DIAGRAM 3

1.1 MiCOM P220 typical connection 3

1.2 Typical application diagram 4

1.3 MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 6 RTD and analogue output options) 5

1.4 MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 2 thermistors and 4 RTD option and analogue output options) 6

2. CONNECTION 7

2.1 Earth connection 7

2.2 Auxiliary power 7

2.3 Current inputs 7

2.4 Binary inputs 7

2.5 Output relays 7

2.6 Front port connection (RS232) 8

2.7 RS485 rear port 9

2.7.1 Description 9 2.7.2 Connection 9 2.7.3 RS485 cable 10 2.7.4 Protocol convertor: RS232 -> K-Bus 10 2.7.5 RS232 / RS485 converter 10 2.8 Analogue output 11

2.9 RTDs 11

2.10 Thermistors 12

2.10.1 PTC type thermistors 13 2.10.2 NTC type thermistors 13

P220/EN CO/B43 Technical Guide Connection Diagram Page 2/14 MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE


1. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

1.1 MiCOM P220 typical connection A

uxili

ary

volta

ge

Sw

itchg

ear

stat

us 5

2ain

put L

1

CT

sho

rtin

g lin

ks m

ake

befo

re (

b) a

nd (

c) d

isco

nnec

t

(3)

Ear

th c

onne

ctio

n ar

e ty

pica

l onl

y

Not

a :

(1)

(c)

(a)

(b)

19 23211715

Pro

gram

mab

le

Pro

gram

mab

le tr

ippi

ng

Wat

ch d

og (

4)

outp

ut r

elay

26 13282422

Mod

ule

term

inal

bl

(with

inte

gral

cas

e ea

rth

link)

view

ed fr

om r

ear

Cas

e ea

rth

Spe

ed s

witc

h si

gnal

inpu

t L2

Pro

gram

mab

lein

put L

3

Pin

s te

rmin

als

(pcb

type

)(d

)

Alte

rnat

ive

:The

ear

th c

urre

nt in

put i

s co

nnec

ted

to th

e so

mm

atio

n of

the

thre

e ph

ase

CT

s.

Alte

rnat

ive

: Con

nect

ion

to 2

pha

se C

Ts

+ a

cor

e bl

ance

d C

T.

P22

0M

iCO

M

RL2

RL1

10 81224

WD

363537

RL3

18 14

RL5

RL4

9115 13

(4)

The

MIC

OM

P22

0 re

lay

is s

how

n w

ith p

ower

sup

ply

off

*

RS

485

com

mun

icat

ion

*

30

port

conn

ectio

n

4c 6c 2a 4a 8c 10c

12c

30a

32a

com

mon

RT

D3

RT

D2

RT

D1

Ana

logu

e ou

tput

pass

ive

sour

ce m

ode

g

4a2a

2-24

Vol

t

activ

e so

urce

mod

eA

nalo

gue

outp

ut

Orange connector

RT

D5

14a

16a

18c

16c

RT

D6

10a

12a

8aR

TD

4

30c

32c

2c 4c 6c 8c 10c

14c

16c

18c

22c

24c

28c

30c

32c

2a 4a 6a 8a 10aa

14aa

16aa

18aa

22aa

24aa

26aa

28aa

30aa

32aa

Ora

nge

conn

ecto

r

If 6

RT

D o

ptio

n :

(6)

If an

alog

ueou

tput

opt

ion

:

2c

If th

erm

isto

r op

tion

:

Earth connection (5)

(5)

The

shi

eldi

ng is

bon

ded

to th

e ea

rth

poin

t loc

ated

nex

t to

the

conn

ecto

r.

(6)

Impo

rtan

t : th

e an

alog

ue o

utpu

t opt

ion

shal

l be

used

eith

er in

act

ive

sour

ce m

ode

or in

pas

sive

sou

rce

mod

e

+ - + - + - + - + -

The

ear

th c

urre

nt in

put i

s co

nnec

ted

to a

cor

e ba

lanc

ed C

T.

outp

ut r

elay

outp

ut r

elay

Pro

gram

mab

le

Pro

gram

mab

leou

tput

rel

ay

outp

ut r

elay

Pro

gram

mab

le

inpu

t L4

Pro

gram

mab

le

Pro

gram

mab

lein

put L

5

Cas

e ea

rth

Orange connector

com

mon

com

mon

2423 2725

282621 7 1153

8 1264

CA B

S1

S2

P2

S1

P1

5 A

5 A

5 A

5 A

1A

1A

1A

1A

CA B

P2

S2

S1

P1

5 A

5 A

5 A

5 A

1A

1A

1A

1A

49

B CS

2

AP

2

S11S

2S

1

P1

5 A

5 A

1A

1A

1A

1A

49

5 A

5 A

-

P0186ENb


1.2 Typical application diagram

23+ -

Prog

ram

mab

leIn

put L

5MiC

OM

P22

0

21191713 15135810126 4 222 2433 34

-+-+-+-554856

41494250

43514452

45534654

5AA1AA

363537 1418 11 9 732 a

/c

26+ - + -

32-++ -+

Prog

ram

mab

leIn

put L

4

Prog

ram

mab

leIn

put L

3

RL5

rela

yPr

ogra

mm

able

out

put

RL3

rela

yPr

ogra

mm

able

out

put

Wat

chdo

g

RL4

rela

yPr

ogra

mm

able

out

put

Prog

ram

mab

le o

utpu

tRL

2 re

lay

Cor

e ba

lanc

ed C

T CT

phas

e A

CT

phas

e B

CT

phas

e C

tem

pera

ture

Stat

orFu

se

A B C

Con

tact

or c

oil

Vaux

On

Off

Emer

genc

y sto

p

Klax

on Sign

allin

g la

mp

Aux

iliar

yvo

ltage

Vaux

(s

ee n

ote

belo

w)

see

note

bel

ow))

Emer

genc

y sta

rtup

gy

p

Exte

rnal

rese

t

Fuse

blo

wn

52a

pow

er

statu

s 52

aC

onta

ctor

Inpu

t L1

outp

ut re

lay

tripp

ing

Prog

ram

mab

le

(ora

nge

conn

ecto

r)A

nalo

gue

outp

ut

Spee

d sw

itch

sign

alin

put L

2

Vaux

RS48

5C

omm

unic

atio

n

2 th

erm

isto

rs a

nd 4

RTD

(ora

nge

conn

ecto

r)

PC/P

LCsu

perv

isor

Am

bien

tte

mpe

ratu

re

Bear

ings

tem

pera

ture

Mot

or14

PLC

Sign

allin

g

Sign

allin

g

Sign

allin

g

The

MiC

OM

P22

0 is

sho

wn

with

pow

er s

uppl

y of

f.A

TTEN

TIO

N :

• th

e lo

gic

inpu

t sha

ll be

sup

plie

d by

a D

C a

uxili

ary

volta

ge o

nly

•

the

auxi

liary

pow

er c

ould

be

Ac

or D

C a

ccor

ding

to th

e

m

odel

num

ber o

f the

rela

y

P0187ENa


1.3 MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 6 RTD and analogue output options)

Aux

iliar

yvo

ltage

Sw

itchg

ear

stat

us 5

2ain

put L

1

CT

sho

rtin

g lin

ks m

ake

befo

re (

b) a

nd (

c) d

isco

nnec

t

(3)

Ear

th c

onne

ctio

n ar

e ty

pica

l onl

y

Not

a :

(1)

(c)

(a)

(b)

19 23211715

Pro

gram

mab

le

Pro

gram

mab

le tr

ippi

ng

Wat

ch d

og (

4)

outp

ut r

elay

26 13282422

Mod

ule

term

inal

bl

(with

inte

gral

cas

e ea

rth

link)

view

ed fr

om r

ear

Cas

e ea

rth

Spe

ed s

witc

h si

gnal

inpu

t L2

Pro

gram

mab

lein

put L

3

Pin

s te

rmin

als

(pcb

type

)(d

)

Alte

rnat

ive

:The

ear

th c

urre

nt in

put i

s co

nnec

ted

to th

e so

mm

atio

n of

the

thre

e ph

ase

CT

s.

Alte

rnat

ive

: Con

nect

ion

to 2

pha

se C

Ts

+ a

cor

e bl

ance

d C

T.

P22

0M

iCO

M

RL2

RL1

10 81224

WD

363537

RL3

18 14

RL5

RL4

9115 13

(4)

The

MIC

OM

P22

0 re

lay

is s

how

n w

ith p

ower

sup

ply

off

*

RS

485

com

mun

icat

ion

*

30

port

conn

ectio

n

4c 6c 2a 4a 8c 10c

12c

30a

32a

com

mon

RT

D3

RT

D2

RT

D1

Ana

logu

e ou

tput

pass

ive

sour

ce m

ode

g

2-24

Vol

t

activ

e so

urce

mod

eA

nalo

gue

outp

ut

Orange connector

RT

D5

14a

18a

16a

18c

16c

RT

D6

10a

12a

8aR

TD

4

30c

32c

2c 4c 6c 8c 10c

14c

16c

18c

22c

24c

28c

30c

32c

2a 4a 6a 8a 10aa

14aa

16aa

18aa

22aa

24aa

26aa

28aa

30aa

32aa

Ora

nge

conn

ecto

r

If 6

RT

D o

ptio

n :

(6)

If an

alog

ueou

tput

opt

ion

:

Earth connection (5)

(5)

The

shi

eldi

ng is

bon

ded

to th

e ea

rth

poin

t loc

ated

nex

t to

the

conn

ecto

r.

(6)

Impo

rtan

t : th

e an

alog

ue o

utpu

t opt

ion

shal

l be

used

eith

er in

act

ive

sour

ce m

ode

or in

pas

sive

sou

rce

mod

e

+ - + - + - + - + -

The

ear

th c

urre

nt in

put i

s co

nnec

ted

to a

cor

e ba

lanc

ed C

T.

outp

ut r

elay

outp

ut r

elay

Pro

gram

mab

le

Pro

gram

mab

leou

tput

rel

ay

outp

ut r

elay

Pro

gram

mab

le

inpu

t L4

Pro

gram

mab

le

Pro

gram

mab

lein

put L

5

Cas

e ea

rth

Orange connector

com

mon

com

mon

2423 2725

282621 7 1153

8 1264

CA B

S1

S2

P2

S1

P1

5 A

5 A

5 A

5 A

1A

1A

1A

1A

CA B

P2

S2

S1

P1

5 A

5 A

5 A

5 A

1A

1A

1A

1A

49

B CS

2

AP

2

S11S

2S

1

P1

5 A

5 A

1A

1A

1A

1A

49

5 A

5 A

-

P0188ENb


1.4 MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 2 thermistors and 4 RTD option and analogue output options)

Aux

iliar

yvo

ltage

Sw

itchg

ear

stat

us 5

2ain

put L

1

CT

sho

rtin

g lin

ks m

ake

befo

re (

b) a

nd (

c) d

isco

nnec

t

(3)

Ear

th c

onne

ctio

n ar

e ty

pica

l onl

y

Not

a :

(1)

(c)

(a)

(b)

19 23211715

Pro

gram

mab

le

Pro

gram

mab

le tr

ippi

ng

Wat

ch d

og (

4)

outp

ut r

elay

26 13282422

Mod

ule

term

inal

bl

(with

inte

gral

cas

e ea

rth

link)

view

ed fr

om r

ear

Cas

e ea

rth

Spe

ed s

witc

h si

gnal

inpu

t L2

Pro

gram

mab

lein

put L

3

Pin

s te

rmin

als

(pcb

type

)(d

)

Alte

rnat

ive

:The

ear

th c

urre

nt in

put i

s co

nnec

ted

to th

e so

mm

atio

n of

the

thre

e ph

ase

CT

s.

Alte

rnat

ive

: Con

nect

ion

to 2

pha

se C

Ts

+ a

cor

e bl

ance

d C

T.

P22

0M

iCO

M

RL2

RL1

10 81224

WD

363537

RL3

18 14

RL5

RL4

9115 13

(4)

The

MIC

OM

P22

0 re

lay

is s

how

n w

ith p

ower

sup

ply

off

*

RS

485

com

mun

icat

ion

*

30

port

conn

ectio

n

4c 6c 2a 4a 8c 10c

12c

30a

32a

RT

D3

RT

D2

RT

D1

Ana

logu

e ou

tput

pass

ive

sour

ce m

ode

g

2-24

Vol

t

activ

e so

urce

mod

eA

nalo

gue

outp

ut

Orange connector

14a

18a

16a

18c

16c

10a

12a

8a

RT

D4

30c

32c

2c 4c 6c 8c 10c

14c

16c

18c

22c

24c

28c

30c

32c

2a 4a 6a 8a 10aa

14aa

16aa

18aa

22aa

24aa

26aa

28aa

30aa

32aa

Ora

nge

conn

ecto

r

(6)

If an

alog

ueou

tput

opt

ion

:

If 2

ther

mis

tors

and

4 R

TD

opt

ion

:Earth connection (5)

(5)

The

shi

eldi

ng is

bon

ded

to th

e ea

rth

poin

t loc

ated

nex

t to

the

conn

ecto

r.

(6)

Impo

rtan

t : th

e an

alog

ue o

utpu

t opt

ion

shal

l be

used

eith

er in

act

ive

sour

ce m

ode

or in

pas

sive

sou

rce

mod

e

+ - + - + - + - + -

The

ear

th c

urre

nt in

put i

s co

nnec

ted

to a

cor

e ba

lanc

ed C

T.

outp

ut r

elay

outp

ut r

elay

Pro

gram

mab

le

Pro

gram

mab

leou

tput

rel

ay

outp

ut r

elay

Pro

gram

mab

le

inpu

t L4

Pro

gram

mab

le

Pro

gram

mab

lein

put L

5

Cas

e ea

rth

Orange connector

com

mon

com

mon

2423 2725

282621 7 1153

8 1264

CA B

S1

S2

P2

S1

P1

5 A

5 A

5 A

5 A

1A

1A

1A

1A

CA B

P2

S2

S1

P1

5 A

5 A

5 A

5 A

1A

1A

1A

1A

49

B CS

2

AP

2

S11S

2S

1

P1

5 A

5 A

1A

1A

1A

1A

49

5 A

5 A

+

P0189ENb


2. CONNECTION

The rear face of the MiCOM P220 relay comprises at least 2 connectors. The relay may have an optional orange third connector dedicated to the connection:

− of 6 temperature RTD sensors or 2 thermistors + 4 RTD sensors

− and one analogue output

2.1 Earth connection

The case shall be earthed according to the local standards.

2.2 Auxiliary power

The auxiliary power for the MiCOM P220 relay can be either Direct (range 24 - 60 Vdc, 48-150Vdc, 130-250Vdc) or Alternating (100-250Vac 50/60Hz). The range of voltage is specified on the relay indicator plate under the top flap of the front face.

The power should be connected to terminals 33 and 34 only.

A minimum 1.5mm² wire size is recommended.

2.3 Current inputs

The MiCOM P220 relay has 4 analogue inputs for phase and earth currents.

The nominal value of current of these measuring inputs is either 1 Amp or 5 Amp (according to the wiring diagram). The operator can, for the same relay, mix the 1 and 5 Amp inputs (phase and earth).

A minimum 2.5mm² wire size is recommended.

2.4 Binary inputs

The MiCOM P220 relay has five opto-insulated logic inputs of which three are programmable. Each input has its own polarity and it shall be powered with a dc voltage (see chapter 3 of this guide: Technical Specifications).

The control and signalling functions to which the programmable logic inputs are assigned can be selected by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

A minimum 1mm² wire size is recommended.

NOTE: A 52a contact (CB auxiliary contact: open when CB is opened) shall be wired to the binary input n°1 (terminals 22-24).

2.5 Output relays

Six output relays are available on the MiCOM P220 relay. Five relays are programmable, the last relay being assigned to the signalling of an equipment fault (WATCH DOG). All these relays are of the changeover type (1 common, 1 normally opened, 1 normally closed).

The protection and control functions to which these relays are assigned can be selected via the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.


2.6 Front port connection (RS232)

The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 serial data communication (asynchronous RS232 connection according the IEC870 requirements) and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance).

The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections of the relays 9-pin front port are as follows:

Pin no. 2 Tx Transmit data

Pin no. 3 Rx Receive data

Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common

None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual):

Pin no. 2 Rx Receive data

Pin no. 3 Tx Transmit data

Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common

For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the PC. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above, a straight through serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5.

The cable between the MiCOM relay and the PC is a standard RS232 shielded cable (male connector on the MiCOM relay side, usually female connector on PC side).

P0179ENb

FIGURE 1 PC<->FRONT PORT CONNECTION


2.7 RS485 rear port

2.7.1 Description

The rear RS485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 relays can be daisy chained together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.

2.7.2 Connection

The communication connection (port RS485) is assigned on terminals 31-32 according to the MiCOM P220 relay wiring diagram.

30323436384042444648505254

56

29313335373941434547495153

55

468

10

1820

13579

1413

1719

222426

28

212325

27

1615

1211

2

Rear terminals

communicationconnections

P0180ENa

FIGURE 2 RS485 CONNECTION

The total communication cable from the master unit to the farthest slave device is a spur, and no branches may be made from this spur. The maximum cable length is 1000m and the maximum number of devices per spur is 32. Polarity is not necessary for the 2 twisted wires.

The transmission wires should be terminated using a 150 Ω resistor at both extreme ends of the cable. To this effect, link terminals 30 and 32, if the relay is connected at the end of the RS485 bus, as indicated in figure 3.

Terminal 29 of each MiCOM relay shall be connected to the RS485 cable shielding, as mentioned figure 3.

For only one MiCOM relay connected to the RS485 bus, link terminal 29 to the case earth as indicated in figures 2 and 3.


For one and only MiCOM relay connected to the RS485 bus, terminal 29 is linked to the case earth

RS485 bus

Shielding

2 core screened cable

Terminal 29 shall be connected to the

RS485 cable shield

At the extreme end of the RS485 bus, link terminals 30 and 32

Relay connected at the extreme end of the RS485 bus

P0181ENa

FIGURE 3 RS485 CONNECTION

2.7.3 RS485 cable

It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or 200 nF total cable capacitance.

Typical specification:

• Each core: 16/0.2 mm copper conductors, PVC insulated

• Nominal conductor area: 0.5 mm2 per core

• Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed

• Linear capacitance between conductor and earth: 100 pF/m

2.7.4 Protocol convertor: RS232 -> K-Bus

KITZ 101,102 and 201 can be used.

Configuration is: 19200 bauds, 11 bits, full duplex.

2.7.5 RS232 / RS485 converter

The following RS232/RS485 converters have been tested by AREVA T&D:

• RS_CONV1 : convertor suitable for a short length and for up to 4 connected relays

• RS_CONV32 : industrial convertor, suitable for up to 32 connected relays.


2.8 Analogue output

The MiCOM P220 relay can include an optional analogue output assigned on the 30-32 terminals (orange coloured connector) which allows certain data and measuring values to be reassembled on a current loop towards an automatic controller. The selections of the type of analogue output (options: 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA) and of the type of data to be reassembled are effected in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu.

It is recommended that a 2-core screened cable is used. The cable shield shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector.

N.B.: The analogue output shall be used either in active source mode (terminals 30c-32c), or in passive source mode (terminals 30a-32a).

Earthing

shielding

Screened cable

32c -

30c +

MiCOM P220orange connector

Current loopmonitoring device0-20 mAor 4-20 mA

Case earthconnector

(1)

(1) If the current loop monitoring device isnot earthed (floating potential), thecable shielding shall be bonded to theMiCOM relay case earth connector. Inthe other case, do not connect thecable shielding.

P0182ENa

FIGURE 4 CONNECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT IN ACTIVE SOURCE MODE

2.9 RTDs

The P220 relay can, as an option, be connected to 6 RTD's or to 4 RTDs (2 thermistors option), which enables it to monitor temperature (PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2 menu). The choice of these types of RTD sensors is effected in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu.

It is recommended that connections between the relay and the RTD's are made using a 3-core screened cable with a total resistance less than 25 Ω in case of PT100, Ni100 or Ni120 RTD. For Cu10 RTD, the cable total resistance shall be less than 2.5 Ω. the wire also should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 Vrms. Impedance of cores connected to both terminals 2c and 4c (see figure 5) shall be of identical value. The cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector.


• Each core: 7/0.2 mm, copper conductors heat resistant PVC,

• Nominal conductor ana: 0.22 mm2 per core

• Screen: Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat resistant PVC sheathed

• Conductor impedance: Strictly identical for 2 of the 3 cores. Accuracy difference less than 1%


6c

earthing

shielding

Screened cable

RTD1

4c

2c

MiCOM P220 orangeconnector

Case earthconnector

P0183ENa

FIGURE 5 RTD CONNECTION

2.10 Thermistors

The P220 relay can, as an option, be connected to 2 thermistors which allows it to protect against over-temperature conditions (PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2 menu). The choice between these types of thermistor is effected in the CONFIG. SELCT submenu.

It is recommended that connections between the relay and the thermistors are made using a screened 2-core cable with a total resistance less than 100 Ω. The wire also should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 Vrms. Impedance of the 2 cores shall have similar values. The cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector.


• Each core: 7/0.2 mm copper conductors heat resistant PVC

• Nominal conductor ana: 0.22 mm2 per core

• Screen: Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat resistant PVC sheathed.

6c

earthing

shielding

Screened cable

Thermistor 1

4c

2c


Case earthconnector

P0184ENa

FIGURE 6 THERMISTOR CONNECTION


2.10.1 PTC type thermistors

For PTC type thermistor, it is usually possible to connect to the same input several thermistors in series as indicated in figure 7.

2c4c

2a4a

MOTOR

Thermistor placed on phase Awinding

Thermistor place onphase C winding

Thermistor placed on phase Bwinding

Thermistors placed onmechanical bearings

Thermistor 1 input

Thermistor 2 input


P0185ENa

FIGURE 7 PTC THERMISTORS CONNECTED IN SERIES

2.10.2 NTC type thermistors

For NTC type thermistors, it is recommended that only one thermistor is connected to each MiCOM relay input.

Exceptionally, certain NTC type thermistors can be connected in parallel to the same input. However, we do not recommend such a connection.


BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P220/EN TD/B43 MiCOM P220

Technical Data

Technical Guide P220/EN TD/B43 Technical Data MiCOM P220 Page 1/30

CONTENTS

1. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 3

1.1 Thermal replica 3

1.2 Short-circuit protection 3

1.3 Earth fault protection 3

1.4 Unbalance protection 3

1.5 Too long start-up protection 4

1.6 Locked rotor protection 4

1.7 Under current protection 4

1.8 RTD temperature detection or thermistors 4

2. AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS 5

2.1 Limitation of the number of start-ups 5

2.2 Time between 2 start-ups 5

2.3 Re-acceleration authorization 5

2.4 Logic Inputs / Auxiliary timers 5

2.5 Logic Equations 5

2.6 Logic equation time delay 5

2.7 Auxiliary Output Relays 5

2.8 Latching of the output relays 5

2.9 Trip Output Relay 5

2.10 Latching of the Trip Order 5

2.11 Control and monitoring of the breaker device 6

3. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 7

3.1 Optional analogue output 7

3.2 Optional 6 RTD inputs 7

3.3 Optional 2 thermistors inputs 7

4. RECORDING FUNCTIONS 8

4.1 Event recorder 8

4.2 Fault recorder 8

4.3 Oscillography 8

5. COMMUNICATION 9

5.1 MODBUSTM communication 9

5.2 Front communication 9

P220/EN TD/B43 Technical Guide Technical Data Page 2/30 MiCOM P220

6. INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 10

6.1 Inputs 10

6.2 Logic inputs 10

6.3 Output relays 10

6.4 Auxiliary voltage 11

7. ACCURACY 11

8. CT DATA 11

9. HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND 11

10. ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT 12

11. ENVIRONMENT 12


1. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

1.1 Thermal replica

Thermal current threshold 1θ> 0.2 to 1.5 In by steps of 0.01 In

Overload time-constant Te1 1 to 180 min by steps of 1 min

Start-up time-constant Te2 1 to 360 min by steps of 1 min

Cooling time-constant Tr 1 to 999 min by steps of 1 min

Negative sequence current recognition factor Ke 0 to 10 by steps of 1

Trip thermal threshold Set to 100%

Trip thermal threshold hysteresis 97%

Thermal alarm threshold 20 to 100% by steps of 1%

Thermal alarm threshold hysteresis 97%

Start-up inhibition 20 to 100% by steps of 1%

1.2 Short-circuit protection

Current threshold I>> 1 to 12 In by steps of 0.1 In

Time-delays tl >> 0 to 100 s by steps of 0.01 s

Operating time < 30 ms

Drop-off time < 30 ms

Hysteresis 95%

1.3 Earth fault protection

Current thresholds lo>, lo>> 0.002 to 1 Ion by steps of 0.001 Ion

Time-delays tlo>, tlo>> 0 to 100 s by steps of 0.01 s



Hysteresis 95%

1.4 Unbalance protection

Negative sequence current threshold li> 0.05 to 0.8 In by steps of 0.025 In

Time-delays tli> 0.04 to 200 s by steps of 0.01 s

Negative sequence current threshold Ii >> 0.2 to 0.8 In by steps of 0.05 In

IDMT time-delay operating time t = 1.2 / (I2/In)



Hysteresis 95%


1.5 Too long start-up protection

Start-up detection criteria (Closing 52) or (closing 52 + current threshold) optional

Current threshold Istart 1 to 5 Iθ by steps of 0.5 Iθ

Time-delays T Istart 1 to 200 s by steps of 1 s

1.6 Locked rotor protection

Current threshold Istall 1 à 5 Iθ by steps of 0,5 Iθ

Hysteresis 95%

Time delays tlstall 0.1 à 60 s by steps of 0.1 s

Locked rotor at start-up detection Yes/No

1.7 Under current protection

Current threshold I< 0.1 to 1 In by steps of 0.01 In

Time-delays tl< 0.2 to 100 s by steps of 0.1 s

Inhibition time at start-up Tinhib 0.05 to 300 s by steps of 0.1 s



Hysteresis 105%

1.8 RTD temperature detection or thermistors

RTD (or THERMISTOR + RTD) function -Optional YES/NO


2. AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS

2.1 Limitation of the number of start-ups

Reference period Treference 10 to 120 min by steps of 5 min

Number of cold starts 0 to 5 by steps of 1

Number of hot starts 0 to 5 by steps of I

Restart inhibition time Tinterdiction 1 to 120 min by steps of 5 min

2.2 Time between 2 start-ups

Inhibition time Tbetw 2 start 1 to 120 min by steps of 5 min

2.3 Re-acceleration authorization

Voltage collapse duration Treacc 0.2 to 10 s by steps of 0.05 s

2.4 Logic Inputs / Auxiliary timers

1Logic input CB position

1Logic input Speed Switch

3 Programmable Logic inputs

Logic inputs with alarm message on occurence 2 external signals, EXT1 and EXT2

Logic inputs without alarm message on occurence 2 external signals, EXT3 and EXT4 (from V3.A software version)

Timers tEXT1, tEXT2, tEXT3 and tEXT4 0 to 200 s by step of 0.01s

2.5 Logic Equations

4 « AND » logic equations

2.6 Logic equation time delay

Pick-up time delay 0 to 60 min by steps of 0.1 s

Reset time 0 to 60 min by steps of 0.1 s

2.7 Auxiliary Output Relays

1 Trip Output Relay (RL1) Programmable

4 Auxiliary Output relays (RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5) Programmable

1 watchdog relay.( for equipment default)

2.8 Latching of the output relays

Latching of the output relays (RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5)on Short-circuit, earth fault, unbalance, AND logical gates

2.9 Trip Output Relay

1 Trip Output Relay (RL1) Programmable

(Association of one or more information to the Trip Output Relay).

2.10 Latching of the Trip Order

Latching of the information(s) associated to the RL1.


2.11 Control and monitoring of the breaker device

SW Operating time alarm 0.05 to 1 by steps of 0.05 s

Number of operations alarm 0 to 50 000 operations by steps of 1

Summated contact breaking duty 106 to 4000.106 by steps of 106

Adjustment of the exponent « n » 1 or 2

Close command hold 0.2 to 5 s by steps of 0.1 s

Open command hold 0.2 to 5 s by steps of 0.1 s


3. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

3.1 Optional analogue output

Rating 0-20 mA, 4-20 Ma

Insulation 2 kV

Maximum load with active source mode 500 Ω for ratings 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA

Maximum voltage with passive source mode 24 Volt

Accuracy ± 1% full scale

3.2 Optional 6 RTD inputs

RTD type PT100, Ni120, Ni100, Cu10

Connection type 3 wires + 1 shielding

Insulation 2 kV, active supply

Setting of thresholds 0 to 200 °C by steps of 1 °C

Settings of timings 0 to 100 s by steps of 0.1 s

Influence of thermal image Yes/No

3.3 Optional 2 thermistors + 4 RTD inputs

Thermistor type PTC or NTC

Setting of thresholds 100 to 30000 Ω by steps of 100 Ω

Time-delay Set to 2 seconds


4. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

4.1 Event recorder

Capacity 75 events

Time-tag To 1 millisecond

Triggers Any protection alarm and threshold Any logic input change of state Self test events Any setting changes

4.2 Fault recorder

Capacity 5 records

Time-tag To 1 millisecond

Triggers Any trip order (relay RL1 operation)

Data Fault date Active setting group Faulty phase(s) Fault type, protection threshold Magnitude of the fault current Phases and earth currents magnitudes

4.3 Oscillography

Capacity 5 records of 3 s each

Sampling rate 32 samples per frequency cycle

Pre-time setting 0.1 to 3 s by steps of 0.1 s

Post-time setting 0.1 to 3 s by steps of 0.1 s

Triggers Any protection threshold overreach or any trip order (relay RL1 operation) Logic input Remote command

Data 4 analogue channels (3 phase currents + earth current) Logic input and output states Frequency value


5. COMMUNICATION

5.1 MODBUSTM communication

Mode RTU (standard)

Transmission mode Synchronous

Interface RS 485, 2 wires and 1 Earth

Data rate 300 to 38400 baud (programmable)

Relay address 1 to 255

Connection Multi-point (32 connections)

Cable type Half duplex (screened twisted wire pair)

Maximum cable lengt 1000 meters

Connector Connector screws or snap-on

Insulation 2 kV RMS

5.2 Front communication

Interface RS232

Protocol MODBUSTM RTU

Connectors Sub-D 9 pin female connector

Cable type Screened twisted wire cable, no-crossed


6. INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

6.1 Inputs

Phase current In 1 and 5 Ampere

Earth current Ion 1 and 5 Ampere

Frequency Range 45 to 65 Hz Nominal 50/60 Hz

Burdens Phase current inputs < 0.3 VA (5A) < 0.025 VA (1A) Earth current input < 0.01 VA at 0.1 Ion (5A) <0.004 VA at 0.1 Ion (1A)

Thermal withstand of the phase 100 In - 1 s and earth current inputs 40 In - 2 s 4 In continuous

6.2 Logic inputs

Type Independent optical isolated

Number 5 (3 programmable, 2 fixe)

Burden < 10 mA for each input

Recognition time = 2.5 ms

The logic inputs shall be powered with a dc voltage.

Logic input operation

Cortec Code

Relay auxiliary voltage range*

Minimum voltage level (Volt)

Minimum current level (milli-Amp)

A 24 60 Vdc ≈ 15 V 3,35 mA

F 48 150 Vdc ≈ 25 V 3,35 mA

M 130 250 Vdc

110 250 Vac

≈ 38 V 2,20 mA

* The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations for the logic inputs is ±20%

6.3 Output relays

Type Dry contact AgCdO

Number 6 (5 programmable + 1 watchdog)

Commutation capacity Make 30 Amps for 3 s Carry continuously 5 Amps Break 135 Vdc, 0.3 Amps (L/R = 30 ms) 250 Vdc, 50 W resistive 250 Vdc, 25 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms) 220 Vac, 5 Amps (50/60Hz-cos ϕ=0.6)

Operation time < 7 ms

Durability > 100 000 operations


6.4 Auxiliary voltage

Auxiliary voltage 3 ranges 24-60 Vdc 48-150 Vdc 130-250 Vdc /110-250 Vac

Variations ±20%

Residual peak to peak ripple 12 %

Power off withstand 50 ms

Burden <3 W standby + 0.25 for each output relay energized in Vdc < 6 VA in Vac

7. ACCURACY

Protection thresholds ± 2 %

Time delays ± 2 % with a minimum of 10 ms

NOTE: The user shall take into consiredation the Operating Time (30ms) of the protection functions when setting the timers to low values.

Measurements Typical ± 0.2 % at In for currents ± 2 °C for temperatures

Pass band for measurements 500Hz of true RMS values

8. CT DATA

Phases CT primary 1 to 3000 by steps of 1

Earth CT primary 1 to 3000 by steps of 1

Phases CT secondary 1 or 5

Earth CT secondary 1 or 5

Recommended phases CT 5P10 - 5VA (typical)

Recommended earth CT Residual connection or core balanced CT (preferred in isolated neutral systems)

9. HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

Dielectric withstand (50/60Hz) IEC 60255-5 2 kV in common mode BS 142 1 kV in differential mode ANSI C37.90

Impulse voltage (1.2/50 µs) IEC 60255-5 5 kV in common mode BS 142 1 kV in differential mode

Insulation resistance EC 60255-5 > 100 MΩ


10. ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT

High frequency disturbance IEC 61000-4-12 2.5 kV in common mode, class 3 1 kV in differential mode, class 3

Fast transient disturbance IEC 61000-4-4 4 kV auxiliary supply, class 4 ANSI C37.90.1 2 kV other, class 4

Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 8 kV, class 4

Radio frequency impulse ANSI C37.90.2 35 V/m IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m

11. ENVIRONMENT

Temperature IEC 60255-6 Storing and transportation 40°C to + 70°C Operation 25°C to + 55°C

Humidity IEC 60068-2-3 56 days at 93% RH and 40°C

Enclosure protection IEC 60529 IP 52, IK 07

Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response and endurance, class 2

Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2 Response and withstand, class 1

Seismic withstand IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2


12. THERMAL OVERLOAD CURVES

Thermal overload characteristic curvesThermal constant times :

- overload condition : T e1 = 12 minutes- start-up condition : T e2 = 6 minutes

0

1

10

100

1 000

10 000

0.1 1 10Thermal equivalent current Ieq in terms of the current thermal threshold

Iθ >

Ope

ratin

g tim

e (s

econ

ds)

Cold curveThermal status = 0 %

Hot curveThermal status = 90%

P0159ENa


Thermal overload characteristic curvesCold curves

Initial thermal state of 0%

0

1

10

100

1 000

10 000

100 000

1 10Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the currentthermal threshold I θ >

Ope

ratin

g tim

e (s

econ

ds)

Te1 = Te2 = 60 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 54 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 48 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 42 mn

Te1 = Te2 =24 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 30 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 18 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 12 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 6 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 1 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 36 mn

P0160ENa


Thermal overload characteristic curveCold curves


0

1

10

100

1 000

10 000

100 000

1 10

Thermal equivalent current Ieq in terms of the currentthermal threshold I q >

Ope

ratin

g tim

e (s

econ

ds)

Te1 = Te2 = 62 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 56 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 50 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 44 mn

Te1 = Te2 =26 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 32 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 20 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 14 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 8 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 2 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 38 mn

P0161ENa


P0162ENa

Thermal overload characteristic curvesCold curves


0

1

10

100

1 000

10 000

100 000

1 10Thermal equivalent current Ieq in terms of the currentthermal threshold I θ >

Ope

ratin

g tim

e (s

econ

ds)

Te1 = Te2 = 64 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 58 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 52 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 46 mn

Te1 = Te2 =28 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 22 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 16 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 10 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 4 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 40 mn

Te1 = Te2 =34 mn


P0163ENa

Thermal overload characteristic curvesHot curves


0

1

10

100

1 000

10 000

100 000


Ope

ratin

g tim

e (s

econ

ds) Te1 = Te2 = 60 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 54 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 48 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 42 mn

Te1 = Te2 =24 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 30 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 18 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 12 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 6 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 1 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 36 mn


P0164ENa



0

1

10

100

1 000

10 000

100 000

1 10

Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the currentthermal threshold Ιθ >

Ope

ratin

g tim

e (s

econ

ds)

Te1 = Te2 = 62 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 56 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 50 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 44 mn

Te1 = Te2 =26 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 32 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 20 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 14 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 8 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 2 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 38 mn


P0165ENa



0

1

10

100

1 000

10 000

100 000


Ope

ratin

g tim

e (s

econ

ds)

Te1 = Te2 = 64 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 58 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 52 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 46 mn

Te1 = Te2 =28 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 22 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 16 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 10 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 4 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 40 mn

Te1 = Te2 =34 mn


BLANK PAGE

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N T

D/B

43

Tech

nica

l Dat

a

M

iCO

M P

220

Pa

ge 2

1/30

Cool

ing

dow

n th

erm

al c

urve

sIn

itial

ther

mal

sta

te o

f 90%

0102030405060708090100

010

0O

pera

ting

time

(min

utes

)

Thermal state θ (en %)

Tr =

5 m

n

Tr =

12

mn

Tr =

24

mn

Tr =

48

mn

Tr =

36

mn

Tr =

60

mn

Tr =

72

mn

Tr =

84

mn

Tr =

96

mn

P02

21E

Na

P220

/EN

TD

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Tech

nica

l Dat

a Pa

ge 2

2/30

MiC

OM

P22

0 Co

olin

g do

wn

ther

mal

cur

ves

Initi

al th

erm

al s

tate

of 9

0%

0102030405060708090100

010

020

0O

pera

ting

time

(min

utes

)


Tr =

108

mn

Tr =

120

mn

Tr =

132

mn

Tr =

156

mn

Tr =

144

mn

Tr =

168

mn

Tr =

180

mn

Tr =

192

mn

Tr =

204

mn

P02

22E

Na

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N T

D/B

43

Tech

nica

l Dat

a

M

iCO

M P

220

Pa

ge 2

3/30

P02

23E

Na

Cool

ing

dow

n th

erm

al c

urve

sIn

itial

ther

mal

sta

te o

f 90%

0102030405060708090100

010

020

030

040

050

060

0O

pera

ting

time

(min

utes

)


Tr =

225

mn

Tr =

250

mn

Tr =

275

mn

Tr =

325

mn

Tr =

300

mn

Tr =

350

mn

Tr =

375

mn

Tr =

400

mn

Tr =

425

mn

Tr =

450

mn

P220

/EN

TD

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Tech

nica

l Dat

a Pa

ge 2

4/30

MiC

OM

P22

0 Co

olin

g do

wn

ther

mal

cur

ves

Initi

al th

erm

al s

tate

of 1

00%

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

0100

Ope

ratin

g tim

e (m

inut

es)

Thermal state θ (%)

Tr =

5 m

n

Tr =

12

mn

Tr =

24

mn

Tr =

48

mn

Tr =

36

mn

Tr =

60

mn

Tr =

72

mn

Tr =

84

mn

Tr =

96

mn

P02

24E

Na

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N T

D/B

43

Tech

nica

l Dat

a

M

iCO

M P

220

Pa

ge 2

5/30

P02

25E

Na

Cool

ing

dow

n th

erm

al c

urve

sIn

itial

ther

mal

sta

te o

f 100

%

0102030405060708090100

010

020

030

0O

pera

ting

time

(min

utes

)


Tr =

108

mn

Tr =

120

mn

Tr =

132

mn

Tr =

156

mn

Tr =

144

mn

Tr =

168

mn

Tr =

180

mn

Tr =

192

mn

Tr =

204

mn

P220

/EN

TD

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Tech

nica

l Dat

a Pa

ge 2

6/30

MiC

OM

P22

0

P02

26E

Na

Cool

ing

dow

n th

erm

al c

urve

sIn

itial

ther

mal

sta

te o

f 100

%

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

0100

200

300

400

500

600

Ope

ratin

g tim

e (m

inut

es)


Tr =

225

mn

Tr =

250

mn

Tr =

275

mn

Tr =

325

mn

Tr =

300

mn

Tr =

350

mn

Tr =

375

mn

Tr =

400

mn

Tr =

425

mn

Tr =

450

mn


P0227ENa

Negative phase sequence protectionInverse time characteristic curve

Ii>> element

0

1

10

0.1 1 10

Ratio "Negative phase sequence current/rated current" : I2 / In

Ope

ratin

g tim

e (s

econ

ds)

Ii>> setting range from 0,2 to 0,8 I2/In


13. EQUIVALENCE TABLE BETWEEN THE RTD IMPEDANCE MEASURED VALUE AND TEMPERATURE

Temperature (°C) 100 OHM

Platinum (Ω) 100 OHM Nickel (Ω)

120 OHM Nickel (Ω)

10 OHM Copper (Ω)

-40 84.27 79.13 92.76 7.490

-30 88.22 84.15 99.41 7.876

-20 92.16 89.23 106.41 8.263

-10 96.09 94.58 113.0 8.649

0 100.0 100.0 120.0 9.035

10 103.9 105.6 127.2 9.421

20 107.8 111.2 134.5 9.807

30 111.7 117.1 142.1 10.19

40 115.5 123.0 149.8 10.58

50 119.4 129.1 157.7 10.97

60 123.2 135.3 165.9 11.35

70 127.1 141.7 174.3 11.74

80 130.9 148.3 182.8 12.12

90 134.7 154.9 191.6 12.51

100 138.5 161.8 200.6 12.90

110 142.3 168.8 209.9 13.28

120 146.1 176.0 219.3 13.67

130 149.8 183.3 228.9 14.06

140 153.6 190.9 238.8 14.44

150 157.3 198.7 249.0 14.83

160 161.0 206.6 259.3 15.22

170 164.8 214.8 269.9 15.61

180 168.5 223.2 280.8 16.00

190 172.2 231.6 291.9 16.38

200 175.8 240.0 303.5 16.78


14. EQUIVALENCE TABLE BETWEEN ANALOGUE OUTPUT SIGNAL VALUE AND REMOTE MEASUREMENT

The hereafter table provides equivalence data between the current signal issued from the analogue output of the MiCOM P220 and the measurement value.

Rating 0 - 20 mA :

Measurement type HMI sign Unit Variation range Rating 0 - 20 mA

Phase A current

(True RMS value)

IA RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In Ias * 2 In / 20 mA

Phase A current

(True RMS value)

IB RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In Is s* 2 In / 20 mA

Phase A current

(True RMS value)

IC RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In Ias * 2 In / 20 mA

Earth current

(True RMS value)

IE RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In Ias * 2 In / 20 mA

Motor thermal state TH STATE % 0 to 150 % Ias * 150 / 20 mA

Load in % of the full load current

% I LOAD % 0 to 150 % Ias * 150 / 20 mA

Time before a permitted start

Tbef Start Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes Ias * 120 / 20 mA

Time before a thermal trip

Tbef Trip Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes Ias * 120 / 20 mA

RTDs temperature T°C RTD ° C - 40 to 215 °C Ias * 255 / 20 mA 40°C


Rating 4 - 20 mA :

Measurement type HMI sign Unit Variation range Rating 4 - 20 mA

Phase A current

(True RMS value)

IA RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In (Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA

Phase A current

(True RMS value)

IB RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In (Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA

Phase A current

(True RMS value)

IC RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In (Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA

Earth current

(True RMS value)

IE RMS Ampère 0 to 2 In (Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA

Motor thermal state TH STATE % 0 to 150 % (Ias 4 mA) * 150 / 16 mA

Load in % of the full load current

% I LOAD % 0 to 150 % (Ias 4 mA) * 150 / 16 mA

Time before a permitted start

Tbef Start Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes (Ias 4 mA) * 120 / 16 mA

Time before a thermal trip

Tbef Trip Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes (Ias 4 mA) * 120 / 16 mA

RTDs temperature T°C RTD ° C - 40 to 215 °C (Ias 4 mA) * 255 / 16 mA 40°C

NOTE : Ias is the value of the current signal generated by the analogue output. In the case where the measurement value to remote through the analogue output is outside the permissible variation range, the current signal is restricted to the limit value of the variation range. In the case where the thermal alarm « θ ALARM » is not energised, the current signal value meaning the time before a thermal trip « Tbef Trip » is equal to 20 mA.

Technical Guide P220/EN AP/B43 MiCOM P220

Application Guide

Technical Guide P220/EN AP/B43 Application Guide MiCOM P220 Page 1/40

CONTENTS

1. MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS AFFECTING SETTINGS 3

1.1 Induction motors 3

1.1.1 General 3

1.1.2 Thermal model 3

1.1.3 Start-up 4

1.1.4 Short circuits 5

1.1.5 Motor Duty rating 5

1.1.6 Motor rating as a function of altitude and of temperature 5

1.2 Environment 6

1.2.1 Fused contactor or circuit breaker 6

1.2.2 Residually connected or core-balance current transformers. 6

1.2.3 Choice of CT secondary (1A/5A) and of cross-section of secondary wiring. 7

1.2.4 Dimensioning of phase CT 8

1.3 Characteristics acquisition 8

2. SETTING FUNCTIONS 9

2.1 PROTECTION Menu 9

2.1.1 Thermal overload [49] 9

2.1.2 Short Circuit.[50/51] 15

2.1.3 Earth fault [50N/51N] 15

2.1.3.1 Neutral earthed through an impedance 16

2.1.3.2 Insulated neutral : 17

2.1.3.3 Solidly earthed neutral 17

2.1.4 Unbalance [46] 17

2.1.5 Excessive long start [48] 18

2.1.6 Locked rotor [51LR/50S] 19

2.1.6.1 Locked rotor during the start-up stage [50S] 19

2.1.6.2 Rotor stalled during normal run [51LR] 20

2.1.7 Loss of load [37] 20

2.1.8 RTD probe [49/38] and Thermistor [49] 20

2.2 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 21

2.2.1 Limitation of the number of start-ups during a given period of time [66] 21

2.2.2 Time between two successive start-ups [66] 22

P220/EN AP/B43 Technical Guide Application Guide Page 2/40 MiCOM P220

2.2.3 Re-acceleration 22

2.2.3.1 Authorisation of re-acceleration 23

2.2.3.2 Load shedding on voltage dip 23

3. EXAMPLE OF NUMERICAL APPLICATION 25

3.1 Network data 25

3.2 Motor data: 25

3.3 List of settings: 26

4. SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS 30

4.1 Logic selectivity 30

4.2 Authorisation of re-acceleration Load shedding on voltage dips 33

4.3 Setting groups 35

5. BIBLIOGRAPHY 36

6. APPENDIX A : SERVICE DUTY 37

7. APPENDIX B : INFORMATION NEEDED FOR ADJUSTMENT 39


1. MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS AFFECTING SETTINGS

1.1 Induction motors

1.1.1 General

Currently the majority of motors used in industry are induction and this application guide deals with these motors. The P220 relay can nevertheless be used as multifunction relay to protect a high-power synchronous motor. In this case, one should draw on the principles of protection of synchronous generators, the characteristics of synchronous generators being very close to those of synchronous motors.

1.1.2 Thermal model

The physical and electrical construction of the motor is very complex, the various applications, the variety of the possible conditions of abnormal operations and the various modes of failures which can occur make the relations of its thermal state very complex. This is why, it is difficult to create a mathematical model of the thermal characteristics of the machine.

There are two principal causes of damage to motors, short-circuits and heating of the windings. With regard to the heating, it is possible to model the heat propagation within the motor.

• In a sequence of heating at a constant current, the temperature of the motor varies with time similar to the charge of a capacitor under a constant voltage applied via a resistor. The applied voltage is proportional to the square of the current. The time-constant of the phenomenon is then τ = RC.

So the thermal image takes into consideration the fact that the temperature of the motor is proportional to the square of the absorbed current.

TEMPERATURE = K. (IR)².(1-e-t/τ)

With

IR = current circulating in the Motor and producing Tmax.

For a current value I, the temperature is

TEMPERATURE = K. (I)².(1-e-t/τ)

This results in :

The time t during which the motor can support the overload current I is:

t = τ. Ln [ 1/ 1- ( IR / I)² ]

There are three stages of heat exchange, each of them having its own time-constant:

− The start (the value of current >2*[Iθ>], [Iθ>] being the threshold of thermal overload current) during which the temperature of the copper stator windings grows before diffusing heat into the laminations, and the temperature of the rotor rises quickly,

− The common overload (the value of current between 0 and 2*[Iθ>]), the current being close to nominal or a few percentage points higher. The phenomenon consists of a slow thermal diffusion process through the mass of the rotor and the stator.

− The cooling-down (motor stopped), which is a slower phenomenon compared to the heating-up since the air gap is not cooled by the rotor fan.


• The simulation takes into account the square of the positive phase sequence component of the current, plus the product of the square of the negative component of the current by a factor Ke, to give the equivalent thermal current

Ieq: 22

21 KxIIIeq +=

NOTE: The presence of the negative sequence component of voltage across the motor terminals creates a pulsating current with a frequency of 2ω inside the rotor. This overheats the rotor considerably. The inclusion of the factor Ke in the equation above allows for the additional heating in the rotor. Negative sequence components can be created by: an unbalanced three phase load the presence of an external asymmetrical fault, the loss of one or two phases.

1.1.3 Start-up

Induction motors can be started ;

− direct-on-line

− star-delta

− through an auto-transformer

− with a liquid starter,

− by the addition of external rotor resistance

− with an electronic starter

−

These limit the rotor torque and the rotor current to acceptable limits

Depending on the type of start, the magnitude of the start-up current fluctuates and can even become zero (for example, during the change of connection types in a star-delta start-up). It is thus advisable to consider, the total duration of the sequence as being the start up time.

The duration of start-up depends on the characteristics of the load and the motor and, therefore, cannot be derived only from the characteristics of the motor. By way of illustration one can consider the following equation:

Cam1

60N2

Jtd ×∏

×= , where

− td : start time

− J : moment of inertia of the «load + motor» set measured about the motor shaft, in kg∗m2

− N : speed of rotation, in RPM

− Cam : average accelerating torque, in Nm


The start-up current depends on the characteristics of the motor and the type of start (direct on_line, soft).

• In the case of direct-on-line start-up (100% of the nominal voltage is applied across the terminals) the currents are large and can reach values up to 10 times higher than the rated current of the motor, a typical average value being of order of 5 times the rated current.

• During soft start-ups, however the current can remain at the rated motor values. However, one should remember that during the re-acceleration stages (caused by a provisional, total or partial, loss of voltage), the motor will absorb a re-acceleration current equal to its direct start-up current. This must be taken into account when adjusting the Locked rotor and Short-circuit functions.

1.1.4 Short circuits

In the event of a short-circuit close to the motor, the motor will feed the fault by transforming its kinetic energy into electric power. The resulting current is of short duration: a few hundreds of milliseconds, except for the high-inertia motors where the current can last several seconds. In the first moments, the amplitude of this current is as high as that of the direct-on-line start-up current. Therefore, the constraints to be taken into account when setting the Locked Rotor and Short-circuit functions are the same as for the re-acceleration, and this contribution to the fault current should not activate these two functions.

When calculating a possible short-circuit currents on the network, it will be necessary to take into account the contribution of motors to the fault current. This current contribution may even exceed double the fault current value during the first 100 milliseconds. Consequently, they affect the setting of instantaneous current base protections and the rating of the equipment to withstand the fault currents.

1.1.5 Motor Duty rating

The duty ratings can be:

• Continuous

• Temporary

• Intermittent (periodic)

The manufacturers of motors oversize their power by a factor depending on the service duty. For the service duty chosen, one also obtains the maximum number of motor starts per hour (or, in other words, a motor will tolerate more or less starts per hour depending on its oversizing).

1.1.6 Motor rating as a function of altitude and of temperature

As the altitude increases, the air becomes more rarefied so the quality of the motor cooling deteriorates. Because of this a correction factor being a function of the altitude must be applied.

Likewise, as the ambient temperature rises, the efficiency of cooling decreases. This should be taken into account by applying a correction factor.


Shown below is a monogram relating the derating factors applicable to motors at various altitudes.

Temperature correction factor

1

0 1000 2000altitude (m)

3000

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

40˚C45˚C50˚C

80˚C55˚C

P0169ENa

The P220 relay . incorporates these derating factors within the relay. The correction is linear between 40°C (correction factor =1) and 65°C (correction factor = 0,75).

For this purpose, the relay measures the ambient temperature using an external RTD (resistance temperature detector) probe. This RTD probe is usually placed near the cooling air inlet of the motor.

1.2 Environment

1.2.1 Fused contactor or circuit breaker

The majority of motors, especially the low-power ones, are connected to the network via a fused contactor or fused switch. This breaking device may not have sufficient breaking capacity to interrupt the fault (short-circuit) current. The fault current can easily reach values of up to ten times the rated current of the motor. Consequently, when the current exceeds the breaking capacity of the contactor, contactor tripping should be disabled. This tripping would generate a permanent arc across the contacts leading to the destruction of the contactor. Back up fuse protection must be used to ensure that the contactor/switch is not destroyed in the event of excessive current flow.

This problem does not arise when a circuit breaker is used.

1.2.2 Residually connected or core-balance current transformers.

The readings of the zero-sequence current which is characteristic of an earth fault can be taken either:

• by residual connection of the 3 phase current transformers (CT) (connecting in parallel the 3 CTs and adding up the secondary currents),

• or by the use of a core balance current transformer with a core incorporating the 3 phase conductors (adding up of the magnetic fields inside the core).

If the neutral of the network is grounded through a limiting impedance or, isolated in the case of an insulated neutral, a core balance current transformer is preferred as it avoids the possible problems of a false zero-sequence current created by the asymmetrical saturation of the phase CTs, or even the complete saturation of one of them during the start-up. These currents can reach values up to several times the motor rated current (typically 5 Inmotor), and this phenomenon can be aggravated by the magnetisation of CTs when opposite retentive fluxes exist in the CTs.

These shortcomings may be overcome by employing suitable earth fault settings and by careful selection of the CTs, but the use of a core balance transformer is recommended.


Type of grounding Preferential solution Solution alternative

Solidly earthed neutral point

3 CT (+a stabilising resistance)

3 CT + core balance transformer

Neutral earthed through impedance (ex: current limited to30A by a resistance)

3 CT + core balance transformer

3 CT (+a stabilising resistance), or

2 CT + core balance transformer (cost-effective solution)

Insulated neutral 3 CT + core balance transformer

2 CT + core balance transformer (cost-effective solution)

1.2.3 Choice of CT secondary (1A/5A) and of cross-section of secondary wiring.

A current transformer (phase CT or balance-core current transformer) must supply the power consumed by:

• its internal resistance (design feature of CT)

• the secondary wiring (cross-section 2.5 mm2, 4mm2, 6mm2)

• connected loads (one or more protection relays etc.)

If the protection relay is situated at a considerable distance from CTs, the load constituted by the wiring cannot be considered to be negligible:

Example:

• relay 200 m distant from CTs

• rated secondary current 5A

• wiring: copper, cross-section 2.5 mm2

calculation of cable consumption:

− cable length = 2 x 200m = 400m

− cable resistance R = 0.4 km x 18 / 2.5 mm2 = 2.9Ω

− Hence the cable losses = 2.9Ω x (5A)2 = 73 W.

If the rated secondary current is chosen to be 1A, the cable losses are

− cable resistance R = 0.4 km x 18 / 2.5 mm2 = 2.9Ω

− hence the wiring consumption is = 2.9Ω x (1A)2 = 2.9 W

If the CTs are not in close proximity to the relay it is advisabe to use 1A CTs to minimise the cable losses and to reduce the burden on the CTs.


1.2.4 Dimensioning of phase CT

The consumption of the phase current input terminals of the MiCOM P220 relay is:

− ≤ 0.3 VA In = 5A

− ≤ 0.025 VA In = 1A

The rule to follow in the case of CT saturation is:

• The threshold for the short-circuit current should be set below 90% of the limiting overload current of CTs. Under these conditions the tripping is guaranteed for fault currents up to 50 times the value of saturation current without an aperiodic component of CT current.

Choice of phase CTs:

• Applications only for voltages ≤ 20 kV

• Rf = total resistance of the wiring (+ other possible loads on CT), in Ohms

• In = rated secondary current for CT and relay (1A or 5 A)

• Icc = maximum symmetrical three-phase fault current of the secondary wiring of CT (in Amps).

Phase CT CT rating (IEC 185) Note

Breaking device

Load in VA Accuracy

Contactor or Switch

5 A ≥ (0.3 + Rf x In2) 5P10

+ Fuse 1 A ≥ (0.025 + Rf x In2) 5P10

5 A ≥ (0.3 + Rf x In2) 5P K with

K ≥

× InIcc

50

Circuit-breaker 1 A ≥ (0.025 + Rf x In2) 5P K with

K ≥

× InIcc

50

Setting of the threshold of short-circuit current: ≤ 0.9 x K x In

NOTE: For economic reasons, a CT with a 10% accuracy (10P) can be used instead of one with 5% (5P), however the thresholds of thermal overload and unbalance protections will be less precise, which can be perfectly acceptable if the motor has been oversized in relation to its duty or not used for heavy-duty services.

1.3 Characteristics acquisition

Before setting the relay it is vital to ensure that the correct motor parameters detailed in appendix have been obtained.


2. SETTING FUNCTIONS

2.1 PROTECTION Menu

2.1.1 Thermal overload [49]

Overloads can result in excessive stator temperature rises in excess of the thermal limit of the winding insulation. Whilst this may not cause the motor to burn out immediately, it has been shown that the life of the motor can be shortened if these overloads persist. The life of the motor is not purely dependant on the temperature of the windings but on the time that it is exposed to these temperatures. Due to the relatively high thermal storage capacity of induction motors, infrequent overloads of a short duration may be tolerated without damage. Sustained overloads of a small percentage may result in premature ageing and insulation failure.

In the same way, an unevenly distribution of load or a slight unbalance of the network brings about the appearance of negative sequence currents which also contribute to the heating of the rotor (for more details, see the negative overcurrent protection function).

The motor temperature varies exponentially with the increase of the current. Similarly, the temperature decreases in the same way. So to provide a close sustained overload protection, the relay incorporates three thermal time constants, thanks to which the thermal reproduction of the relay is paired narrowly with the protected motor during heating and cooling conditions.

The thermal withstand capability of the motor is affected by heating in the winding prior to the fault. The thermal replica is designed to take into account the extremes of zero pre-fault current, known as the cold condition, and full rated pre-fault current, known as the hot condition. With no pre fault current, the relay will be operating on the cold curve. When the motor is , or has been, running at full load prior to a fault, the windings will already be dissipating heat and the hot curve is applicable. Therefore, during normal operation, the relay will be operating within these two limits, unless programmed to do otherwise.

However, it should be noted that the overload protection includes the monitoring of both the stator and the rotor. This protection can be realised in various ways:

• 1: direct measurement through the use of temperature sensors (see the corresponding paragraphs),

• 2: indirect measurement by the means of current measurement,

• 3: by a combination of the two preceding principles.

The P220 relay design combines all three principles listed. No.1 is detailed below in the paragraph dealing with overload protection through the use of temperature sensors. No.2 and No.3 are described in this paragraph.


In the case of minor overloads and of light-duty service conditions, stator current measurement is sufficient to ensure protection. This control can be achieved using a time-independent current threshold setting for a definite time overcurrent protection or, still better, IDMT overcurrent protection. The thermal protection elements which are overheated by a fraction of the main current, have a time-constant which is very close to that of the motor. This makes it possible to obtain a real-time image of the thermal status of insulation. This type of protection takes into account the fact that the steady-state temperature of the motor is proportional to the square of the absorbed current, the protection is also provided with a cold curve and a hot curve to ensure that the relay takes into account the initial motor temperature.

The thermal protection described above makes use of current measurement to protect the motor. Hence it will monitor balanced and unbalanced overloads. The thermal time-constant is adjustable in order to match any type of motor. The positive (I1) and negative (I2) components of the current are composed together in order to result in a equivalent thermal current replica of the temperature of the motor.

This equivalent thermal current is given by the equation : Ieq = √(I1

2 + Kex I2

2), where Ke is an adjustable parameter used to account for the effects of heating produced by the negative component of the current when developing the thermal image.

From this equivalent thermal current, the thermal state θ of the motor is calculated every 5 cycles (every 100ms for a network of 50 Hz or 83.3ms for 60 Hz) by the relay in accordance with the following formula.

θ i+1 = (Ieq/Iθ>)² . [1-e(-t/T) ] + θ i . e(-t/T)

θ i : is the initial thermal state.

If the absorbed current is less than the thermal overload threshold [Iθ>], thus typically less than the nominal current or the full load current, then the thermal state θ will be less than 100% , so no tripping occurs.

If the absorbed current is greater than the thermal overload threshold [Iθ>], in this case the thermal state θ will be greater than 100% and so tripping will take place.

In the thermal model selected, the time of tripping depends on the initial state of the motor. The equation used to calculate the tripping time for a thermal state of the motor at 100 % is:

t = T x ln[ (K2 - θi) / (K2-1)]

The equation is valid for currents whose value is constant over a certain period of time, where:

− the value of T, thermal time-constant which depends on the value of the ratio Ieq / Iθ: T = Te1 if 0 < Ieq ≤ 2*Iθ (overload curve ) T = Te2 if Ieq > 2*Iθ (start-up curve ) T = Tr if Ieq=0 (cooling curve motor stopped)

NOTE: Ieq = 0 is obtained through the logic input No.1 of the relay which recovers the information «contactor position open».

− Iθ = thermal current threshold setting

− K = Ieq/ Iθ

− θi = initial thermal state of the motor (ex.: thermal state of 50% ! θi=0.5)


• The heating time-constant Te1 can be estimated from the motor heating curve as shown below.

Temperature

Time

θ m

Motor heating curve

Te

0.632 θ m

P0170ENa

This curve corresponds to the following law:

θ(t) = θm * (1 e-t/Te) ,

Where:

θm = maximum temperature after stabilisation of heat exchange, in degrees °C Te = heating time-constant t = time elapsed

The heating time-constant can be clearly defined. When a motor is absorbing its rated current indefinitely, it reaches 63.2% of its steady-state temperature (θT = 63.2% θm) after one time-constant Te.

The cold curve of the motor is thus given by:

t = Tr x ln[ K2 / (K21)]

Where the equation for the motor cooling temperature is given by.

θ = K² (1 e t/Tr ).

When the motor is stopped, the rotor fan cooling is stopped also, hence the motor cooling down is few efficient. This causes the cooling time-constant to increase considerably This constant is generally much longer than the heating time-constant. In order to compensate for this phenomenon and to obtain a correct thermal replica, the cooling time constant is used by the relay.

An adjustable cooling time-constant (Tr) is provided in order to take into account the various modes of cooling.

The cooling time-constant Tr can be estimated from the motor cooling curve in the following way:


Temperature

Time

θ m

Motor cooling-down curve

Tr

0.368 θ m

P0171ENa

This curve corresponds to the following law:

θ(t) = θm * e-t/Tr, Where:

θm = maximum temperature when motor is stopped Tr = cooling time-constant t = time elapsed

The cooling time-constant can be clearly defined . When a motor is stopped, its internal temperature decreases with time. This internal temperature reaches 36,8% of the initial temperature (temperature at the time when the motor was turned off) at the end of the period, which is equal to its time-constant Tr.

The P220 relay also has:

• a thermal alarm to inform the user (when in operation mode) if the motor is likely to become overloaded before a trip occurs. Remedial action can then be taken before the motor is tripped.

• Inhibition of a thermal tripping during starting

During the start-up stage (i.e. during the parametrically defined start-up delay time tIstart), it is possible to inhibit thermal tripping. When thermal inhibition during start-up is enabled, the calculation of the thermal state during the start-up delay time tIstart remains effective but should this value exceed 90%, the value of the thermal state would be retained at 90%. When the start-up delay time expires, the thermal inhibition during start-up disappears. This function does not affect the operation of the thermal alarm feature.

This inhibition during start-up can be useful for certain motors which can withstand a locked rotor for a very short time but normally have very long start up times. This can be the case of certain motors started using reduced voltage. The time-constant Te2 is then set to take into account rapid heating which occurs if the rotor is locked, whereas the motor would be thermally protected during the start-up stage by the function «Start-up too long» and, as the case may be, by the temperature sensors.


• Thermal prohibition of restart

• To a certain extent, the thermal overload protection can limit the number of start-ups by selecting a curve located just above the point of start-up. It is is actually very difficult to satisfy the manufacturers recommendations, for the limit of the number of starts by the thermal overload protection. This may allow the motor to start and then to exceed the maximum temperature.

The purpose of the "Thermal prohibition of start-up "function is to avoid thermal tripping during the start-up sequence of the motor. The motor will have to cool down before it will be authorised to start.

The tripping time for the thermal replica protection is calculated in the following way:

ttrip = T * ln [(Ieq / Iθ>)2 - θinitial] / [(Ieq / Iθ>)2 - 1] (1)

in order to avoid thermal tripping during the start-up stage, ttrip > td.

Therefore, according to (1),

td < Te2 * ln [(Id / Iθ>)2 - θforbid start] / [(Id / Iθ>)2 - 1]

Hence it follows that the setting of the threshold of prohibition of start-up θforbid start must be lower than:

θforbid start < [(Id / Iθ>)2 * (1 exp(td / Te2))] + exp (td / Te2)

Where:

Id = actual start-up current, td = actual start-up time, Te2 = thermal time-constant at the moment of start-up, Iθ> = current threshold of thermal overload, ttrip = time of tripping for the thermal replica protection.

• Thermal image influenced by the ambiant temperature

At the beginning of this paragraph we said that the overload protection afforded by the P220 relay can also be ensured by a combination of a temperature sensor (direct heating measurement), and a current measurement (indirect heating measurement). In this case, it is possible to modify the calculated thermal image of the motor by making use of information about the temperature outside of the motor. The programmed thermal current threshold can be corrected using correction factors to give a more precise representation of the thermal state of the motor.

This thermal current threshold correction factor is applied automatically by the relay when calculating the thermal state of the motor if this facility is set on.

The values of this factor is given below:

Ambient temperature 40° 45° 50° 55° 60° 65°

Thermal current threshold correction factor (Coef)

1 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75


A typical setting of the thermal protection is :

− Thermal overload current threshold [Iθ >] : between 105% et 108% (max.) of the motor rated current (this threshold is typically equivalent to the full load current).

NOTE: The nominal current : is the current value for which the moteur supplies his maximum efficiency.

The Full Load current : is the limit value of the thermal current value of the motor with the time under its continuous duty rating (This term is used in North of America)

− Negative sequence current recognition factor : [Ke] = 3

− Heating time-constants (Te1), during the start-up (Te2) and the cooling-down time constants (Tr): The manufacturer should be consulted for the heating and cooling time constants.

⇒ Te1 must be set to be equal to, or even slightly lower than the motor manufacturers value ( Stator thermal heating).

⇒ Te2 must be typically set to be lower than or equal to Te1. It is used to modify the thermal curve of the motor during the start phase . In case of a SOFT start, (Yye/Delta) for example, the current absorbed by the motor after the start phase is 57% of the current controlled by the relay (Delta connection) while durning the start phase ( Yye connection), the current absorbed by the motor is equal to the current monitored by the relay. For that, Te2 is used to reduce the operating time during the start up. For application with Direct-on-line start up, adjust Te2=Te1, which results in one thermal curve.

⇒ It is important to plot the thermal characteristics chosen to assure that the COLD curve has no intersection area with the start up charactersistics. In certain applications, the time constants could not be available. However, a graphical presentation of these values could be given. In this case, Te1 should be selected so once it is plotted, it will match the cold motor curve.

⇒ For applications where neither constant time values nor thermal curves are given, Te1 and Te2 should be chosen in such a way that they fall above the start up characteristics but below the motor locked Rotor current threshold. In this way, the thermal overload protection assure to a certain degree the protection under locked rotor conditions.

⇒ The cooling-down time-constant Tr should ideally be set slightly higher than the value provided by the manufacturer. This element is important with motors having differents functionning cycles because the precise information of the motor thermal state is needed during heating and cooling phases. Il is usually a multiple of Te1.

REMARK: IF HOWEVER THE MANUFACTURERS DATA ARE NOT KNOWN, ONE SHOULD SET THE FOLLOWING VALUES: TE1 = TE2 = 14MIN AND TR = 28MIN.


• Alarm threshold θALARM: Its setting is primarily related to the motor operation modes and the concept of protection. A typical adjustment consists of setting the threshold θALARM to be slightly higher than the ratio (Irated motor / Iθ>)2 , which generally corresponds to a value of about 90%.

2.1.2 Short Circuit.[50/51]

A phase to phase short-circuit at the terminals of the motor or in the feeder cables, draws very large currents capable of damaging the motor and its feeder cable This also poses the threat of fire within the motor room.

In this case ,it is essential to detect the fault and to send the tripping command rapidly to the breaking device. To attain these objectives, the P220 relay is provided with an overcurrent element operating on fundamental component, with a settable definite time delay.

The current threshold must be set as low as possible, without tripping due to

− the start-up current of the motor

− the contribution of the motor to an external fault as well as

− the re-acceleration current due to voltage drops.

In order to achieve this, the direct on-line start-up current must always be taken into account in the calculation of the setting even if the motor started under reduced voltage (soft start). Thus the short-circuit current threshold must be set higher than the direct on-line start-up current value.

Taking into account aperiodic current components, the typical settings are:

− [I>>] = 130% x kstart x Inmotor and [tI>>] = 100ms

− [I>>] = 180% x kstart x Inmotor and [tI>>] = 0 ms

where kstart : start-up current of the motor in per unit.

It should then be checked that the threshold [I>>] is lower than :

− 90% of the limiting saturation current of the CTs used, and

− 1/3 of the minimum three-phase fault current at the motor terminals.

IMPORTANT: IF A FUSED CONTACTOR IS USED TO CONTROL THE MOTOR , THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION MUST NOT TRIP THE CONTACTOR. THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION MUST BE DISABLED AND THE FUSE SHOULD INTERRUPT THE FAULT CURRENT. IF THE CONTACTOR IS ALLOWED TO INTERRUPT FAULT CURRENT, SERIOUS DAMAGE COULD BE CAUSED DUE TO EXCESSIVE ARCING AT THE CONTACTS.

2.1.3 Earth fault [50N/51N]

Overheating of the stator windings is likely to lead to insulation deterioration. Since the windings are surrounded by an earthed metal case, stator faults usually manifest themselves as earth faults.

To protect against this, the P220 relay is provided with two independent earth fault overcurrent elements with settable definite time delays. This function reacts only to the fundamental component of the earth fault current, and thus remains insensitive to the disturbances of the higher-order harmonics (equal to or higher than 2).


The earth fault protection function may be provided either by residual connection of the 3 phase current transformers (CTs), or by the use of a core-balance current transformer.

It is preferable to use a core balance current transformer as this is more stable and is more sensitive. If residually connected CTs are used, the tripping setting would have to be increased by as much as 10 % higher than the rated current of the CT. This is highly undesirable because of the resulting increase in the earth fault current setting.

Incorrect tripping can result from the saturation of one or more CTs during motor starting. Increased stability can be achieved in two ways :

• increasing the current threshold,

• insertion of a stabilising resistance in series with the P220 relay.

The value of stabilising resistor can be found from the following equation.

Rstab > (Id / Is) * (RCT + 2*R

f + RRE),

where:

Id = start-up current magnitude brought to the secondary

Is = earth fault setting in Amps (threshold Io> or Io>>)

RCT

= dc resistance of CT secondary windings.

Rf = resistance of single lead from CT to relay

RRE

= other resistances connected in series to the CT (relays etc.)

The following earthing systems may be employed.

2.1.3.1 Neutral earthed through an impedance

The earth fault current is mainly comprising active current component resulting from the resistance of neutral point, the capacitive zero sequence (residual) contribution from the cables being of much lower value, even negligible.

Typical settings are :

• in the case of a residual connection to three phase CTs:

− [Io>>] is higher than 10% of the CT rated primary current, and

− 2 times higher than the capacitive residual current resulting from the motor feeder cables in case of external fault, and

− lower than the residual current resulting from the resistance of neutral point, and

− [t Io>>] = 100 ms

• in the case of a core balance transformer.

− [Io>>] is 2 times higher than the capacitive residual current resulting from the motor feeder cables in case of external fault, and

− lower than the residual current resulting from the resistance of neutral point,

− [tIo>>] = 100 ms

Note that current settings lower than 1 Amps are usually not applied.


2.1.3.2 Insulated neutral :

A core balanced transformer is used as the fault current is due to the cable capacitive leakage current.

A single earth fault will not cause the relay to trip but the fault should be localised .


− [ Io>> ] is 2 times higher than the capacitive residual current resulting from the motor feeder cables in case of external fault, and

− lower than the capacitive residual current resulting from the other cables,

− [tIo>>] = 100 ms.

Note that current settings lower than 1 Amps are usually not applied.

If these settings are not compatible with the maximum value of the earth fault current, it is then necessary to use a directional earth fault relay.

2.1.3.3 Solidly earthed neutral

The earth fault current is mainly inductive current, with magnitude being close to that of the three-phase short-circuit fault currents. The contribution of capacitive residual current from the cables is negligible.


• in the case of a residual connection to three phase CTs:

− [Io>>] is higher than 10% of the CT rated primary current, and

− [tIo>>] = 100 ms

2.1.4 Unbalance [46]

Under normal motor running conditions only positive sequence current components flow. The presence of a negative sequence component produces a field revolving in an opposite direction to that of the rotor. It induces rotor winding currents at double the supply network frequency. The skin effect in the rotor winding bars at this frequency can cause a significant increase in the resistance of the rotor. The rotor will overheat leading to deformation of the rotor bars and damage to them. This imposes additional heating of the stator that is in excess of the manufacturers rating.

Even if the thermal protection provided by this relay takes into account negative sequence component of the current, it will not account for the additional heating due to high unbalance rate. In the event of the motor losing one phase of its supply, considerable overheating would occur, hence protection for negative sequence is employed separately

In order to provide this function, the P220 relay is equipped with two independent negative sequence overcurrent elements. The first one, denoted by [Ii>], is an alarm threshold associated with an adjustable constant time. The second, denoted [Ii>>], is a threshold of tripping associated with a inverse time characteristic curve. The features of this curve are described in chapter 5.3 of this technical guide.

The equation of this curve is :

for 0.2 < (I2/In) < 2 --> t = 1.2 / (I2/ In)


This type of curve has the following advantages:

1. For an external fault:

• to desensitise the relay during a violent unbalance fault occurring upstream or on external feeders, when the motor temporarily behaves like a negative current generator ; selective tripping at the faulty feeder level is secured - the inverse time characteristic curve allows co-ordination with the faulty feeder protection relay.

• to avoid nuisance tripping which may occur due to high starting currents causing the CTs to saturate.

2. For a motor fault.

• To ensure rapid fault interruption, but to retain co-ordination with protective fuses when fused contactors are used.

It should be noted that the single-phase and two-phase faults also generate negative currents. However, the value of the single-phase fault current is generally limited, and in any case these faults are eliminated by relevant protection with a time shorter than that afforded by the IDMT curve.

Typical settings are

• alarm threshold : [Ii>] = 15% of the motor rated current, with a delay time of about 8 to 10s,

• tripping threshold : [Ii>>] = 20% of the motor rated current.

2.1.5 Excessive long start [48]

The start-up current is specific to each motor and depends on the start-up method used (direct on-line, autotransformer, rotor resistance insertion, etc.). As for the start-up time, it is dependent of the load connected to the motor.

During the start-up period, this current surge imposes a thermal strain on the rotor. This is exaggerated as the rotor will have lost all of its ventilation because it does not rotate at the full speed. Consequently, a long start-up causes a rapid heating of the motor. For this reason, this protection is complementary to the thermal overload protection, and makes it possible to check that the start-up sequence does not exceed the parameters given by the manufacturer

The MiCOM P220 relay offers the choice of motor start-up detection as follows :

• closure of the contactor/circuit breaker, or

• closure of the contactor/circuit breaker and overshoot of the starting current threshold [I

start].

The user can configure either option using the CONFIGURATION menu. Method 1 is recommended. This detects the start sequence on the circuit breaker closure.

The function " Excessive long start " is initiated either by the detection of a start-up sequence, or (under normal operation) by the detection of a phase of re-acceleration. If at the end of delay time [tIstart] the current remains higher than the threshold [Istart], then a trip takes place.



• [Istart] is equal to:

⇒ 1.5*[Iθ>] if the motor start-up current is lower than 4 times the rated current;

⇒ 2*[Iθ>] if the motor start-up current is equal to or higher than 4 times the rated current and lower than 8 times the rated current;

⇒ 3*[Iθ>] if the motor start-up current is equal to or higher than 8 times the rated current.

• [tIstart] = 120 % of the time of start-up and shorter than withstand time for the motor.

2.1.6 Locked rotor [51LR/50S]

There are two possible conditions for the rotor becoming locked : at motor start-up or during normal run. Whatever the case, a locked rotor produces an input current equivalent to the direct on-line starting current.

The most frequent cause of a locked rotor is to a phase break (eg: melting of a fuse protecting the motor, or one pole of a contactor remaining open.). A stationary motor can not start and remains stationary with two phases feeding the stator. In the same way, a locked rotor can take place after the loss of a phase after the motor has been working normally. The appearance and the importance of a locked rotor depend on the motor load at the time when the loss of phase occurs. In both cases the result is likely to be a thermal overloading of the rotor windings.

Under healthy conditions, a revolving flux is induced in the rotor, which generates balanced rotor current in the windings which produce symmetrical rotor heating. In the event of the loss of one phase of the supply, a heterogeneous flux is induced in the rotor as a result of the positive component and the negative components of the current. This causes uneven heating of the rotor windings which depend on the position of the rotor bars. This can lead to the damage of the rotor bars. For these reasons, it is important to eliminate the fault as quickly as possible.

2.1.6.1 Locked rotor during the start-up stage [50S]

This function is enabled only during the motor start-up stage. In order to take advantage of this function, the motor has to be equipped with a tachometric control, which indicates if the motor turns. This information is carried to a digital input of the relay so that the relay can detect whether the motors speed is or is not zero. A locked rotor is detected if, after expiration of delay time [tIstall], the digital input indicates zero speed (logic 0).

Motors for which the real start-up time is shorter than their locked rotor withstand time can be protected against locked rotor condition at start-up without the help of a tachymetric control device (speed switch). For such cases, the use of [tIstart] time setting (refer to « [48] Excessive long start » function) shorter than the motor locked rotor withstand time allows to provide efficient protection against both too long start-up sequence and locked rotor at start-up conditions.


2.1.6.2 Rotor stalled during normal run [51LR]

This function is valid only outside the re-acceleration and start-up stages. Tripping takes place if the current remains higher than [I

stall] for a time period equal to or

higher than delay time [stall].

Typical settings of the function [ 51LR/50S ] are :

• [Istall] :

⇒ 1.5*[Iθ>] if the motor start-up current is lower than 4 times the rated current;

⇒ 2*[Iθ>] if the motor start-up current is equal to or higher than 4 times the rated current and lower than 8 times the rated current;

⇒ 3[Iθ>] if the motor start-up current is equal to or higher than 8 times the rated current.

• [tIstall] is 1 to 2 s for a pump and a fan, and 5 to 10 s for a crusher. In all the cases, this setting must be lower than the withstand time for the motor with the rotor stalled.

2.1.7 Loss of load [37]

This function makes it possible to detect the motor running without a load connected on the output shaft. It is automatically disabled when the motor is off, and it is reactivated after the inhibit time has expired [Tinhib]. This delay time [Tinhib] allows the motor to perform an off-load start.

The use of this undercurrent protection function allows:

• protection against the electrical pumps becoming unprimed.

• protection against a drive belt or drive shaft breakdown.

Typical settings are:

• [I<] = higher than the no-load running current of the motor and lower than the normal running current of the motor in normal operation,

• [Tinhib

] = This setting depends on the load connected to the motor. If the motor is started on load , this delay time is set to its minimal value, that is to say 0,05 s. If the motor is idle-started, this delay time is set to be slightly longer than the load increase time of the motor.

• [tI<] = depends on the load driven by the motor (often set to a few seconds).

2.1.8 RTD probe [49/38] and Thermistor [49]

Prolonged overloads make the windings hot, which can cause a premature ageing of the insulation. In the same way, the excessive heating of the bearings can lead to irreversible damage.

As explained in the paragraph dealing with the thermal overload protection [ 49], this function can be realised either indirectly, by the means of an overcurrent relay or using the thermal replica, and/or by the means of direct temperature measurement.

Certain motors can be equipped with resistor probes, placed in the stator slots. They are resistors made out of platinum, or sometimes out of nickel or copper, their resistance varying with the temperature. There are generally six of them, distributed in the stator winding.


The setting of the tripping and alarm thresholds depends on the temperature class of the motor, the ambient temperature and the altitude of the site where the motor is installed.

When the correction of the thermal replica by the measurement of the motor outside temperature is used, RTD1 probe should be placed near the cooling air inlet of the motor.

2.2 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu

2.2.1 Limitation of the number of start-ups during a given period of time [66]

The start-up of a motor is often carried out at the price of an increase in temperature above the normal level especially in the case of several successive start-ups having relatively long start-up times. In this situation there exists the danger of premature ageing of the motor insulation and, furthermore, the rotor undergoes high thermal strains. For more precise details, see the paragraphs relating to the excessive start-up times functions and locked rotor.

In order to limit the start-up repetition frequency for a motor, the P220 relay has a counting and locking system based on four following parameters:

− duration of the reference period;

− the number of cold starts;

− the number of hot starts;

− the restart prohibition delay time [Tinterdiction].

The reference delay time is activated once a start-up is detected, and provided that it was initially equal to zero for the reference period, a counter records the number of hot starts, and another one records the number of cold starts. If one of them reaches the upper limit threshold programmed by the user, the delay time [Tinterdiction] is initiated but the start-up inhibition signal will be activated only at the moment when the motor stops the next time. As long as this delay time has not expired, any start-up is inhibited.

It should be noted that a start-up is considered as cold start if the motors thermal status is lower than 50%, and that a start-up is described as hot start if the thermal state is equal to or higher than 50%.

The recommended settings have to be compared to the motor characteristics provided by the manufacturer. Nevertheless, the programming of these parameters can also depend on the operation mode of the set motor and/motor-driven unit as a whole.

If these data are not available, the default settings are as follows:

− duration of the reference period = 60min;

− the number of cold starts = 3;

− the number of hot starts = 2;

− the delay time of prohibition of restart-up [Tinterdiction] = 30min

It should be noted that this function does not make it possible to limit the repetition frequency for any two successive sequences of start-ups as long as [Tinterdiction] has not been initiated. This limitation is ensured by the complementary function " Time between two successive start-ups " (see the corresponding paragraph).


2.2.2 Time between two successive start-ups [66]

This function is complementary to that limiting the number of successive starts during a given period of time. It makes it possible to prevent two consecutive motor starts . This may be a limitation of the motor or of the motor starting equipment.

The setting of the delay time [Tbetween 2 start] should be based on the minimum time which is required between 2 start-ups.

2.2.3 Re-acceleration

A fault in an installation, or a fault close to the sources of supply may cause high voltage drops which will result in supply voltages lower than the minimal permissible levels. For example, a three-phase fault in a point of the network produces voltage dip in the equipment in the neighbourhood. This voltage dip could result in difficulties, which do not necessarily disappear with elimination of the fault and the ultimate return to a normal voltage.

As the voltage dip appears, the motor torque, which is roughly proportional to the square of the voltage, undergoes a brutal reduction causing the deceleration of the motor. This deceleration is a function of the amplitude and the duration of the voltage dip. It is mainly governed by the moment of inertia of the rotating masses and by the torque-speed characteristic of the motor-driven motor.

In the most unfavourable case, the motor can stall, the new torque that it develops being lower than the braking torque of the motor-driven unit. This phenomenon is illustrated on the following figure.

Torque

Speed of rotation

Cm

Cm

Cm0

Cr1

Cm1 Cm0 = Cr0

N1 Nn Ns

P0172ENa

The curves shown above represent, respectively:

• motor torque Cm versus rotation speed N and corresponding to the rated voltage Vn;

• motor torque C'm versus rotation speed N and corresponding to a voltage V lower than Vn;

• braking torque Cr of the motor-driven unit, versus rotation speed.

When the voltage dip appears, the motor torque passes abruptly from the value Cm0 = Cr0 to the value C'm0 < Cr0. Therefore, the motor-drive unit will slow down, and when the voltage is restored, the motor torque abruptly increases to the value Cm1, whereas the braking torque is of value Cr1. Hence the motor cannot accelerate and would return to its normal speed only if Cm1 is higher than Cr1 (see the figure above).


After the fault has cleared, the motor has a value of internal impedance close to the corresponding value when it is stopped. So, when the system voltage is re-established, the motor draws a current close to its start-up current at the full voltage. This current is higher if the motor slip becomes high.

This stage of re-acceleration does not always involve serious consequences, except if a number of large motors are re-powered on simultaneously. In this case, these motors can result in large voltage dip further restricting the re-acceleration of the motors. So, it may be necessary to carry out load shedding of a certain number of motors, in order to be able to ensure the re-acceleration of the priority motors.

The parameters of MiCOM relay can either be set so as to authorise a re-acceleration of the motor after a voltage dip, or they can also be set to give a command to stop the motor in the event of prolonged voltage dip.

2.2.3.1 Authorisation of re-acceleration

An external voltage relay connected next to busbars is used to report on any voltage dip as well as to indicate any restoration of the voltage. This voltage dip information is sent via a wiring link to a logic input of the MiCOM P220 relay programmed at «VOLT. DIP»

Treacc delay time should be set to be equal to the maximum duration of voltage dip of the network for which one wishes to authorise a re-acceleration of the motor. Thus, for any voltage dip shorter than Treacc delay time, an authorisation of re-acceleration will be activated. On the other hand, if the voltage dip lasts longer than Treacc delay time, the relay does not modify its operation and any attempt of re-acceleration of the motor could be seen by the relay as a Rotor locked condition (the amplitude of the re-acceleration current being the same as that in Rotor locked condition) and, consequently, causing a possible tripping command.

2.2.3.2 Load shedding on voltage dip

The same voltage relay can be used to realise load shedding when the supply voltage dips. Two cases are possible:

− When it is desired to turn off the motor in the event of the voltage dip,

− When it is desired to turn off the motor only if the voltage dip lasts longer than the value it was assigned in the re-acceleration authorisation.

A programmed logic input on EXT. 1 (or EXT. 2) should to be connected to the voltage relay detecting the presence of a voltage dip. Associated delay time tEXT1 (or tEXT2) will be set as follows:

− equal to the duration of voltage dip for which one wishes to carry out a load shedding,

− equal to Treacc.

The external tripping command EXT. 1 (or EXT. 2) will be programmed to send the shutdown command (assignment on the output relay RL1).

Thus any voltage dip longer than the programmed duration will result in a shutdown command.


NOTE:

⇒ The determination of the maximum duration for which one wishes to authorise re-acceleration of the motor is specific to each site and it depends on the characteristics of the network (source impedance, impedance of the other loads - in particular, presence of other revolving machines) as well as of the characteristics of the given motor and its load (magnitude of the direct-on-line start-up current, inertia). The value of this duration is generally obtained as a result of a study of the dynamic stability of the system.

⇒ The «voltage dip» information generated by the voltage relay must exist as long as the conditions of voltage dip exist. With the return of the voltage on the busbars, this «voltage dip» information must disappear as soon as possible. The voltage relay used to generate «voltage dip» information must have very short pick-up time and drop off time, ideally less than one and half periods (times lower than 30 ms for a 50 Hz system).

⇒ This assumes that the value of the voltage is the same on the busbars as on the terminals of the motor. If this is not the case, it will be necessary to estimate the voltage drop between the busbars and the motors terminals and to take this into account when setting the voltage relay thresholds corresponding to appearance and disappearance of the of «voltage dip» conditions.


3. EXAMPLE OF NUMERICAL APPLICATION

3.1 Network data

• MiCOM P220 current input ranges:

− Phase current input : In = 5 A ;

− Earth current input : Ion = 1 A

• Breaking device type : circuit breaker

• Maximum value of the three-phase short-circuit current on the busbars 6.2 kV: Icc3φ = 9 kA

• Neutral point connection mode for the network 6.2 kV : by a resistance limiting the maximum value of the earth fault current to 30 A

• Length of the feeder cable connecting the motor to the busbars 6.2k V : 100 m

• Measuring transformers :

− CT ratio: 300 / 5A

− Core balance CT connection: ratio 25

• "Speed switch" device available

3.2 Motor data:

Induction motor:

rated power ==> Pn = 2200kW - cosϕ = 0.8

rated voltage ==> Vn = 6.2kV 50 Hz

rated current ==> In = 256 A

open-circuit (no-load) current ==> Ino-load = 134A

start-up type (direct-on -line, soft) ==> Direct

start-up current ==> ---

direct start-up current (if soft start used) ==> Id = 5.4*In i.e. 1382A

start-up time ==> td = 4 s

maximum repetition frequency of starts ----> Hot = x 2, cold = x 3

withstand time for locked rotor (for hot & cold start) ----> 2s

heating curve ==> ---

time-constants of: heating , start-up, cooling- down ==> 14min, 10min, 28min

transient characteristic curve at unbalance ----> ---

permanent allowable unbalance ----> ---

motor service use (driven equipment: compressor, crasher, mill, pump, fan...)

==> pump

start-up : no-load/ load ----> no-load (30 s loading after the end of

start-up)


3.3 List of settings:

OP PARAMETERS Menu

Password AAAA

Reference ALST

Frequency 50 Hz

CONFIGURATION Menu

CONFIG.SELECT Submenu

Change Group Input EDGE

Setting Group 1

Default display % I LOAD

Start detection criterion 52A (closing of the breaking device)

Analogue output type (optional) 4 - 20 mA

Value transmitted by the analogue output (optional) % I LOAD

RTD type (optional) PT100

CT RATIO Submenu

Primary rating of the phase CT 300

Secondary rating of the phase CT 5

Primary rating of the earth CT 25

Secondary rating of the earth CT 1

LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 Submenus LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

Assignment: thermal tripping (overload) No No Yes No

Assignment: thermal alarm θALARM No No No Yes

Assignment: tI>> Yes No No No

Assignment: tIo> Yes No No No

Assignment: tIo>> Yes No No No

Assignment: tIi> Yes No No No

Assignment: tIi>> Yes No No No

Assignment: tI< Yes No No No

Assignment: tIstart (excessively long start) No Yes No No

Assignment: tIstall (stalled rotor when running) No Yes No No

Assignment: locked rotor at start No Yes No No

Assignment: emergency restart No No No No

Assignment: forbidden start No No No Yes

Assignment: tRTD1 ALARM, tRTD2 ALARM, tRTD3 ALARM (optional)

No No No Yes

Assignment: tRTD1TRIP, tRTD2 TRIP, tRTD3 TRIP (optional) No No Yes No


LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 Submenus LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

Assignment: tRTD4 ALARM, tRTD5 ALARM, tRTD6 ALARM

(optional) No No No Yes

Assignment: tRTD4 TRIP, tRTD5 TRIP, tRTD6 TRIP (optional) No No Yes No

Assignment: Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (optional) No No No No

Assignment: tEXT1 No No No No

Assignment: tEXT2 No No No No

Assignment: motor stopped No No No No

Assignment: motor running No No No No

Assignment: successful start No No No No

Configuration Inputs submenu

Inputs : 54321 11111

COMMUNICATION MODBUS Menu

Communication enabled ? Yes

Data transmission rate 19 200 Bauds

Parity No

Number of data bits 8

Number of stop bits 1

Relay address 1

Date Format PRIVATE

Programming for Group No.1 of PROTECTION Menu:

THERM.OVERLOAD[49] Submenu

Primary setting

Secondary setting

Comments

Thermal overload function enabled ?

Yes

Thermal inhibition on start enabled ?

No

Threshold Iθ> 270 A 0.9In (CT) 5.5% of overload authorised = 1.055 x In(motor)

Ke 3

Te1 14 min See motor characteristics

Te2 10 min See motor characteristics

Tr 28 min See motor characteristics

Influence RTD (optional) No

θALARM enabled? Yes

Thermal alarm threshold θALARM 92% 0,92 > (256 / 270)2

θ FORBID START enabled ? Yes

FORBID START 78% 0,78 < (1382 / 270)2 * (1-exp(4 / 10*60)) +exp(5 / 10*60))


Submenu [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT

Primary setting

Secondary setting

Comments

Short-circuit function enabled ? Yes

Threshold I>> 1800A 6In 130% of motor start-up current

tI>> 0.1s

Submenu [50/51] EARTH FAULT

Primary setting

Secondary setting

Comments

Earth fault function enabled ?: threshold Io>

No Only one earth fault current threshold can be programmed

Thresholds Io> 0.002Ion

tIo> 0s

Earth fault function enabled ?: threshold Io>>

Yes

Threshold Io>> 2A 0.08Ion Setting to 6,7 % of maximum earth fault current

tIo>> 0.1s

Submenu [46] UNBALANCE

Primary setting

Secondary setting

Comments

Function Unbalance enabled ?: threshold Ii>

Yes Alarm threshold enabled

Threshold Ii> 25.6 A 0.085 In (CT)

Setting to 10% of Inmotor

tli> 10s

Function Unbalance enabled ?: threshold Ii>>

Yes Tripping threshold enabled

Threshold Ii>> 51.2A 0.171 In (CT)

Setting to 20% of Inmotor

Submenu [48] EXCESS LONG START

Primary setting

Secondary setting

Comments

Excess long start function enabled ?

Yes

Threshold Istart 540A 2Iθ Id = 5.4*Inmotor ! Istart = 2*Iθ

tIstart 5s 1.2 * td = 4.8s


Submenu [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR

Primary setting

Secondary setting

Comments

Block rotor function enabled ? Yes

tIstall 1.8s See motor characteristics

Stalled-in-run rotor function enabled ?

Yes

Threshold Istall 540A 2Iθ Id= 5.4*Inmotor ! Istall = 2*Iθ

Blocked-at-start rotor function enabled ?

Yes Presence of zero speed detector isnecessary (speed switch)

Submenu [37] LOSS OF LOAD

Primary setting

Secondary setting

Comments

Loss of load function enabled ? Yes Motor-driven pump

Threshold I< 165A 0.55In Higher than no-load current

tI< 3s Depends on process

Tinhib 40s Tinhib > (5 + 30)

Submenu [66] START NUMBER

Primary setting

Secondary setting

Comments

Start number limitation function enabled ?

Yes Parameters depend on trade-off of motor characteristics against process requirements

Treference 60 min

Hot starts number 2

Cold starts number 3

Tinterdiction 30 min

Submenu MIN TIME BETW 2 START

Primary setting

Secondary setting

Comments

Time between starts function enabled ?

Yes Parameter depends on trade-off of motor characteristics against process requirements

Tbetween 2 start 10min

Submenu RE-ACCEL AUTHORIZ

Primary setting

Secondary setting

Comments

Re-acceleration authorisation function enabled ?

Yes Parameter depends on trade-off of motor characteristics against process requirements

Treacc 0.2s


4. SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS

4.1 Logic selectivity

The objective is to reduce the fault clearing times by reducing the selectivity steps. Thus the logic selectivity makes it possible to reduce the clearing time of the busbar fault while preserving a perfect co-ordination between protection devices.

The example given below involves the MiCOM P122 relay but it is absolutely possible to replace it by another MiCOM relay used as lead-in protection, for example a standard relay P123, P141, P142 or P143.

P122

M1

26

Logicselectivity

P220

7 11

+

P220

7 11

+

P220

7 11

+

M2 M3

_

28

P0173ENa

In our example, the delay times of short-circuit protection (I>>) and earth fault protection (Io>>) of the P220 (downstream protections) and P122 (upstream protection) relays are set to 100 ms.

A fault on the busbars will be detected only by protection (P122) and the command to clear the fault will be generated after 100ms.

In the event of fault on a motor feeder cable, the P220 relay protecting it will send a signal through to the P122 relay. On receipt of this logic signal the P122 relay will use a logically selected delay that has been separately set. This delay time will replace the normal delay time while there is an output from one of the P220 relays. In our example, it could be set to 350 ms to correspond to a 250 ms selectivity step between the downstream protection and the upstream protection. Thus, 100 ms after the appearance of the fault, protection P220 of the outgoing motor feeder will generate the command to clear the fault. In the event of non-clearance of the fault, the fault can be eliminated selectively 250 ms later thanks to the upstream protection used in logic selectivity.


NOTE: • The MiCOM P220 relays located downstream can deliver following instantaneous information indicating that a current threshold was exceeded: phase overcurrent threshold I>> earth overcurrent threshold Io> earth overcurrent threshold Io>> • If this facility is required then additional cabling will be required between the output contacts of the motor protection relay and the selected logic input of the upstream relay. • The logic selectivity delay time of the upstream relay must be set selectively with reference to the settings of normal delay times for the I>> and Io>> thresholds of the downstream relays.

Example of programming:

Logic selectivity between the P220 protections installed on the motor outgoing feeders and the MiCOM P122 protection relay on the lead-in.

P220 relay

PROTECTION menu: SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu [50/51]

Designation Function Programming

FUNCTION I>> ?

Use of the short-circuit threshold (I>>) enabled ? yes

tI>> Delay time of the phase overcurrent threshold 100ms

PROTECTION menu: EARTH FAULT submenu [50N/51N]


FUNCTION Io>> ?

Use of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold (Io>>) yes

tIo>> Delay time of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold 100ms

AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: Submenu AUX OUTPUT 5 4 3 2

Assignment I>> 1 0 0 0

Assignment Io>> 1 0 0 0

The instantaneous information of one of thresholds I>> and Io>> being exceeded is transmitted to the output relay RL5 of the P220 relay.


MiCOM P122 (or P123 or P140) relay

PROTECTION menu: [50/51] PHASE O/C Submenu


[51] I>> Use of the 2nd phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) enabled ?

yes

tI>> Delay time of the 2nd phase overcurrent threshold 100ms

PROTECTION menu: [50N/51N] E/Gnd Submenu


[51N] Ie>> Use of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold (Io>>) enabled ?

yes

tIe>> Delay time of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold 100ms

AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: INPUTS Submenu


INPUT 2 Parameter setting of the logic input No.2 to receive the logic selectivity command

SL LG1

AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: SEL LOG1 Submenu


SEL1 tI>> Use of "logic selectivity" function to protect the 2nd phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) enabled ?

yes

SEL1 tIe>> Use of "logic selectivity" to protect the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) enabled ?

yes

tSEL1 Setting of delay time associated to the "logic selectivity" function

350 ms


4.2 Authorisation of re-acceleration Load shedding on voltage dips

Let us consider three motors M1, M2 and M3 connected to the same busbars. A voltage relay, for example MiCOM P922 relay, is used to detect any voltage dip on the busbars. Each MiCOM P220 relay receives from the P922 relay the voltage dip information via its logic inputs.

The following functioning is required:

− In the event of voltage dip shorter than 250 ms, the re-acceleration of the motor M1 must be possible, but if the voltage dip is longer than 250 ms the motor M1 must be stopped.

− In the event of voltage dip duration equal or longer than 100 ms, the motors M2 and M3 must be stopped.

M1 M2 M3

17

_ _ _ _

+

19 21

P220

23 17 19

18 20

P220

MiCOM P922

17 19

P220

P0174ENa


Programming the P220 relay associated to the motor M1:

REACCEL AUTHORIZ Submenu

Function Authorisation of re-acceleration enabled ? Yes

Treacc 250 ms

INPUTS Submenu

Assignment input No.3 NONE

Assignment input No.4 EXT 1

Assignment input No.5 VOLT. DIP

tEXT1 250 ms

Logic input No.4 is used to stop the motor in the event of a prolonged voltage dip, logic input No.5 is used to authorise re-acceleration.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: TRIP OUTPUT RLY Submenu

EXT 1 ? Yes

Information of tripping EXT 1 is sent to the trip output relay (RL1).

Programming the P220 relays associated to the motors M2 and M3:

REACCEL AUTHORIZ Submenu

Re-acceleration authorisation function enabled ? No

Treacc 0,2 second

INPUTS Submenu


Assignment input No.4 EXT 1


tEXT1 100 ms

Logic input No.4 is used to stop the motor in the event of a voltage dip whose duration is equal to or more than 100 ms.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: TRIP OUTPUT RLY Submenu

EXT 1 ? Yes

Information of tripping EXT 1 is sent to the trip output relay (RL1).


4.3 Setting groups

If an electrical network can be fed from two different sources of supply, the relay can make use of two different setting groups each individually set to accommodate the parameters of the two networks. For example if a network is normally fed via the mains distribution system, and it is provided with a standby emergency generator, the relay can be provided with two groups of fault settings for the two sources of supply.

The passage of a group of parameters to another will have to be carried out each time the networks supply mode changes (distributor mains/generator). A pulse will have to be sent to a logic input of the relay that has been programmed to allow this.

The use of the two groups of settings also proves useful for double-speed motors. For these motors, the setting group No.1 could be used when the motor turns at the lower speed (1), the setting group No.2 being used when the motor turns at the higher speed (2) An impulse must be sent to the relay each time the motor changes speed so that it passes from one setting group to the other.

M1

P220

13

M2

P220

M3

P220

11

+

__ _

13 1315 15 15

G

P0175ENa

Programming the P220 relays associated with the motors M1, M2 and M3:

AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: INPUTS Submenu

Assignment input No.3 SET GROUP

Logic input No.3 is used to pass from one setting group to another.


5. BIBLIOGRAPHY

• Moteurs asynchrones triphasés fermés, AREVA Réseau Commercial France

• Guide de lingénierie électrique, ELECTRA, Lavoisier

• Protective relays APPLICATION GUIDE, AREVA

• Electrotechnique Industrielle, Guy SEGUIER Francis NOTELET, Lavoisier

• Symmetrical components for power systems engineering, J.Lewis BLACKBURN


6. APPENDIX A : SERVICE DUTY

P0229ENa


P0230ENa


7. APPENDIX B : INFORMATION NEEDED FOR ADJUSTMENT

Maximum short-current between phases at the motors terminals

Neutral point connection mode for the network feeding the motor

Characteristics provided by the motor manufacturer

- rated power

- rated voltage

- rated current

- start-up type (direct-in-line, soft)

- start-up current

- direct start-up current (if soft start-up used)

- start-up time

- maximum repetition frequency of start-ups

-- withstand time for blocked rotor (for hot & cold start)

- heating curve

- time-constants of: heating , start-up, cooling-down

- transient characteristic curve at unbalance

allowable permanent unbalance

- motor service use (driven equipment: compressor, breaker, pump, ventilator...)

- open-circuit current (for loss of load protection

Ratios for measured-value converters (CT, PT and balance-core CT) connected to the protection

Assignment output contacts of the protection relay


BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P220/EN FT/B43 MiCOM P220

User Guide

Technical Guide P220/EN FT/B43 User Guide MiCOM P220 Page 1/54

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 3

1.1 Object of this document 3

1.2 Definitions 3

2. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P220 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY 4

3. THE OPERATOR INTERFACE 6

3.1 Description of the front panel 6

3.2 The LEDs 7

3.3 The keypad 8

3.3.1 ALARM keys 8 3.3.2 Programming keypad 8 3.4 Liquid crystal display screen 8

4. THE MENUS 9

4.1 Default display 10

4.2 Access to the menus 11

4.3 Access to the setting parameters 11

4.3.1 Protection by password 11 4.3.2 Entering the password / modification of the parameters 11 4.4 The OP. PARAMETERS menu 13

4.5 The CONFIGURATION menu 13

4.5.1 The CONFIG. SELECT submenu 13 4.5.2 The CT RATIO submenu 16 4.5.3 The LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus 16 4.6 The MEASUREMENTS menu 17

4.7 The PROCESS menu 18

4.8 The TRIP STATISTICS menu 19

4.9 The COMMUNICATION menu 19

4.10 The PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus 20

4.10.1 The [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu: protection against thermal overload conditions 21

4.10.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu 25 4.10.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu 26 4.10.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu 26 4.10.5 The [48] EXCES LONG START submenu: protection against excessively long starts 27 4.10.6 The [51LR/50S] LOCKED ROTOR submenu 28 4.10.7 The [37]LOSS OF LOAD submenu: protection against undercurrent/loss of load

conditions 29

P220/EN FT/B43 Technical Guide User Guide Page 2/54 MiCOM P220

4.10.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu: temperature protection by RTD (optional) 30 4.10.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu: temperature protection by thermistor (optional) 31 4.11 The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu 32

4.11.1 The [66] START NUMBER submenu : limitation of the number of starts per period 32 4.11.2 The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu: minimum time between two starts 34 4.11.3 The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu: Reacceleration authorization 36 4.11.4 Binary inputs and outputs Logical gates 39 4.11.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu: AND programmable logic gates 43 4.11.6 The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY: AND logic gate time delay 44 4.11.7 The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : auxiliary programmable output relays 45 4.11.8 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu 45 4.11.9 The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu: Configuration of the trip output relay 46 4.11.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu : Latching of the output relays 46 4.11.11 The SW SUPERVISION submenu: 47 4.12 The RECORD menu 48

4.12.1 The FAULT RECORD submenu 48 4.12.2 The DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu 49 4.12.3 The SW MONITORING submenu 50 4.13 ALARM messages 51

4.13.1 The MOTOR ALARM messages 51 4.13.2 The HARDWARE ALARM messages 51

5. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS 53

5.1 Event records 53

5.2 Recording of the form of the starting current 53

6. PC CONNECTION DUN PC LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS 54

6.1 Connection configuration 54

6.2 Configuration of the relay and PC 54


1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 Object of this document

The purpose of this document is to present the characteristics of the P220 motor protection relay and to guide the operator through the setting procedures.

After an overview of the product, this manual explains the functions performed by this protection relay and how they must be used. The menu associated with each of these functions is presented and explained.

1.2 Definitions

Tripping

This operation consists of a command to open the breaking device (circuit breaker or fuse contactor) connected to the motor. A tripping command can be given:

• either on detection of a fault by the MiCOM P220 relay,

• or by the operator (in this case it is an external tripping command).

Alarm

The detection of a fault by the MiCOM P220 relay leads to the display of an alarm message.

Acknowledgement of an alarm

This operation consists of making an alarm message disappear.

Function in service / out of service

The MiCOM P220 relay offers a certain number of protection, monitoring and control functions. The operator can select from these functions the ones he wishes to use:

• he must bring into service the functions he chooses to use,

• he can take out of service the functions he does not wish to use.

Activated / deactivated function

Not all the protection functions of the P220 relay are activated at the same time. They are alternately activated / deactivated automatically by the P220 relay itself to ensure that the motor has protection specific to its various operating conditions: underload or overload conditions, starting phase, locked rotor condition, and motor shut down.

NOTE: A function cannot be activated or deactivated unless the operator has previously brought it into service.


2. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P220 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY

The MiCOM P220 relay uses digital techniques to fulfil the functions of protection, control and monitoring of motors.

It is equipped with 4 analogue inputs (3 phase current inputs and 1 earth current input). The current inputs have dual ratings of 1 or 5 amperes (it is possible to combine an earth current rating of 1 A and a phase current rating of 5 A).

It is possible to program the output relays to respond to any of the protection or control functions available. The different logic inputs can also be allocated to control functions.

The auxiliary power supply is provided by a direct current or alternating current auxiliary source via an internal converter. Satisfactory operation of the P220 relay is guaranteed during brief interruptions of the auxiliary power supply lasting less than 50 ms.

The front panel gives the operator access to the data of the MiCOM P220 relay either via LEDs or via the display unit and the keypad. The various alarms are stored in the memory and made available to the operator on the backlit display device. These alarms can be read and acknowledged directly without a password. All the parameters and measurements are accessible without a password. The setting values can only be modified after entering the password stored in the memory.

The MiCOM P220 relay records and measures a large number of data with very great accuracy. It continuously measures the phase and earth currents taking into account the true RMS values up to the 10th harmonic for a 50 Hz motor and the 8th harmonic for a 60 Hz motor.

The MiCOM P220 relay has on the rear connector a RS485 type link with a choice of MODBUS, RTU mode, Courier or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocols. This enables the operator to read the data stored by the relay (measurements, alarms, parameters), or modify the different settings and allocations of outputs of each relay, or transmit remote orders.

It is also possible to reassemble or modify these data via the RS232 communication located on the front panel by using the MiCOM S1 support software.

The MiCOM P220 relay can be connected directly via this link to a digital monitoring and control system (for example: MiCOM S10, SCADA). All the data available are then at the disposal of the supervisor and can be utilised either locally or remotely.

The MiCOM P220 relay can be withdrawn while it is live. This means that its live parts can be withdrawn from the metal housing while the relay is supplied with power via the auxiliary source. When the relay is drawn out of its housing:

− the current circuits from the phase and earth CTs are not interrupted thanks to the presence of internal short-circuiting devices located at the current inputs (metal housing part),

− no tripping order is generated,

− the watchdog relay drops out,

− the RS485 link is not interrupted. However, communication is no longer possible for the relay which is drawn out.


MOTOR

MMI LCD display device

8 LEDs for indication 7 pushbuttons RS232 port

ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM

phase currents earth current

CONTRACTOR/ CIRCUIT BREAKER

Status (closed, open) tripping/closing commande

REMOTE COMMUNICATION parameterisation,

measurements, control

PROTECTION +

measurements, automatic controls, monitoring,

disturbance recording

MCC MOTOR CONTROL

P0190ENa

FIGURE 1 - ENVIRONMENT OF THE MiCOM P220 RELAY


3. THE OPERATOR INTERFACE

3.1 Description of the front panel

The front panel of the MiCOM P220 relay serves as an interface between the human and the protection relay. It enables the operator to enter settings, to gain access to the display of measured values and alarms, and also to display in a simple manner the different actions performed by the MiCOM P220 relay.

FIGURE 2 - FRONT PANEL OF THE MiCOM P220 RELAY

The front panel of the relay has three separate parts:

− The display device and keypad,

− The LEDs,

− The two zones under the upper and lower flaps

The display device on the front of the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with a liquid crystal display (LCD). This screen displays data such as settings and measured values, even under difficult conditions, thanks to the backlighting of the data. The keypad has 7 touch-sensitive keys. The two keys located under the screen are dedicated to alarms; the other 5 keys are for reading the measurements and modifying the parameters of the MiCOM P220 relay.

The LEDs are located on the left side of the front panel. The first four LEDs are dedicated to the operation of the relay (tripping LED, alarm LED, equipment fault LED, and auxiliary power supply LED).

The following four LEDs are programmable by the operator.

The wording associated with the LEDs appears by default in English on the front panel but the operator has self-adhesive labels supplied with the P220 relay on which he can write the titles of his choice using a ball-point pen.


Under the upper flap, there is a label identifying the relay by its model number and serial number. This information defines the product uniquely and specifically. When requesting any information from the factory, do not forget to indicate these two numbers. The auxiliary power supply range of the relay is also indicated on the lower part of the label.

Under the lower flap, the RS232 link permits the connection of a portable PC to the MiCOM P220 relay.

The live part can be withdrawn from the housing by opening the two flaps and applying traction to the two notches located behind these flaps.

ATTENTION : IT IS NECESSARY- AFTER PIVOTING THE EXTRACTOR - TO WAIT 2 OR 3 SECONDS BEFORE MAKING COME OUT THE ACTIVE PART, TO LEAVE DISCHARGING THE CAPACITORS IN THE ACTIVE PART THUS AVOIDING POSSIBLE ELECTRIC ARCS IN THE EVENT OF DIRECT CONTACT OF THE CONNECTOR BLOCKS WITH METAL LIMP.

3.2 The LEDs

The LEDs are numbered from 1 to 8 starting from the top.

NOTE: The LEDs are turned off when the auxiliary power supply is lost. When the power supply is back the state of the LEDs is restored.

LED 1 Colour: RED Wording: TRIP

The LED indicates that the relay has transmitted a tripping order to the breaking device (fuse-contactor / circuit breaker). This LED copies the tripping command sent to logic output No. 1 (tripping relay). Its normal state is extinguished. It lights up as soon as a tripping command is issued. It is extinguished when the associated alarm is acknowledged (disappearance of the fault and acknowledgement by the operator).

LED 2 Colour: YELLOW Wording: ALARM

This LED indicates that a motor alarm has been taken into account by the MiCOM P220 relay.

The management of the ALARM LED is directly linked to the status of the motor alarms in the memory (MOTOR ALARM menu).

If one or more messages are not read and not acknowledged, the ALARM LED flashes.

If all messages are read but not acknowledged, the ALARM LED shows a steady light.

If all messages have been read and acknowledged, the ALARM LED is extinguished.

LED 3 Colour: YELLOW Wording: WARNING

This LED indicates equipment faults of the MiCOM P220 relay.

The management of the WARNING LED is directly linked to the status of the equipment alarms in the memory (HARDW ALARMS menu).

When a minor internal alarm (minor equipment fault, typically a communication failure) is detected, the WARNING LED flashes.

When the fault is classed as serious, (major equipment failure) the WARNING LED is lit.

The WARNING LED can only be extinguished when the cause which produced the alarm has disappeared (repair of the module, disappearance of the fault).


LED 4 Colour: GREEN Wording: HEALTHY

This LED indicates that the MiCOM P220 relay is energised within the rated range (0.8 to 1.2 Vaux).

LEDs 5 to 8: Colour: RED

These LEDs can be programmed by the operator in the CONFIGURATION menu.

3.3 The keypad

The keypad has seven keys arranged in two groups:

The two keys located immediately below the screen (keys ! and "),

The five keys positioned in the centre of the front panel for programming.

3.3.1 ALARM keys

The two keys ! and " are dedicated to reading and acknowledgement of the alarms respectively. To display the successive alarms, press the ! key.

The alarms are arranged in the order in which they were detected (the most recent last, the oldest first). To acknowledge the alarms, the operator can either acknowledge each alarm by pressing the " key, or go to the end of the MOTOR ALARMS menu and perform a general acknowledgement.

3.3.2 Programming keypad

The five keys situated in the centre of the front panel of the MiCOM P220 relay are dedicated to programming

The keys # $ % and & make it possible to move in the direction indicated in the different levels of the menus.

The ' key permits the confirmation of a choice or a value (modification of parameters).

3.4 Liquid crystal display screen

The liquid crystal display screen has two lines each with sixteen characters. The screen lights up as soon as a key on the keypad is activated. It remains lit up for 5 minutes after a key on the keypad was last used. The screen has backlighting which makes it easy to read, regardless of the ambient lighting conditions.


4. THE MENUS

The menu of the P220 relay is organised into main menus, some of which are subdivided into submenus. The operator dialogue of the MiCOM P220 relay is divided into 10 menus ( menu column)

HEADING SUB MENU DESCRIPTION

OP PARAMETERS Data for general settings of MiCOM P220

CONFIGURATION

CONFIG. SELECT Change of Group, default display setings, Start detection criterion, Analogical Output (4-20mA), RTD and Thermistors.

TC RATIO Settings of the CT Ratio

LED LED 5 to LED 8

Configuration of Programmables LEDs

CONFIGURATION INPUTS

Configuration of logic inputs

MEASUREMENT Measured (Ia, Ib, Ic ) and calculated parameters (Idirect, I inverse), Max values.

PROCESS Measurements related to the application: Thermal Overload, Time before thermal tripping, RTD Temperature, Permit start number, time before start, Emergency start number

TRIP STATISTICS Number of different type of tripping

COMMUNICATION Settings of the protocol parameters.

PROTECTION G1 Configuration of the protection functions

[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD

Submenu of thermal overload function

[50/51] SHORT CIRCUIT

Submenu of short circuit function

[50N/51N] EARTH FAULT

Submenu of earth Fault function

[46] UNBALANCE Submenu of Unbalance function

[48] EXCESS LONG START

Submenu of excess long start function

[51LR-50S] BLOCKED ROTOR

Submenu of Blocked rotor function

[37] LOSS OF LOAD Submenu of Loss of load function

[49/38] RTD SENSORSoption

Submenu of RTD sensors function

[49] THERMISTORS option

Submenu of Thermistors function


HEADING SUB MENU DESCRIPTION

Protection G2 Like PORTECTION G1

AUTOMATIC CTRL

[66] START NUMBER HOT and COLD start numbers

MIN TIME BETW 2 START

Configuration of the minimum time between two consecutive starts.

REACCEL AUTORIZATION

Autorization of reacceleration after a dip voltage detection

INPUTS Configuration of logic inputs.

AND LOGIC EQUATION

Configuration of 4 Logic Equations

AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY

Configuration of time delays associated to the logic equations.

AUX OUTPUT RELAYS Configuration of Auxiliary output relays ( other than tripping relay RL1)

LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS

Latching of the auxiliary output relays

TRIP OUTPUT RELAY Configuration of the trip output relay ( RL1)

LATCH TRIP ORDER Latching of the tripping output relay (RL1)

SW SUPERVISION configuration of operating time, operation number, sum of interrupted current, closing and tripping time

RECORD

FAULT RECORD Visualization of last five faults

DISTURBANCE RECORD

Configuration of disturbance records

SW MONITORING Data related to real functioning of the switching devise (CB)

From the default display, access is gained to these different menus by using the # and & keys.

To return to the default display from any one of the menus, press the $ key.

4.1 Default display

By default, a value is continuously displayed, and the operator can select this value from a list in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu.

As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM P220 relay, the relay indicates it by an alarm message: this display takes priority and replaces the default value (see the ALARMS menus).


4.2 Access to the menus

Access is gained to the different menus via the # and $ keys.

It is possible to read all the parameters and measurements without the password.

The parameters can only be modified after entering the password.

4.3 Access to the setting parameters

Access to the setting parameters of the MiCOM P220 relay is possible in different ways:

− either locally: by using the keys or the RS232 port on the front panel,

− or remotely: via the RS485 port at the rear.

4.3.1 Protection by password

Modification of the relay parameters via the pushbuttons on the front panel is protected by password.

This protection applies to the relay configuration settings, particularly the selection of the different thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of the binary inputs, logic gates and output relays.

The password consists of four alphanumerical characters in capitals. On leaving the factory, the password is AAAA. The operator can define his own combination of characters. If the password is lost or forgotten, modification of the parameters stored in the memory of the relay is inhibited. All that is required then is to contact AREVA T&D or its agent, stating the serial number of the relay, to receive an emergency password specific to the relay concerned.

4.3.2 Entering the password / modification of the parameters

To modify a parameter, first press the ' key to go into updating mode (or parameterisation mode).

The operator is asked to enter the password as soon as a parameter is modified in any of the menus or submenus. So when the operator presses the ' key, to make an adjustment, and the password is not active, the following display appears on the screen:

PASSWORD ? A A A A

The password consists of the letters between A and Z. The password is entered letter by letter by using the $ and # keys to move forwards and backwards in the alphabet.

After each letter, press the & key to enter the next letter.

At the end of the input press the ' key to confirm the password. If the password is correct the message PASSWORD OK appears on the screen.

After 2 seconds, the display returns to the previous point in the menu. Press the ' key again. A cursor appears on the first field of the data to be updated:

Example: modification of the current threshold I >> ([50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu)


I >> = 1.0 In

A flashing cursor indicates that the operator can change the value in the cell. To scroll through the possible values for a cell, use the # and $ keys.

After each value, press the & key to enter the next digit.

At the end of the input, press the ' key to confirm the modification.

While the relay is in setting mode, the letter P (Parameter) is displayed at the bottom right of the menus and submenus headers. For instance, the letter P is displayed in the [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu header:

[50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT P

If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is deactivated and the letter P disappears. Any subsequent modification of parameters will give rise to a further request for the password.

NOTE: The parameterisation mode only allows modification of the relay configuration via the interface through which is was activated: if for example the password was entered by the keys on the front panel, only modifications carried out using these keys will be accepted. When the parameterisation mode is activated by entering the password via the front panel (pushbuttons), as long as this mode of parameterisation remains active, it is no longer possible to modify the relay parameters via the RS485 or RS232 communication ports. The parameters of the P220 relay can only be modified by using the pushbuttons. Once the parameterisation mode is deactivated (no action on any pushbutton for 5 minutes), it is then possible to modify the parameters of the P220 relay by using one of the communication ports. Pressing the " key during modification makes it possible to return to the value before modification. To modify the active password, gain access to the OP. PARAMETERS menu then to the PASSWORD point in the menu.


4.4 The OP. PARAMETERS menu

In this menu, the operator has access to the following information:

− the type of MiCOM relay, here it is the model P220

− the software version of the relay

− the Active Group

− the state of all the logic inputs

− the state of the programmable output relays

In this menu, the operator can also:

− modify the password

− give the relay/motor feeder a reference (4 characters, letters or figures)

− indicate the rated frequency of the motor (50 or 60 Hz)

− modify the date and time.

4.5 The CONFIGURATION menu

The CONFIGURATION menu makes it possible to configure the MiCOM P220 relay.

This menu is divided into 7 submenus:

− CONFIG. SELECT

− CT RATIO

− LED 5

− LED 6

− LED 7

− LED 8

− CONFIGURATION INPUTS

4.5.1 The CONFIG. SELECT submenu

4.5.1.1 Change of Active Setting group

The MiCOM P220 relay has two configuration groups corresponding to two protection groups (menus PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2). The operator can thus carry out 2 settings for each parameter: one for configuration group 1 and the other for configuration group 2.

This menu allows the selection between the 2 groups. The active group by default is group 1.


The changeover of the configuration can be ordered by:

a) a local command:

− via a logic input which must have been previously configured by the operator,

− via the keys on the front panel

− via the RS232 port on the front panel.

NOTE: For the changeover via a logic input, it is necessary to Know that:

When the user selects the option LEVEL, in the CONFIGURATION/CONFIG SELECT submenu, the changeover of the groups is ONLY authorized by a logic input, (no possibility to change the active group neither by communication, nor by the front panel).

ACTIVE GROUP CHANGEOVER WITH LEVEL OPTION :

When switching ON the auxiliary supply, the selected group corresponds to the logic input state. This means:

A - LEVEL option and Logic input configuration = 0

Groupe 1 = logic Input is not active Groupe 2 = logic Input is active

If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1. If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V , then the active group will be G2.

B - LEVEL option and Logic input configuration = 1

Groupe 1 = logic Input is not active Groupe 2 = logic Input is active

If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G2. If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1.

If the user wishes to change the groups by the communication or by the front panel, he has to select the option EDGE.

ACTIVE GROUP CHANGEOVER WITH EDGE OPTION :

A- FRONT option with Logic input configuration = 1

The active group changes every time the voltage applied to the logic input changes state from 0V to +V. Switch OFF the relay, then if we

1. Switch ON the power supply of the relay with the voltage applied to the logic input =0V: The group will not change. It will remain as before the switching off of the relay.

2. Switch ON the power supply of the relay with the voltage applied to the logic input =+V: The group will change and it will change after every switching off.


B- FRONT option with Logic input configuration = 0

The active group changes every time the voltage applied to the logic input changes state from +V to 0V. Switch OFF the relay, then if we

1. Switch ON the power supply of the relay with the voltage applied to the logic input =0V: The group will change state and it will change after every switching off.

2. Switch ON the power supply of the relay with the voltage applied to the logic input =+V: The group will not change. It will remain as before the switching off of the relay.

NOTE : It is important to set properly the change active group with FRONT option via a logic input. In general the customer should be conform to the cases A-1 and B-2, so no group changes will take place upon energizing the relay.

b) a remote command via the RS485 port at the rear.

NOTE: LEVEL could be high or low level EDGE could be riding or falling edge The list of access methods above is given in the order of priority: for example the configuration changeover order given by a logic input takes priority over the one given by the keys on the front panel.

4.5.1.2 Selection of a default value to be display

The operator can select the measured value permanently displayed on the LCD screen from the following list:

− one of the 3 phase currents IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS,

− the neutral current IN RMS,

− the thermal state of the motor TH. STATE,

− the current value consumed by the motor as a percentage of the thermal current threshold value Iθ >: %ILoad.

4.5.1.3 Criterion for detecting a start

The MiCOM P220 relay offers the choice of start detection criteria as follows:

− closure of the contactor / circuit breaker: criterion listed as 52A,

− closure of the contactor / circuit breaker and overshoot of the starting current threshold Istart ([48] EXCES. LONG START submenu). These two events must appear within an interval of time of approximately 90 ms for the detection of a start to be accepted. This criterion is known as 52A + I.

This facility makes it possible to adapt the configuration of the P220 relay to the type of starting used: direct on_line or soft start.

NOTE: The P220 relay detects the information "contactor / circuit breaker position" via logic input No. 1 (paragraph 4.11.4.1. "Fixed" inputs). The connection of this logic input to the status of the breaking device is obligatory.


4.5.1.4 Analogue output (optional)

The MiCOM P220 relay offers an optional analogue output to make the data available to a logic controller, at 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA as desired. The current loop support can be used as an active source circuit or a passive source circuit. The measured value which can be transmitted by this analogue output is selected from the following list:

− one of the 3 phase currents IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS,

− the neutral current IN RMS,

− the thermal state of the motor TH. STATE,

− the current consumed by the motor as a percentage of the thermal current threshold value Iθ >: % Ioad,

− the waiting time before another start is permitted: T bef Start,

− the time before a thermal trip occurs: T bef Trip,

− one of the temperatures measured by the RTD (optional): T°C RTD1, T°C RTD2, T°C RTD3, T°C RTD4, T°C RTD5, T°C RTD6.

The table of correspondence of the analogue output is given in the chapter 5-3.

4.5.1.5 Type of RTD temperature probes or thermistors (optional)

The P220 relay offers optional monitoring of 6 RTD temperature probes or 2 thermistors + 4 RTD temperature probes to provide protection against temperature rises in the stator and mechanical bearings of the motor (PROTECTION menu).

The type of RTD (PT100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10), or the type of thermistor (PTC/NTC) is selected in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu.

The table of correspondences between the temperature and resistance of the RTD is defined in the chapter 5-3.

4.5.2 The CT RATIO submenu

In the CT RATIO submenu, the operator sets the primary and secondary ratings of the Phase and Earth CTs.

NOTE: Where the earth current input is connected to a CT summation of the 3 phase current circuits (residual connection, no core CT), the primary and secondary values of "Earth CT" must be set to the same values of those of the "Phase CTs".

4.5.3 The LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus

Four identical submenus LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 permit configuration of the 4 programmable LEDs of the MiCOM P220 relay.

These data can originate inside the relay (protection, automatic control, or internal logic state function) or outside the relay (logic input).

− One LED is lit if at least one of the pieces of information associated with it is valid (logic OR). It is extinguished:

− either after acknowledgement of the of associated data item or items

− or on the disappearance of the data item or items which gave rise to it.


− The "EMERG. RESTART" information is activated:

− either following reception of an emergency start command via the logic input programmed on "EMERG. RESTART". It stays lit up as log as the associated logic input is excited

− or following an emergency start remote order sent via the communication network. It will be extinguished when the "SUCCESSFUL START" information appears.

− The "FORBIDDEN START" information is active if at least one of the three pieces of data inhibiting starts is active:

− either thermal inhibition of starting "θ FORBID. START"

− or inhibition due to limitation of the number of starts " START NB LIMIT "

− or inhibition due to a minimum time between 2 starts "T betw 2 start".

− The motor shut down information "MOTOR STOPPED" is activated when logic input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) is not excited. It remains active until logic input No. 1 is excited.

− The motor running information "MOTOR RUNNING" is activated when logic input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) is excited. It remains active until logic input No. 1 is de energized.

− The successful start information "SUCCESSFUL START" is activated after a motor start phase if at the end of the time delay t Istart the following criteria are respected:

− the locked rotor at start information ""LOCKED ROTOR" is not present

− the excessively long start information "EXCES NG START" is not present.

− This information stays active until the motor shuts down (deenergisation of logic input No. 1).

4.6 The MEASUREMENTS menu

− The measurements of the phase currents and the earth current are expressed as true root-mean-square values. For a 50 Hz motor, the harmonics are taken into account up to the 10th order; for a 60 Hz motor the harmonics are taken into account up to the 8th order.

− The measurement of the symmetrical components is taken from the fundamental component of the current. The positive and negative sequence components of the current are calculated on the basis of the three phase currents, and the zero phase sequence component is calculated from the earth current input. The following formulae are used to calculate the symmetrical components:

)I²aIaI(3/1I CBApositive ⋅+⋅+⋅=

)IaI²aI(3/1I CBAnegative ⋅+⋅+⋅=

earthsequence phase zero I3/1I ⋅=


− The frequency measurement is given if the amplitude of at least one of the three phase currents is greater than 10 % of In (In is the rating of the phase current inputs, 1 A or 5 A defined in the CT RATIO submenu, on the line "SEC PHASE ="). Where the frequency cannot be calculated, the relays displays "****".

− The phase current maximeter retains the greatest current value of one of the three phases outside the motor starting phase. This variable is expressed as a true RMS value.

4.7 The PROCESS menu

A set of measurements relating to operation displayed in the PROCESS menu makes it possible to monitor the utilisation and state of the motor.

− The estimate of the time before a thermal trip T before TH TRIP is given under the following conditions:

− the thermal alarm threshold θ ALARM is reached

− the equivalent thermal current Ieq is greater than the thermal current threshold Iθ >

− considering the constant motor overload rate Ieq / Iθ >.

When the above conditions are not respected, the P220 relay displays the value ****.

− The number of authorised starts of the motor PERMIT START NB takes into account all the criteria for limiting or inhibiting starting, that is, the functions:

− "limitation of the number of starts",

− "minimum time between 2 starts",

− "thermal criterion for inhibiting a start".

When there is no limit to the number of authorised starts, the relay displays the value ****.

− The indication of the time before a further start is authorised T before START" is given when an inhibition on starting is in progress. This indication takes into account all the criteria for limiting or inhibiting starting, that is, the functions:

− "limitation of the number of starts",

− "minimum time between 2 starts",

− "thermal criterion for inhibiting a start".

− The counter for the number of starts of the motor is incremented at each start. In contrast, authorisation for the motor to re-accelerate does not increment this counter.

− The counter for the number of motor operation hours is the sum of hours during which the motor is running.

NOTE: After confirming the password, the user can reset the value of the THERMAL STATE value to zero by pressing the " key.


4.8 The TRIP STATISTICS menu

In the TRIP STATISTICS menu the following are displayed:

− the total number of tripping operations,

− the number of tripping operations per type of fault.

Tripping can have two possible causes:

− tripping on a fault: when the P220 relay detects a fault (exceeding a threshold), it generates a tripping order;

− deliberate tripping: the operator can order tripping from three access points:

− a logic input,

− the RS232 port on the front panel,

− the communications network via the RS485 rear port.

NOTE: The tripping orders stored in the memory of the MiCOM P220 protection relay for the statistics are only those transmitted to the tripping relay (logic output No. 1). This relay is one of the logic outputs of the MiCOM P220. It is configured in the TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu. Motor shutdowns for which the command was not relayed via the output relay No. 1 of the MiCOM P220 are not taken into account in the TRIP STATISTICS menu.

4.9 The COMMUNICATION menu

− The MiCOM P220 relay can communicate under the MODBUS, Courier or IEC 60870-5 protocols via the RS485 port located at the rear. These protocols are based on the master-slave principle. The P220 relay can therefore be integrated, as a slave, in a digital monitoring and control system. In this system, the supervisor (master), for example a PC, can:

− read and modify the setting values,

− remote the measurements, alarm data, changes of state (changes of state of inputs/outputs, changes of setting group), values relating to fault recordings, disturbance recording and the form of the starting current,

− issue remote orders such as commands to open or close the circuit breaker/contactor (motor On / Off), to trig disturbance recording or to acknowledge the relay remotely.


4.10 The PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus

The menus PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 are identical and enable the operator to program 2 different configuration groups (CONFIGURATION menu).

Each of these 2 menus is divided into 8 submenus corresponding to the different protection functions:

− [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD

− [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT

− [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT

− [46] UNBALANCE

− [48] EXCES. LONG START

− [51LR/50S] LOCKED ROTOR

− [37] LOSS OF LOAD

− [49/38] RTD SENSORS or [49] THERMISTOR (optional)

The operator can bring each of these protections into service or take them out of service in the submenus of the menu PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2.

The setting parameters of the functions taken out of service do not appear on the LCD unit and are not accessible via the communication

If the threshold or thresholds of these functions are reached, a time delay with a duration preset by the operator is started. When this time delay expires, if the fault is still present, an instantaneously signal is generated and can be used to excite one of the output relays.

All the algorithms of the protection functions are based on the fundamental component of the current.


STATE OF THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS (ACTIVE/INACTIVE) ACCORDING TO THE OPERATION MODE OF THE MOTOR

The MiCOM P220 protection functions are automatically* activated or deactivated by the relay itself according to the motor's operation mode (motor halted, start-up sequence, re-acceleration phase or normal running condition). The table below indicates under which conditions these protection functions are active or inactive.

Protective functions

Motor halted Start-up sequence

Motor running Re-acceleration phase

Thermal image Activated (Tr)** Activated (Te2)**

Activated (Te1)**

Activated (Te2)**

Short-circuit Activated Activated Activated Activated

Excessive long start Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated

Locked rotor at start Deactivated Activated Deactivated Deactivated

Stalled rotor whilst running

Deactivated Deactivated Activated Deactivated

Unbalance Activated Activated Activated Activated

Earth fault Activated Activated Activated Activated

Loss of load Deactivated Activated*** Activated*** Activated***

Over temperature Activated Activated Activated Activated

* These protection functions are activated by the relay only if they have previously been commissioned by the user.

** The time constant used in the thermal model depends on the value of the motor load current and on the motor's operating mode. The time constant indicated in brackets is the one used by the relay.

*** The "loss of load" function is activated upon expiry of the Tinhib timer. This timer is user settable, it is initiated by the relay when a motor start is detected.

4.10.1 The [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu: protection against thermal overload conditions

The MiCOM P220 relay produces a thermal image of the motor from the positive and negative components of the current consumed by the motor, in such a way as to take into account the thermal effects created in the stator and in the rotor. The negative component currents consumed in the stator generate in the rotor large amplitude currents which create a substantial temperature rise in the rotor winding. The composition carried out by the MiCOM P220 results in an equivalent thermal current Ieq, the image of the temperature rise caused by the current in the motor. The current Ieq is calculated according to the following formula:

5.0negativepositiveeq ²)IKe²I(I ⋅+=


Starting from this equivalent thermal current, the thermal state of the motor θ is calculated every cycle by the MiCOM P220 relay according to the following formula:

θi+1= (Ieq/Iθ>)² . [1- e(-t/T)] + θi . e(-t/T)

in which:

− Ke is the negative sequence current recognition factor (adjustable).

− Iθ > is the thermal overload current threshold.

− θi is the value of the thermal state calculated previously.

− Τ is the time constant of the motor. As a function of the operating conditions of the motor, the relay uses one of the following 3 thermal time constants:

• the thermal time constant Τe1 which is applied when the equivalent thermal current Ieq lies between 0 and 2 ⋅ Iθ >, that is when the motor is running (load or overload conditions);

• the starting time constant Τe2 which is applied when the equivalent thermal current Ieq is greater than 2 ⋅ Iθ >, that is when the motor is in the starting phase or locked rotor condition;

• the cooling time constant Τr which is applied when the motor is shut down (logic input L1 in the zero logic state - terminals 22-24). In this case, the motor no longer consumes current and the value of the thermal state θ therefore decreases as time passes according to the formula:

θi+1= θi . e(-t/Tr)

A thermal overload signal THERM.OV is generated when the value of the thermal state θ reaches 100 %.

NOTE: On interruption of the auxiliary power supply to the P220 relay, the value of the thermal state θ is stored in the non- volatile memory. On reenergisation of the relay, the value of the thermal state θ is reset to its value before the interruption if it was lower than 90 %. In the opposite case (greater than 90 %), it is reset to 90 %, to avoid premature tripping of the relay P220 when the auxiliary voltage returns. The thermal state θ of the motor is displayed in the PROCESS menu. On the second line of the PROCESS menu, after having entered the password, it is possible to reset the value of the thermal state θ of the motor to zero. Even if the "thermal overload" protection function is not used, the thermal current threshold Iθ > must be set so that it is possible to use the excessively long start EXCES LONG START and stalled rotor while motor is running STALLED ROTOR protection functions. Examples of the thermal overload curve are shown in chapter 5-3.


4.10.1.1 Function inhibiting thermal tripping during a start: θ INHIBIT

This function permits inhibition of the thermal tripping information THERM. OV. during the starting phase. It may be necessary to use this function for some motors with temperature rise characteristics in a starting phase very different from those in a locked rotor condition.

If the user brings this function into service, this inhibition is activated as soon as the starting time delay tIstart begins (cf. submenu [48] EXCES. LONG START). On expiry of tIstart (end of the time allowed for starting), this inhibition is deactivated.

When this function is activated, that is during the motor starting phase, the value of the thermal state θ calculated cannot exceed 90 %. This means that thermal tripping cannot take place under any circumstances. At the end of the time allowed for starting, the value of the thermal state is authorised to exceed 90 %.

NOTE: This function has no influence on the thermal alarm signal θ ALARM and thermal inhibition of starting function θ FORBID. START. When this function is brought into service, the motor is still thermally protected by the monitoring of the starting time.

4.10.1.2 Function of the thermal image influenced by ambient temperature (optional): INFLUENCE RTD

When the ambient temperature exceeds + 40 °C, the admissible motor current diminishes in relation to its rated current. A setting of the protection parameters which is suitable under normal temperature conditions is no longer suitable when the ambient temperature rises above + 40 °C.

The MiCOM P220 relay offers the possibility of taking into account this necessary derating of motors. The thermal image can be modified by the ambient temperature measurement.

When this function is brought into service by the user, if the ambient temperature rises above + 40 °C, the value of the thermal threshold Iθ > is automatically modified to adapt the motor protection to the external temperature conditions.

The rule for the ambient temperature measurement influencing the thermal image is:

− For an ambient temperature lower than or equal to + 40 °C, the thermal image is not modified.

− For an ambient temperature between + 40 °C and + 65 °C, the thermal threshold Iθ > is modified by a multiplying coefficient in compliance with the following formula:

Multiplying coefficient = 1 - (ambient temperature in °C - 40) / 100

− For a temperature greater than or equal to + 65 °C, the thermal threshold Iθ > is modified by a multiplying coefficient of 0.75.


The table below gives the relationship between the ambient temperature measurement and the influence on the thermal image:

Ambient temperature

(in °Celsius) +40 °C +45 °C +50 °C +55 °C +60 °C +65 °C

Correction coefficient for the thermal threshold Iθ >

(multiplying coefficient)

1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75

NOTE: This function can only be used if the relay has the option "6 RTD monitoring". The probe used for this function is RTD 1 (terminals 2c-4c-6c). To use this function, a probe measuring the ambient temperature of the place where the motor is located must be connected to terminals 2c-4c-6c. The operator can program the temperature thresholds of RTD 1 ([49/38] RTD submenu) even if he has brought this INFLUENCE RTD function into service.

ATTENTION : FOR 2 THERMISTORS + 4 RTD OPTION, THIS FUNCTION WILL BE PROVIDED BY THE RTD CONNECTED TO TERMINALS 8C-10C-12C.

4.10.1.3 Thermal alarm function: θ ALARM

The purpose of this function is to produce an alarm signal indicating that the thermal state θ of the motor has exceeded an adjustable threshold: θ ALARM. Corrective action can thus be taken before thermal tripping occurs.

Once the threshold θ ALARM is exceeded, the MiCOM P220 relay calculates and displays, in the PROCESS menu (cf. chapter 4.7 The PROCESS menu), an estimate of the time remaining before a thermal trip THERM. OV. occurs. This estimate is given for a constant overload rate.

4.10.1.4 Thermal start inhibition function: θ FORBID. START

This function makes it possible to inhibit a start on a hot motor, or not, as a function of its thermal state. When this function has been adjusted in service by the user, a further start is inhibited for the motor as long as its thermal state θ is higher than an adjustable threshold θ FORBID START. It is then necessary to wait until the motor cools down. When the value of the thermal state θ falls below the threshold θ FORBID START, the starting of the motor is authorised.

The information inhibiting starting on a thermal criterion FORBID START is activated if the following two conditions are fulfilled:

− Motor shut down: logic input L1 in the zero state (terminals 22-24).

− Thermal state value θ higher than the threshold θ FORBID START.


The following diagram illustrates the operation of the thermal start inhibit criterion:

Thermal state θ of the motor

Time

FORBID START threshold

Shutdown of the motor

Restarting of the motor

θ FORBID START signal

Binary input L1 : interlock o/o (52A)

P0191ENa

4.10.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu

The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT function which protects the motor against short-circuits between phases uses a definite time phase overcurrent protection. In this menu a short-circuit current threshold I >> and its associated time delay tI >> are adjustable.

The P220 relay generates a signal if the phase current exceeds the threshold I >> for a length of time greater than tI >>.

In addition to this time-delayed threshold, an instantaneous information (threshold I >> without time delay) is available.

I>> tI>> 0IAIBIC

Internallogic

signals

>=1

P0192ENa

NOTE: The time delay tI >> can be set to instantaneous. When the operator has adjusted the SHORT-CIRCUIT [50/51] function in service, this function is always active whatever the mode of operation of the motor (motor running, shut down, starting phase, locked rotor condition). In the event of saturation of the phase CTs, the MiCOM P220 will detect a short-circuit under the following conditions: Fault current lower than 200 times the limit current value for saturation of the CTs. No remanent flux in the CTs at the time of establishing the fault. No direct current component at the time of establishing the fault. Short-circuit threshold I >> set below 0.9, the limit current value for saturation of the CTs.


4.10.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu

The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT function which protects the motor against faults between one or more phases and earth uses a definite time zero phase sequence overcurrent protection.

Earth faults create a zero phase sequence current measured either by 3 phase CTs in a residual connection, or directly by a core balanced CT surrounding the 3 conductors.

Two independent earth current thresholds (Io > and Io >>) with their associated time delays (tIo > and tIo >>) enable the operator to configure for example an alarm threshold and a tripping threshold.

The settings of the thresholds are expressed as a function of the residual current (3 times the zero phase sequence component).

For each earth current threshold, time-delayed information and instantaneous information is available.

Io> tIo> 0

3 Io Internallogic

signalstIo>> 0Io>>

P0193ENa

4.10.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu

The [46] UNBALANCE function, which protects the motor against unbalance conditions, broken conductor and phase inversions, is based on the measurement of the negative sequence component of the current.

Two negative sequence overcurrent thresholds are available:

− one of them, Ii >, is associated with a definite time delay,

− the other, Ii >>, is associated with a inverse time characteristic.

The user can use the threshold Ii > to detect the inversion or loss of a phase, or to give an unbalance alarm.

The threshold Ii >> has an inverse time characteristic which enables it to allow slight instantaneous unbalances to pass whilst more substantial unbalances will be detected more quickly. This inverse time characteristic permits selective clearance of external two-phase faults which appear on the system. This operating characteristic in compliance with the withstand of the motors is given in the appendix.

Ii> t Ii> 0

Inegative

Ii>>

Internallogic

signals

IAIBIC

P0194ENa


4.10.5 The [48] EXCES LONG START submenu: protection against excessively long starts

The [48] EXCES LONG START function protects the motor if the starting phase lasts too long. To do this, it uses a starting current threshold Istart> and a starting time delay tIstart. This threshold and this time delay can be adjusted to allow the starting current to pass.

This function is activated (time delay tIstart initiated) as soon as the MiCOM P220 relay detects a start (the criterion for detection of a start is selected in the CONFIGURATION menu).

It is deactivated on expiry of the starting current time delay tIstart.

If, on expiry of the time delay tIstart, the current consumed by the motor has not fallen below the threshold Istart> again, a prolonged start signal LONG START t Istart will be generated.

tIstart 0

IAIBIC

Internallogic

signals

&Motorstart-updetection

>=1

Successfulstart signal

Re-accelerationauthorisation

tIstart 0&

>=1

Istart>

P0195ENa

Information indicating a "successful start" is generated on expiry of the time delay tIstart if no tripping order has been given.

NOTE: During normal operation of the motor, the excessively long start function EXCES LONG START can be reactivated during a flying restart of the motor (re-acceleration of the motor following a voltage dip), that is when re-acceleration is authorised (AUTOMAT. CTRL menu).


4.10.6 The [51LR/50S] LOCKED ROTOR submenu

4.10.6.1 Rotor stalled whilst the motor running

This function, which makes it possible to detect stalling while the motor is running, is activated immediately after the starting period, that is on expiry of the starting time delay tIstart (submenu [48] EXCES LONG START).

Two parameters can be set: the stalled rotor current threshold Istall with its associated time delay tIstall, the stalled rotor time.

The MiCOM P220 relay detects the overcurrent caused by stalling and generates information that the rotor has stalled while the motor is running if the phase current exceeds the threshold Istall for a length of time greater than tIstall.

Istall>

tIstall 0

IAIBIC

Internallogic

signals

&Successfulstart signal

Re-accelerationin progress

>=1

Motorstarting

criterion :52A+I

Motor start-up nondetected

&

Motorshutdown( EL1 = 0 )

tIstall 0

>=1

P0196ENa

NOTE: During authorisation of re-acceleration (AUTOMAT. CTRL menu), this function is deactivated during the time delay allowed for starting tIstart. On starting the motor, when the start detection criterion selected is "closure of the contactor / circuit breaker and exceeding of the starting current threshold Istart (52 A + I)", if the relay sees only one of these events, (closure of the breaking device or the appearance of a current greater than Istart), then the function of monitoring a stalled rotor whilst the motor is running is activated.


4.10.6.2 Locked rotor at start

This function, which makes it possible to detect that the motor is locked at the start, is activated only during the starting phase, that is during the course of the starting time delay tIstart.

It uses speed signal from the motor received by logic input No. 2 of the P220 relay (terminals 26-28), and the time delay tIstall: locked rotor time (a speed switch device must be connected to this logic input: paragraph 4.11.4.1. "Fixed" inputs).

On detection of a start, the "locked rotor at start" function is activated: the time delay tIstall begins. At the end of this time delay, the motor speed logic input (input No. 2) must be in logic state 1 to indicate that the motor speed is not zero. The opposite case (zero speed) means that the rotor is locked, so the P220 relay generates a locked rotor at start order LOCKED ROTOR.

Internallogic

signals&

t Istall 0Motorstart-updetection

Speed switchopen

(EL2 = 0)P0197ENa

NOTE: The speed switch device sends information to the P220 relay indicating, by the closing of a contact, that the rotor is rotating. The time delay tIstall is common to the protection functions for "rotor stalled while motor is running" and "rotor locked at start". If the motor is not fitted with a speed switch device, this function cannot be used and must therefore be deactivated.

4.10.7 The [37]LOSS OF LOAD submenu: protection against undercurrent/loss of load conditions

The [37] UNDERCURRENT function which makes it possible to detect a loss of load (for example the draining of a pump or breakage of a conveyor belt), uses definite time undercurrent protection. The user sets the following parameters:

− undercurrent threshold I <

− time delay tI < associated with the undercurrent threshold

− the inhibit start time delay Tinhib.

This function is deactivated when the motor is shut down (logic input No. 1 in the 0 state) and also during the inhibit time delay Tinhib.

When the P220 relay detects that the motor is starting, this function is activated at the end of the inhibit time delay Tinhib.

The time delay Tinhib is useful for motors with no-load starting which take on load gradually at the end of starting.

When the motor is running (and after expiry of the inhibit time delay Tinhib), if the value of one of the phase currents consumed by the motor is lower than the threshold I < for a period greater than or equal to tI <, the P220 relay will generate a loss of load signal t I< .


I<

tI< 0

IAIBIC Internal

logicsignals

&tinhib

Motorstart-updetection

Motorshutdown( EL1 = 0 )

>=1

P0198ENa

4.10.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu: temperature protection by RTD (optional)

The [49/38] RTD SENSORS [49/38] function is intended to detect abnormal temperature rises of the motor by direct temperature monitoring. This is achieved by monitoring 6 RTDs (Remote Temperature Detectors). The RTDs can be selected from the following types: PT100, Ni120, Ni100 or Cu10 (types selected in the CONFIGURATION menu).

For each RTD, the user sets:

− an alarm threshold RTD # ALARM,

− a time delay associated with the alarm threshold t RTD# ALARM,

− a tripping threshold RTD # TRIP,

− a time delay associated with the tripping threshold t RTD TRIP #.

An alarm signal is generated if the temperature measured exceeds the programmed alarm threshold for a period of time equal to the time delay associated with this threshold.

A tripping signal is generated if the temperature measured exceeds the programmed tripping threshold for a period of time equal to the time delay associated with this threshold.

The P220 relay continuously monitors the satisfactory operation of the RTD's. An alarm will be generated if:

− a RTD wiring circuit is opening

− a RTD is short-circuited.

On detection of a RTD failure, a RTD/Therm ERROR alarm message is generated and the over temperature thresholds corresponding to this RTD will be deactivated.

The RTD can be located:

− at the stator windings (protection of the stator, indirect protection of the rotor, detection of failure of the cooling system),

− at the mechanical bearings (to detect failure of the lubrication),

− outside the motor (ambient temperature measurement), at the same level as that of the entry of cooling air.


NOTE: The symbol # corresponds to the number of the RTD. The RTDs monitored must obligatorily be all of the same type (all of type PT100, or Ni100, or Ni120, or Cu10). It is possible to connect only the RTDs that one wishes to monitor. RTD 1 can be used to measure the ambient temperature and thus influence the thermal image (see § 4.10.1.2).

4.10.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu: temperature protection by thermistor (optional)

This submenu provides the monitoring of 2 thermistors + 4 RTD sensors.

The [49] THERMISTOR function, like the preceding one, detects abnormal temperature rises. It operates with thermistors of type PTC or NTC (selected in the CONFIGURATION menu).

The P220 relay can monitor 2 thermistors. Each thermistor input is linked to an independent threshold (Thermist#) with a fixed time delay of 2 seconds. For each thermistor, the user sets a threshold in ohms.

A "Thermist#" order is generated if the thermistor resistance measured exceeds this threshold for a length of time greater than or equal to 2 seconds.

NOTE: The symbol # corresponds to the number of the thermistor.


4.11 The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu

The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu comprises the following 10 submenus:

• [66] START NUMBER

• MIN TIME BETW 2 START

• RE-ACCEL AUTHORIZ

• INPUTS

• AND LOGIC EQUATION

• AND LOGIC T EQUA DELAY

• AUX OUTPUT RLY

• LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS

• TRIP OUTPUT RLY

• LATCH TRIP ORDER

• SW SUPERVISION

4.11.1 The [66] START NUMBER submenu : limitation of the number of starts per period

The [66] NB DEM function allows the number of motor start-ups over a given period to be limited. In effect, starting the motor too frequently can be too constraining for the motor (over-heating), for its starting system (starting impedance, electrolytic bath,...) or can in some cases reveal an anomaly in the process operation,

The [66] NB DEM function uses the following adjustable parameters.

− a monitoring period Treference

− a number of hot starts limit HOT START NB

− a number of cold starts limit COLD START NB

− a start inhibit time delay Tinterdiction.

Each time an motor start is detected, the Treference time delay is initiated and the number of starts registered by the counter corresponding to the temperature of the motor (hot or cold) is incremented by one. At the end of this time delay, the counter in question will be decremented by one.

Each time the motor is stopped (change of state of logic input No. 1: from state 1 to state 0) relay P220 establishes whether either of the two counters has been reached. If so, start inhibit signal START NB LIMIT will be generated for a length of time equal to Tinterdiction. At the end of Tinterdiction, this signal drops out, and it is possible to start the motor again.

Examples: Taking as an example cold starts where the limit of the number of cold starts has been set at 3 for a period of Treference.


Case n°1:

The number of cold starts limit has been reached and the motor is stopped before the end of the Treference period: the Tinterdiction time delay is therefore initiated when the motor stops. A new start up is permitted at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay.

Treference

Treference

Treference

T inter diction

Istart

t

2 more starts permitted 1 more start permitted No start permitted

START NB LIMIT

IN motor

P0199ENa

Case n°2:

The number of cold starts limit is reached but the motor is not stopped until after the end of the Treference period: therefore the Tinterdiction time delay is not initiated. There is no start inhibit.

Treference

Treference

Treference

t

Istart 2 more starts permitted 1 more start permitted No start permitted 1 more start permitted

START NB LIMIT (logic state at 0)

IN motor

P0200ENa


Case n°3:

Particular cases where at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay, the number of starts counter is still reached (the Tinterdiction time delay period is completed before the end of Treference): any new start up is inhibited until the end of the Treference period (the START NB LIMIT signal is extended).

Treference

Treference

Treference

T interdiction

t

2 more start permitted 1 more start permitted No start permittedIstart

IN motor

START NB LIMIT

P0201ENa

NOTE: A start is considered cold if the value of the motors thermal state is less or equal to 50% when an motor start phase is detected. A start is considered warm if the value of the motors thermal state is more than 50% when an motor start phase is detected. In cases where at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay period, one of the counters is still reached, the START NB LIMIT start inhibit signal will not drop out until the counter in question is decremented (example case No.3). The number of authorised starts and the waiting time before a new start is authorised are available in the PROCESS menu (see section 4.7. The PROCESS menu).

4.11.2 The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu: minimum time between two starts

Excessive motor or starting system heating caused by two consecutive starts can be avoided by means of the MINI TIME BETW 2 START function.

It is based on the use of an adjustable time delay: minimum time between 2 starts T betw 2 start .

This time delay is initiated on detection of an motor start up by the P220 relay. When the motor stops, if the T betw 2 start time delay has not finished, start inhibit signal Tbetw 2 start is generated until the end of the Tbetw 2 start time delay.


Examples

Case n°1: Case n°2:

The stopping of the motor takes place before the end of the Tbetw 2 start time delay period. A start inhibit signal Tbetw 2 start is generated during the Tbetw 2 start period.

The stopping of the motor takes place after the end of the Tbetw 2 start time delay period, no start inhibit signal is generated.

Istart

t

Tbetw 2 start

IN motor

T betw 2 start

P0202ENa

Istart

IN motor

Tbetw 2 start

t

T betw 2 start (logic state at 0)

P0203ENa


4.11.3 The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu: Reacceleration authorization

A fall in voltage from the electrical network causes a reduction in rotor speed. When the voltage is restored, the rotor starts on a re-acceleration phase in order to regain its nominal speed. This re-acceleration manifests itself as a intake of current of approximately the same value as that of the locked rotor current, its duration being relative to the magnitude of the fall in voltage.

The MiCOM P220 can be informed of the fall in voltage from the mains. A programmable logic input of the relay (input VOLT. DIP - the submenu INPUTS, see section 4.11.4.2. The submenu INPUTS: programmable inputs) receives a binary siganl indicating that there is a reduction in voltage from the mains. By comparing how long this voltage reduction lasts with an adjustable time delay Treacc, the relay will authorise or prevent the motors re-acceleration.

The user adjusts a time delay Treacc. This time delay corresponds to the maximum duration of a voltage sag for which the motor re-acceleration is to be authorised.

On receipt of binary signalling a voltage sag, the MiCOM P220 relay initiates the Treacc time delay. Two circumstances are possible:

• If the duration of the voltage sag is less than the time delay Treacc and if in the 5 seconds following the end of the voltage sag the current absorbed by the motor exceeds the lstall> threshold ([51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR function), then:

− The P220 goes into monitoring of a start phase (initiation of the tIstart time delay, EXCES LONG START function) and it deactivates the stalled rotor whilst running function.

− At the end of the tIstart delay allowed for a start, the relay P220 reactivates the stalled rotor whilst running function.

• If the duration of the voltage sag is more than the Treacc time delay, the P220 relay does not modify its operation. When the motor tries to reaccelerate, an tripping order will be generated by the stalled rotor whilst running function if the current absorbed by the motor exceeds the Istall> threshold for a length of time exceeding tlstall.


Examples

Case n°1:

The duration of the drop in voltage is less than the Treacc time delay, when the mains voltage is restored, re-acceleration of the motor is authorised.

Network/mainsvoltage

Voltage sag

Currentabsorbed bythe motor

Motorreacceleration

Treacc

" Drop in voltage " signal(binary input)

t Istart

Reacceleration authorization

Istall > threshold

" stalled rotor whilst running " function active

Fixed window of 5 s

" stalled rotor whilst running "function deactivated

P0204ENa


Case n°2:

The duration of the voltage drop is greater than the Treacc time delay, re-acceleration of the motor is not authorised. When the current absorbed exceeds the current threshold Istall> (non authorised re-acceleration attempt), the stalled rotor whilst running function starts up in order to give an instruction to stop the motor.

Network/mainsvoltage

Voltage sag

Currentabsorbed bythe motor

Motorreacceleration

Treacc

"Drop in voltage" signal(binary input)

t Istall

No reacceleration authorisation (logic state 0)

Istall > threshold

Instruction to stop the motor given by the"stalled rotor whilst running" function

P0205ENa

NOTE: A drop in voltage is only taken into account if it lasts for at least 100 ms.


4.11.4 Binary inputs and outputs Logical gates

Thanks to its programmable scheme logic, inputs and outputs, the MiCOM P220 relay allows control and logic diagrams to be realised. The P220 relay has:

− 5 logic inputs of which 3 are programmable

− 6 logic outputs of which 5 are programmable

− 4 AND logic gates

In order to realise the control and logic diagrams, two types of data are taken into account by the relay:

• internal type data: − logic state of protection function (instantaneous, time delayed signals)

− logic state of an logic or state function (start inhibit, successful start)

• external type data: − data received via its logic inputs

− data received via the communication network (remote control by the supervisor).


Below, a logic diagram shows the different possibilities offered by the MiCOM P220 relay:

External andinternal

logic signals

&toperation treset

Outputrelays

allocation:

RL1RL2RL3RL4RL5

&toperation treset

&toperation treset

& toperation treset

Remotecommunication

Internallogic signals

PROTECTIONfunctions

AUTOMAT.CTRL

sEXT 1Logicinput

t o

EXT 2Logicinput

t o

EXT 3Logicinput

t o

EXT 4Logicinput

t o

P0206ENa

4.11.4.1 Fixed inputs

Two of the P220s logic inputs are predefined for a fixed use, these are:

• Logic input No 1 (terminals 22 - 24) is linked to the position of the fuse-contactor or circuit breaker (52a). This input should be linked to the 52a interlock of the cut off device (the 52a interlock is open when the cut off device is open, it is closed when the cut off device is closed). The connection of this logic input is compulsory.

• The logic input No. 2 (terminals 26-28) is linked to motor speed binary data. This logic input links up to a speed sensor usually known as a speed switch . The speed switch should be open when the rotor is not turning and should close as soon as it detects rotor rotation. The connecting of this logic input to a speed switch device is necessary in order to be able to use the locked rotor at start protection function.

NOTE: When the logic input No. 2 is not linked to a speed switch , this logic input has no assignment.


4.11.4.2 The INPUTS submenu: programmable inputs

The user can program three of the P220s logic inputs. These are logic input No. 3 (terminals 13-15), No 4 (terminals 17-19) and No 5 (terminals 21-23). The user chooses the allocation of these logic inputs in the INPUTS menu.

NOTE: Except for the "None" allocation, any other function can be allocated to only one logic input.

Options of allocated information of logic inputs

Label Operation mode of logic input

EMERGENCY START EMERG ST LEVEL

SWITCHING BETWEEN CONFIGURATIONS

SET GROUP LEVEL/ EDGE

DISTURBANCE TRIGGERING DIST TRIG EDGE

EXTERNAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

EXT RESET LEVEL

RE ACCELERATION AUTHORIZATION

VOLT DIP LEVEL

AUXILIARY 1 and 2 EXT 1 and EXT 2 LEVEL

AUXILIARY 3 and 4 EXT 3 and EXT 4 LEVEL

No Assignement NONE

EMERGENCY START

An emergency start may be necessary for safety reasons. When the logic input having been assigned to the EMERG ST function is powered on (logic state is active), the P220 relay reacts as follows:

− The thermal state value θ is muzzled at 90% so that no thermal trip order THERM. OV. can occur during the motor start up phase (see section 4.10.1.1. Function inhibiting thermal tripping during a start: θ INHIBIT). At the end of the tIstart time delay allocated to the start up, the thermal condition value θ will be allowed to exceed 90%.

− The thermal start inhibit signal θ FORBID START is suppressed.

− The start inhibit START NB LIMIT signal from the limitation of number of starts function is suppressed.

− The T betw 2 start start inhibit signal from the minimum time between 2 starts function is suppressed.

The motor can therefore be restarted and no thermal tripping can take place during the start up phase.

NOTE: The logic input EMERG ST must be kept powered during the whole of the motor start up phase. The relay P220 can also receive a remote emergency start command via the communication network. An emergency start up instruction EMERG ST does not order the closure of the cut off device (motor start up) but makes the motor start up possible.


SWITCHING BETWEEN CONFIGURATIONS (PASSAGE FROM ONE SETTING GROUP TO ANOTHER)

The P220 relay has two configurations (2 setting groups). The switching from one configuration to another can be achieved using one programmed logic input on SET GROUP . When you allocate the information SET GROUP to a logic input, it is possible to configure the operation of this logic input on LEVEL or on EDGE (minimum duration of 15ms).

The change from one configuration to another can also be achieved via the operator menu or the communication network (see section 4.5.1.1. Configuration Group).

A parameter setting group change is not possible if one of the following protection functions is in progress (that is to say if the current threshold of these functions is exceeded):

− [50/51] SHORT CIRCUIT function

− [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT function

− [46] UNBALANCE function

− [48] EXCES LONG START function

− [50S/51LR] BLOCK ROTOR function

− [37] LOSS OF LOAD function

− [49/38] RTD (optional)

− [49] THERMISTOR

TRIGGING OF THE DISTURBANCE RECORDING

By assigning the command DIST TRIG to a programmable logic input, the operator will be able to initiate the disturbance recordings (RECORD menu) from this input. The energising (rising front) of this programmed logic input on DIST TRIG will trigger a disturbance recording.

EXTERNAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

By dedicating a logic input to the external acknowledgement command EXT RESET , the operator can acknowledge the alarms and unlatch the output relays if the latter were kept energised (see section 4.11.10. The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu), by energising this logic input.

RE-ACCELERATION AUTHORISATION

The voltage drop data VOLT. DIP can be assigned to one of the inputs to enable relay P220 to take voltage drops into account in order to authorise re-accelerations if necessary (refer to chapter REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu).

AUXILIARY 1 AND AUXILIARY 2 DATA

The EXT1 and EXT2 assignments allow relay P220 to acquire two lots of external binary data. A time delay (t EXT 1 and t EXT 2 respectively) is linked to each assignment.

The internal EXT1 signal to the relay is in logic state 1 if the associated logic input is energised for a time longer or equal to t EXT 1 time delay. When the logic input is no longer energised, the logic state of the internal EXT1 signal drops back to 0.


The internal EXT2 signal to the relay is in logic state 1 if the associated logic input is energised for a time longer or equal to t EXT 2 time delay. When the logic input is no longer energised, the logic state of the internal EXT2 signal drops back to 0.

When the t EXT 1 and t EXT 2 timers expire, the following happen:

− an alarm message is sent

− the Alarm LED is lit

− an event is recorded.

AUXILIARY 3 AND AUXILIARY 4 DATA

The EXT3 and EXT4 assignments operate similarly to EXT1 and EXT2 , but when the associated timers expire, there is no alarm message and the Alarm LED is not lit. The only result is an event record.

NO ASSIGNMENT

When a logic input is programmed on NONE (None) it becomes inactive. Whether this logic input is switched on or not, relay P220 takes no account of it.

4.11.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu: AND programmable logic gates

The AND LOGIC EQUAT function allows the operator to programme 4 AND logic equations, known respectively as A, B, C and D.

Each equation can be the logic AND of one, two or several items of internal logic signals (protection or automatism functions) or external data (state of logic inputs EXT 1 , EXT2 , EXT 3 and EXT4 ) to the relay P220.

In this menu, the user constructs each of the 4 logic equations by creating logic AND gate between several items of data. Data is assigned to a logic equation by positioning the corresponding digit to 1. When the digit is set at 0, the data is not assigned to the corresponding logic equation.

Examples:

You want to create 2 AND logic equations.

For the first equation, you wish to implement the AND logic of the following data:

− time delayed earth fault 1st element (tlo>)

− successful start (SUCCESS START)

− logic state of one of the binary inputs(EXT1)

&tIo>

SUCCESS STARTEXT 1

P0207ENa


For the second logic equation, you wish to implement le logic AND of the following data:

− unbalance fault 1st element (tli>)

− logic state of one of the binary inputs (EXT1)

&tIi>EXT 1

P0208ENa

Programming in the AND LOGIC EQUAT menu is carried out as follows. In this example, the first equation will be the A equation and the second B:

t I0> D C B A 0 0 0 1

Allocation of the t lo> data to equation A.

t Ii> D C B A 0 0 1 0

Allocation of the t li> data to equation B.

EXT1 D C B A 0 0 1 1

Allocation of the EXT1 data to logic equations A and B.

SUCCESS D C B A START 0 0 0 1

Allocation of the SUCCESS START data to equation A.

4.11.6 The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY: AND logic gate time delay

2 time delays can be linked to each of the 4 programmable logic equations: one operation time delay and one reset time delay. These 8 independent time delays (4 logic equations, 2 time delays per equation) are configurable in the AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu.

The operation time delay (Toperat) is initiated only if all the associated data in a logic equation are valid (AND gate). It allows the logic equation validation to be delayed for a time Toperat.

The reset time delay (Treset) is initiated as soon as any of the data associated with the equation disappears. This allows the equation to remain valid after an item of data has disappeared for a length of time Treset.


Example:

Logic equation C obtained from the combination (AND logic) of three lots of data 1, 2 and 3 with the Toperat and Treset time delays.

1

2

3

Equation C

Toperat TresetP0209ENa

4.11.7 The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : auxiliary programmable output relays

In this menu the user assigns the MiCOM P220 internal or external data to the auxiliary output relays (relays No2, No3, No4 and No5). These are changeover type relays (1 common, 1 normally open contact, 1 normally close contact). One relay is switched on when at least one of the data items linked to it is valid (OR logic). It drops back once all its associated data has disappeared.

− Data assignable to the auxiliary output relays can be:

− of the internal type

− logic state of a protection function (instantaneous, time delayed signals)

− logic state of an automatism or state function (start inhibit, successful start)

− the result of an AND logic equation

− of the external type

− signal received via logic inputs ( EXT1 , EXT2 , EXT3 and EXT4 )

− signal received via the communication network (remote control by the supervisor).

4.11.8 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu

This submenu makes it possible to maintain closed the contacts of outputs assigned to one or more thresholds after the disappearance of the cause; this type of latching is carried out by relay and not by function.


4.11.9 The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu: Configuration of the trip output relay

Data which is going to control the relay No 1 (terminals 2-4-6) can be assigned using the TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu. This changeover type relay is used to give a tripping order to the cut-off device.

The relay No1 (tripping relay) has the same electrical and mechanical characteristics as the other output relays.

Reminder: A certain number of the MiCOM P220 functions are based on the operation of relay No1, i.e.

The Trip Cause Statistics (refer to § 4.8)

The Latching of the Trip Output Relay (refer to § 4.11.10)

The Surveillance of the cut-off device (refer to § 4.11.11)

The display of data relating to the cut-off device (refer to § 4.12.3)

The record of fault values (refer to § 4.12.1)

The triggering of disturbance record (refer to § 4.12.2)

4.11.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu : Latching of the output relays

In this menu, the user selects which functions are to maintain the output relays energised when an order is generated by these functions.

The functions for which output relays can be latched are:

− time delayed threshold tl>> ([50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu)

− time delayed threshold tlo>> ([50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu)

− time delayed threshold tli>> ([46] UNBALANCE submenu)

− AND logic equation A (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)

− AND logic equation B (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)

− AND logic equation C (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)

− AND logic equation D (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)

Thus, when one of the above functions generates a command via one or several output relays, the corresponding relays remain energised after the disappearance of the command. It will be necessary to come and acknowledge the P220 in order to switch off the output relay(s).

NOTE: Latching of the output relays is optional for each of these functions. The user can chose whether to assign these functions to the output relay latching facility . There are three possible ways to acknowledge the P220, and thus switch off the output relays in the event of latching: - press the " button - send an acknowledge order to the configured logic input on EXT RESET - send a acknowledge remote order via the communication network (order given by a supervisor) On loss of auxiliary power, the output relays drop back. On return of auxiliary power, the output relays are re-energised, independently of the fault status (still present or cleared).


4.11.11 The SW SUPERVISION submenu:

The P220 relay monitors the operation of the cut-off device (fuse-contactor or circuit breaker). Three criteria are monitored and for each of these an adjustable alarm threshold is available to the user. These thresholds are based on:

− Monitoring of the time of opening of the cut-off device. This is the time from the moment when the P220 sends an order to the output relay No1 to the moment when the P220 relay receives the data on the logic input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) indicating that the cut-off device is open.

− Monitoring of the number of opening orders. This is the number of tripping orders which have been given to relay No 1.

− Monitoring of the summation of the amps to exponent n cut by the cut-off device The value of the intensity being taken into account is that of the current at the moment when the output relay No 1 receives a tripping order.

When one of the thresholds described above is exceeded, an alarm message is available on the display and logic data can be assigned by the user on one or several of the auxiliary output relays (relays No 2,3,4 or 5).

So as to adapt the MiCOM P220 to any type of cut-off device, the user can also configure 2 time delays:

A making time (Ttrip) for maintaining the tripping order information: For each tripping order sent on the relay No 1, this one is maintained excited for (Ttrip) time (if the trip output relay latching facility were not parameterized)

A marking time (Tclose) for maintaining the closing order information: A command of interlocking (closing of the switchgear) given by the communication network (remote control CLOSE ORDER) is maintained on the auxiliary output relay during a time equal to Tclose. It is about the output relay to which the CLOSE ORDER was affected (AUX OUTPUT RLY menu).

NOTE: For the summation of the amps to exponent n cut, the exponent n can be adjusted to the value 1 or the value 2. In all cases, the orders sent on the output relay No1 (tripping order) are maintained for at least 100 ms.


4.12 The RECORD menu

The RECORD menu comprises 3 sub menus

− FAULT RECORD

− DISTURB RECORD

− SW MONITORING

4.12.1 The FAULT RECORD submenu

A collection of data on each of the 5 last faults registered is displayed in the FAULT RECORD sub menu.

For each logging, the relay memorises:

− the fault number

− the time of the fault

− the date of the fault

− setting group (group G1 or G2) active at the time of the fault

− the faulty phase

− the function which detected the fault

− magnitude of fault current (in fundamental value)

− the 3 phase currents (in True RMS values)

− the earth current (in True RMS value)

The recordings of the fault are accessible:

− either through the Human Machine Interface (display front face)

− or using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port)

− or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port)

Fault number 5 is the last fault registered, fault number 1 is the oldest.

NOTE: Data registered in the non volatile memory are available for one year without auxiliary power thanks to a backup battery housed in the front face. These data are not erasable. They are managed in a circular list: when this is full, the oldest fault is erased. Faults are signalled by one or several alarm messages.


4.12.2 The DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu

The MiCOM P220 relay offers the possibility of saving 5 disturbance records. The data are acquired at a frequency of 32 samples per electrical cycle, ie. 1600Hz in a 50Hz system or 1920 Hz in 60Hz system, and allows for a very faithful reconstruction of the analogue signals.

For each recording, the relays memorises:

− the 3 phase currents

− the earth current

− the frequency

− the state of the 5 logic inputs

− the state of all the output relays (including the watchdog relay)

− the date and the time

The total duration of a recording is defined by the configuration of the pre-time and post-time. The pre-time defines the duration of the recording before the disturbance recording triggering order, the post time defines the duration of the recording after the disturbance recording triggering order. In all cases, the total duration of a recording cannot exceed 3 seconds.

Duration of recording : 3 seconds maximum

Pre-time Post-time

Triggering orderP0210ENa

The triggering of a disturbance recording can be generated:

− when a logic entry programmed on DIST TRIG is excited (see section 4.11.4.2.3 Trigging of the disturbance recording)

− on receipt of a remote control from a supervisor on the communications network (RS485 rear port)

− on receipt of a remote control from MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port)

− when one of the following occurs (exclusive choice):

− instantaneous over-stepping of one of the following current thresholds: l>>, lo>, lo>> (instantaneous short-circuit, instantaneous earth fault 1st threshold and instantaneous earth fault 2nd threshold data respectively)

− or when output relay No 1 is excited (relay dedicated to the tripping of the cut-off device). The excitement of this relay can be due to the detection of an electrical fault or to a voluntary opening order (opening remote control on the communication network, external order relayed by one of the logic inputs).


The disturbance recordings can be retrieved:

− either using the communication network (RS485 rear port)

− or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port)

NOTE: If the configuration of the pre-time and post-time corresponds to total recording duration of more than three seconds then the post-time duration is automatically reduced so that the total recording duration is 3 seconds. Disturbance recordings are not erasable. They are managed in a circular list: when this is full, the oldest recording is erased. The data registered in non volatile memory are available for 1 year without auxiliary power, thanks to a back-up battery housed in the front face. When the disturbance recordings are extracted from relay P220 using the MiCOM S1 support software, they are stored in the COMTRADE format.

4.12.3 The SW MONITORING submenu

In this menu the operator with access to data relating to the cut-off device:

− Summation of the amps exponent n switched by the cut-off device for each phase.

− Total number of operations of relay No 1

− Opening time of the cut-off device.

NOTE: These data are those calculated by the relay P220 whilst in the SW SUPERVISION menu the operator with access to the adjustment of the parameters to generate alarm data when a threshold is exceeded. The way in which relay P220 calculates its data is explained in the section SW SUPERVISION (§ 4.11.11).


4.13 ALARM messages

The management of the alarms is carried out directly on the front face screen. The display of alarm messages takes priority over that of the value by default (selected in CONFIG. SELECT submenu), so that as soon as an alarm is detected by the, the message is displayed on the MiCOM P220 relay screen.

The alarm messages are classified into 2 categories:

− Motor alarm message

− Relay hardware or software fault, or RTD/thermistor failure message

The display of a HARDWARE ALARM message takes priority over the display of a MOTOR ALARM message.

NOTE: Upon loss of auxiliary power supply, the alarm messages disappear. They are restored upon return of the power supply.

4.13.1 The MOTOR ALARM messages

Data considered as motor alarm are displayed in the MOTOR ALARMS menu.

If several alarms appear, they are written to memory in the order of their detection. They are displayed in reverse chronological order (the most recent alarm first, the oldest last). Each message is numbered and the total number of messages is indicated.

Example

This message indicates an earth fault (time delayed threshold tlo>>). This alarm is the 2nd out of total of 7.

t I0>> 2/7

The operator can read all the alarm messages using the ! key, without needing to key in the pass word.

The operator can acknowledge the alarms using the ! key. Keying in the password is not necessary. The operator can acknowledge each message one at a time, or acknowledge all the messages by going to the end of the list and acknowledging all the messages by pressing the " key.

NOTE: If an alarm has not been acknowledged, it will not be possible to view the default display programmed by the operator.

4.13.2 The HARDWARE ALARM messages

The safety and availability of the MiCOM P220 relay can be improved by a cyclic autotest procedure of both hardware and software. Each time the P220 relay is switched on, auto-diagnostic tests are initiated: these tests deal with the output relays (engaging / triggering tests), the microprocessor, the memories (EEPROM checksum calculation, RAM tests) and the acquisition circuit of each analogue input.


The hardware faults are split into 2 groups:

• Minor faults: these are faults classified as non serious (communication fault, analogue output fault, 3.6V battery, RTD or thermistor failure and date indicator fault).

• Major faults: these are serious faults (RAM fault, EEPROM data fault, EEPROM calibration fault, analogue signal acquisition fault, watchdog fault).

Any major fault recorded is immediately the subject of an alarm and provokes the activation of the WATCHDOG relay (relay No0, terminals 35-36-37), as well as the switching off of the other output relays.

The acknowledged alarms are all written to memory in the order of their appearance. The display of the alarms is ensured in reverse chronological order (the most recent alarm first, the least recent last). Each message is numbered and the total number of messages is indicated in the top left hand corner of the display.

The operator can read all of the alarm messages using the ! key, without any necessity to key in the pass word.

The acknowledgement of the relay hardware alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE. Only the disappearance of the cause of the alarm will provoke their acknowledgement.

The display of a hardware fault (equipment fault) takes priority over the other alarms (non equipment fault).

NOTE: In the case of major hardware alarm and even when the tripping relay is configured to be latched, it drops out.


5. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

5.1 Event records

The MiCOM P220 relay registers 75 changes of state in non volatile memory and dates them with a precision of 1 ms. For each change of state the relay indicates the date, the time and the wording of the event.

This applies to any change of state of the logic inputs / outputs, the alteration of one or several setting parameters, alarm or triggering data. Please refer to Chapter 6- Communications for more information.

The recordings of the consignment of states can be downloaded:

• either using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port)

• or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port)

NOTE: The data are registered in non volatile memory and are available for one year without auxiliary power thanks to a back-up battery housed in the front face. These consignments are not erasable. They are managed in a circular list: when this is full, the change of state of the oldest is erased.

5.2 Recording of the form of the starting current

The MiCOM P220 relay records the form of current of the last start. In order to do this, it records at each period (every 20 ms if the frequency is at 50 Hz) the maximum value of one of the three phase currents. The values recorded are expressed in True RMS values.

The recording is initiated following detection by the relay of an motor start up, it stops at the end of the tlstart time delay allocated to the start up.

The file containing the recording of the form of the starting current can be repatriated on a PC:

• either using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port)

• or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port). The data will be stored in COMTRADE format.

NOTE: The data are recorded in non volatile memory and are available for one year without auxiliary power, thanks to a back-up battery housed in the front face. The maximum duration of a recording is limited to 40 seconds.


6. PC CONNECTION DUN PC LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS

6.1 Connection configuration

Configuration is indicated in the figure below:

P0220ENb

The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover.

It provides RS232 (IEC60870 compliant) serial data communication and is intended for use with a PC connected locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in the figure above. This is a pin-to-pin connection which must not be used as a permanent connection.

6.2 Configuration of the relay and PC

Once the physical connection is established, the relay and PC settings must be checked in order to start the communication.

The default communication settings of the RS232 port are as follows:

Protocol Modbus

Rate 19 200 bits/s

Address Must be set in the "Communication" menu, "Address" line.

Message format 11 bit - 1 bit start, 8 bits data, 1 bit even, 1 bit stop.

Technical Guide P220/EN HI/B43 MiCOM P220

Menu of the HMI

Technical Guide P220/EN HI/B43 Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 Page 1/48

CONTENT

1. THE OP PARAMETERS MENU 3

2. CONFIGURATION MENU 5

2.1 CONFIG. SELECT submenu 5

2.2 The CT RATIO submenu 6

2.3 The LED submenus 7

2.4 CONFIGURATION INPUTS submenu 9

2.5 Date Format submenu 9

3. THE MEASUREMENTS MENU 10

4. THE PROCESS SUBMENU 11

5. THE TRIP STATISTICS MENU 12

6. THE COMMUNICATION MENU 14

7. THE PROTECTION MENU 15

7.1 The [49] THERMAL OVERLOD submenu 15

7.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu 16

7.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu 17

7.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu 18

7.5 The[48] EXCES LONG START submenu 19

7.6 The [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu 20

7.7 The [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu 21

7.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu 22

7.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu 23

8. THE AUTOMATIC CTRL MENU 24

8.1 The [66] Start number submenu 24

8.2 The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu 24

8.3 The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu 25

8.4 The INPUTS submenu 26

8.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu 27

8.6 The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu 29

8.7 The AUX OUPUT RLY submenu 30

8.8 The LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu 33

8.9 The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu 34

P220/EN HI/B43 Technical Guide Menu of the HMI Page 2/48 MiCOM P220

8.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu 36

8.11 The SW SUPERVISION submenu 37

9. RECORD MENU 38

9.1 The FAULT RECORD submenu 38

9.2 The DISTURB RECORD submenu 39

9.3 The SW MONITORING submenu 40

10. MENUS CONTENT 41


1. THE OP PARAMETERS MENU

OP PARAMETERS Press the ! and " keys to move around in the OP PARAMETERS menu.

PASSWORD = * * * *

Modification of the password : key in the old password and confirm it. Then press the # key, key in the new password and confirm the whole input with the # key. The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the password has changed.

TYPE = P220

Displays the model of MiCOM relay.

REFERENCE = XXXX

Displays your reference code. It contains letters between A and Z. To enter it, press the # key for eachletter and use the ! and " keys to move forwards and backwards in the alphabet. After each letter, press the $ key to enter the next letter. At the end of the input, press the # key to confirm your reference code.

SOFTWARE VERSION = 3.C

Displays the software version code.

FREQUENCY= 50 Hz

Acquisition of the reference frequency of the electrical power system. There is a choice of: 50 Hz or 60 Hz

ACTIVE GROUP= 1

Displays the Active Group.

INPUT 5 4 3 2 1 ST = 0 0 0 0 0

Displays the state of the binary inputs. The binary inputs are numbered from 1 to 5 starting from the right. The state of each binary input is displayed immediately below: - state 0: input inactive. - state 1 : input active

OUTPUT 5 4 3 2 1 ST = 0 0 0 0 0

Displays the state of the output relays. The output relays are numbered from 1 to 5 starting from the right. The status of each output relay is displayed immediate below: - state 0: input inactive. - state 1 : input active

DATE 14/09/00

Selection and display of the date.


TIME 16:35:30

Selection and display of the time.


2. CONFIGURATION MENU

CONFIGURATION Press the ! and " keys to enter the CONFIGURATION menu

2.1 CONFIG. SELECT submenu

CONFIG. SELECT

To move about in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, use the ! and " keys. To go into the CT RATIO, LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus, press the % and $ keys.

CHANGE GROUP INPUT = EDGE

Selection of the mode of operation of the logic inputs. Choice of: EDGE/LEVEL.

SETTING GROUP 1

Selection and display of the configuration group. Choice of: group 1 or group 2.

DEFAULT DISPLAY IA RMS

Selection and display of a default value. There is a choice of: IA RMS or IB RMS or IC RMS or I0 RMS or THERM ST or % I LOAD

START DETECTION 52A + I dem

Selection and display of the start detection criterion. Choice of: 52A or 52A +I


Selection and display of the type of analogue output: 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA (optional)

DATA TYPE ANALOG

IA RMS

Selection and display of the value transmitted by the analogue output (optional). Choice of: IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS, I0 RMS, THERM ST, % I LOAD, Tbef START, Tbef TRIP (respectively time delay before start, time delay before thermal tripping) T°C RTD1, T°C RTD2, T°C RTD3, T°C RTD4, T°C RTD5, T°C RTD6.

RTD type = PT100

Selection and display of the type of RTD temperature probe (optional): PT100, Ni100, Ni120 or Cu10

Thermist 1 type = PTC

Selection and display of the type of thermistor 1 (optional) : choice of PTC or NTC

Thermist 2 type = NTC

Selection and display of the type of thermistor 2 (optional) : choice of PTC or NTC


2.2 The CT RATIO submenu

CONFIGURATION Press the ! and " keys to enter the CONFIGURATION menu

CT RATIO

To move around in the CT RATIO submenu, press the ! and "keys. To go into the CONFIG. SELECT, LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8, press the % and $ keys.

PRIM PH = * * * *

Selection and display of the primary rating of the phase CT. The value is entered on 4 figures: from 1 to 3000 in steps of 1.

SEC PH = *

Selection and display of the secondary rating of the phase CT. The value is to be selected between either 1 or 5.

PRIM E = * * * *

Selection and display of the primary rating of the earth CT. The value is entered on 4 figures: from 1 to 3000 in steps of 1.

SEC E = *

Selection and display of the secondary rating of the earth CT. The value is to be selected between either 1 or 5.


2.3 The LED submenus

CONFIGURATION Press the ! and " keys to enter the CONFIGURATION menu.

LED 5

To move around in the LED 5 submenu, press the ! and " keys. To go to the CONFIG. SELECT, CT RATIO, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus, press the %and $ keys.

THERM OVERLOAD ? YES

To link LED 5 with the "thermal overload" function so that it lights up if the thermal overload function operates, press #, select YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again to confirm

θ ALARM ? NO

This links LED 5 to the thermal alarm threshold θALARM.

t I >> ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tI>> (protection against short-circuits).

t Io > ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIo> (protection against Earth faults)

t Io >> ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIo>> (protection against Earth faults)

t Ii > ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIi > (protection against unbalances).

t Ii >> ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIi >> (protection against unbalances)

t I< ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold t I< (protection against undercurrent / losses of load).

EXCES LONG START ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIstart (protection against excessively long starts).

t Istall ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold t Istall (protection against rotor stalling when the motor is running)


LOCKED ROTOR ? NO

This links LED 5 to the function "rotor locked on starting"

EMERG RESTART ? NO

This links LED 5 to the "emergency restart" information.

FORBIDDEN START ? NO

This links LED 5 to the "forbidden start" information

t RTD 1, 2, 3 ALARM ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD1 ALARM, tRTD2 ALARM and tRTD3 ALARM (temperature protection: optional)

t RTD 1, 2, 3 TRIP ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD1 TRIP, tRTD2 TRIP and tRTD3 TRIP (temperature protection: optional)

t RTD 4, 5, 6 ALARM ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD4 ALARM, tRTD5 ALARM and tRTD6 ALARM (temperature protection: optional)

t RTD 4, 5, 6 TRIP ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD4 TRIP, tRTD5 TRIP and tRTD6 TRIP (temperature protection: optional)

Thermist 1, 2? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (temperature protection: optional) ditto for thermistor 2 (optional)

EXT 1 ? NO

This links LED 5 to the auxiliary time delay tEXT1

EXT 2 ? NO

This links LED 5 to the auxiliary time delay tEXT2

MOTOR STOPPED ? NO

This links LED 5 to the indication with the information "motor stopped"

MOTOR RUNNING ? NO

This links LED 5 to the indication with the information "motor running".


SUCCESSFUL START ? NO

This links LED 5 to the indication with the information "successful start"

2.4 CONFIGURATION INPUTS submenu

Inputs : 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1

Configuration of the mode of operation of logic inputs. Choice: 0 or 1.

2.5 Date Format submenu

DATE FORMAT: PRIVATE

Configuration of the Date format for synchronization. Choice: PRIVATE or IEC.

NOTE: If the choosen protocol for communication is Modbus, so you will

find this submenu in the "COMMUNICATION" menu.


3. THE MEASUREMENTS MENU

MEASUREMENTS Press the ! and " keys to move about in the MEASUREMENTS menu.

IA RMS = 0.00 A

Display of the current of phase A (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CT RATIO submenu)

IB RMS = 0.00 A

Display of the current of phase B (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CT RATIO submenu)

IC RMS = 0.00 A

Display of the current of phase C (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CT RATIO submenu)

IN RMS = 0.00 A

Display of the earth current (true RMS- value) taking into account the earth CT ratio (CT RATIO submenu)

I1 POSITIVE = 0.00 A

Display of the positive sequence current

I2 NEGATIVE = 0.00 A

Display of the negative sequence current

Io ZERO = 0.00 A

Display of the zero sequence current

FREQUENCY = 0.0 Hz

Display of the frequency of the power system supplying the motor, calculated from the phase currents

MAX PH CURRENT = PROCESS 0.00 A

Display of the maximum phase current value outside the starting period

NOTE: The 3 phase currents and the earth current are displayed as true RMS values: taking into account up to the 10th harmonic at 50 Hz, and up to the 8th at 60 Hz.


4. THE PROCESS SUBMENU

PROCESS Press the ! and " keys to move about in the PROCESS menu.

% I FLC 0 %

Display of the current consumed by the motor as a percentage of the thermal tripping current threshold Iθ>

THERMAL STATE = CLR ?= CL 0 %

Display of the thermal state of the motor (tripping at 100 %). For the test phases of the relay P220, you can reset the thermal state to zero by pressing the key &.

T before TH TRIP = 0 s

Display of the time before thermal tripping occurs, once the thermal alarm threshold θALARM is exceeded.

Temperature RTD 1 = °C

Display of the temperature of the probe RTD1 (optional). ... and similarly for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6 (optional).

PERMIT START NB 0

Display of the number of starts permitted.

T before START 0 s

Display of the time to wait before a new start is permitted.

Last Start I = 0.00 A

Display of the current of the last start.

Last Start Time 0 s

Display of the duration of the last start.

MOTOR START NB CLR ? = CL 0

Display of the number of starts of the motor. To reset to zero press & key.

EMERG RESTART NB CLR ? = CL 0

Display of the number of emergency starts. To reset to zero: press & key.

MOT OPERAT HOURS CLR ? = CL 0 h

Display of the number of operating hours of the motor. To reset to zero: press & key.


5. THE TRIP STATISTICS MENU

TRIP STATISTICS Press the ! and " keys to move about in the TRIP STATISTICS menu.

STATISTICS CLR ? = CL NO

To reset all the tripping statistics to zero, press key &.

TOTAL TRIP NB 0

Display of the total number of tripping operations (with and without fault)

OPERATOR TRIP NB 0

Display of the number of deliberate tripping operations (without fault)

THERM TRIP NB = 0

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a thermal overload

t I >> TRIP NB = 0

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a short-circuit

t Io>, t Io>> TRIP NB = 0

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by an Earth fault

t Ii > , t Ii >> TRIP NB = 0

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by an unbalance

t Istart TRIP NB = 0

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by an excessively long start

t Istall TRIP NB = 0

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a stalled rotor while the motor is running

LOCKED ROTOR TP NB = 0

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a locked rotor when starting


t I < TRIP NB = 0

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by the protection against undercurrents/loss of load

RTD1 TRIP NB = 0

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by the temperature protection function by probe RTD1 (optional) ...and so on for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6 (optional

thermist 1 TRIP NB = 0

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by the temperature protection function by thermistor 1 (optional) ...ditto for thermistor 2 (optional)

EQUATION A TRIP NB = 0

Display of the number of tripping operations on account of the validation of equation A ditto for equations B, C and D.


6. THE COMMUNICATION MENU

• If communication is under the MODBUS protocol

COMMUNICATION Press the ! and " keys to move about in the COMMUNICATION menu

COM. OK = YES

Use of the communication (RS485) at the rear of the MiCOM P220 relay. To activate the communication, press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again to confirm.

DATA RATE = 19200 Bd

Selection and display of the transmission speed. Choice of: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds.

PARITY = WITHOUT

Selection and display of the parity in the communication frame. Choice of: With (even or odd) or Without

DATA BITS= 7

Selection and display of the number of data bits in the frame. Choice of: 7 or 8

STOP BITS = 1

Selection and display of the number of stop bits. Au Choice : 1 or 2

RELAY ADRESS = 1

Selection and display of the address of the MiCOM P220 relay in the network. Choice from: 1 to 255

• If communication is under the Courier protocol

COMMUNICATION Press the ! and " keys to move about in the COMMUNICATION menu.

COM. OK = YES

Use of the communication (RS485) at the rear of the MiCOM P220 relay To activate the communication, press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again to confirm.

RELAY ADRESS = 1

Selection and display of the address of the MiCOM P220 relay in the network. Choice from: 1 to 255


7. THE PROTECTION MENU

7.1 The [49] THERMAL OVERLOD submenu

PROTECTION G1 Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu.

[49] THERMAL OVER LOAD

To move about in the submenu [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD, press the ! and "keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

THERMAL OVERLOAD FUNCT ? YES

To switch on the "thermal overload" function: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and ". Confirm with #.

θ INHIBIT ? YES

To switch on the "thermal inhibition on starting" function, press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

Iθ > = 0.2 In

Setting of the thermal overload current threshold Iθ>: from 0.2 In to 1.5 In in steps of 0.01 In

Ke = 3

Setting of the value of the negative sequence contribution factor Ke in the thermal image : from 0 to 10 in steps of 1

Te1 = 1 mn

Setting of the value of the overload time constant Te1: from 1 to 180 minutes in steps of 1 min

Te2 = 1 mn

Setting of the starting time constant value Te2: from 1 to 360 minutes in steps of 1 minute

Tr = 1 mn

Setting of the value of the cooling time constant Tr: from 1 to 999 minutes in steps of 1 minute

RTD1 INFLUENCE ? YES

To switch on the function of "influence of a RTD temperature probe" (optional): press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

θ ALARM ? YES

To switch on the "thermal alarm" function: press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the choice, press the # key.


θ ALARM = 20 %

Setting of the thermal alarm threshold value θALARM: from 20 % to 100 % in steps of 1 %

θ FORBID START ? YES

To switch on the "thermal inhibition of start" function: press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

θ FORBID START = 20 %

Setting of the threshold value for thermal inhibition of start θforbid: from 20% to 100% in steps of 1%

7.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu


[50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT

To move about in the [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu, press the ! and " keys.. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

I>> FUNCTION ? YES

To switch on the "short-circuit" function : press the # key. Select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

I >> = 1.0 In

Setting of the short-circuit current threshold value I>>: from 1 to 12 In by steps of 0.1 In.

t I >> = 10 ms

Setting of the time delay tI>> associated with the threshold I>>: from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0.01 s


7.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu


[50N/51N] EARTH FAULT

To move about in the [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu, press the ! and " keys To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

Io> FUNCTION ? YES

To switch on the "earth fault" function (threshold Io>): press the # key. Select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

Io> = 0.002 Ion

Setting of the first earth fault current threshold value Io>: from 0,002 to 1 Ion in steps of 0,001 Ion

t Io> = 0 ms

Setting of the time delay tIo> associated with the threshold Io>: from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0.01

Io>> FUNCTION ? YES

To switch on the "earth fault" function (Io>> threshold):press the # key. Select YES by using the ! and " keys To confirm the selection, press the # key.

Io>> = 0.002 Ion

Setting of the second earth fault current threshold valueIo>> : from 0.002 to 1 Ion in steps of 0.001 Ion

t Io>> = 10 ms

Setting of the time delay associated with the threshold Io>> : from 0 ms to 100 s in steps of 0.01 s


7.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu


[46] UNBALANCE

To move about in the [46] UNBALANCE submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

Ii> FUNCTION ? YES

To switch on the "unbalance" function (threshold Ii>): press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

Ii > = 0.05 In

Setting of the first unbalance current threshold value Ii> : from 0.05 to 0.8 In in steps of 0.025 In

t Ii > = 40 ms

Setting of the time delay tIi> associated with the threshold Ii> : from 40 to 100 s in steps of 0.01 s

Ii>> FUNCTION ? YES

To switch on the « unbalance » function (Ii>> threshold) : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

Ii >> = 0.2 In

Setting of the second unbalance current threshold value Ii>>: from 0,2 to 0,8 In in steps of 0,05 In


7.5 The[48] EXCES LONG START submenu


[48] EXCES LONG START

To move about in the [48] EXCES LONG START submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

EXCES LONG START FUNCT ? YES

To switch on the "excessively long start" function: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

Istart DETECTION = 1.0 Iθ

Setting of the Istart detection threshold : from 1 to 5 Iθ pain steps of 0,5 Iθ

t Istart = 14 s

Setting of the time delay tIstart associated with the threshold Istart: from 1 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s


7.6 The [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu


[51LR-50S] BLOCK ROTOR BLOQUE

To move about in the [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

BLOCKED ROTOR FUNCT ? YES

To switch on the "blocked rotor" function: press the # key: select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

t Istall = 0,1 s

Setting of the blocked rotor time delay tIstall associated with the Istall current threshold: from 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s

STALLED ROTOR? YES

To switch on the "stalled rotor with motor running" function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

Istall DETECTION = 1.0 Iθ

Setting of the stalled rotor detection current threshold Istall: from 1 to 5 Iθ in steps of 0.5 Iθ

LOCKED ROTOR AT START ? YES

To switch on the "locked rotor at start" function: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys To confirm the selection, press the # key


7.7 The [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu


[37] LOSS OF LOAD

To move about in the [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu, press the ! and " keys To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys

I< FUNCTION ? YES

To switch on the "undercurrent" function: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

I < = 0.1 In

Setting of the undercurrent threshold value I < : from 0.1 to 1 In in steps of 0.01 In

t I < = 0.2 s

Setting of the tI < time delay associated with the threshold I < : from 0.2 to 100 s in steps of 0.1 s

T inhib = 50 ms

Setting of the inhibition time of the "undercurrent / loss of load" function on starting, Tinhib : from 50 ms to 300 s in steps of 0.1 s


7.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu


[49/38] RTD SENSORS

To move about in the [49/38] RTD submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

RTD 1 FUNCTION ? YES

To switch on the temperature protection function using probe RTD1: press the # key, and select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

RTD 1 ALARM = 0°C

Setting of the alarm temperature threshold value for RTD1 ALARM: from 0 to 200 °C in steps of 1 °C

t RTD 1 ALARM = 0.0 s

Setting of the time delay tRTD1 ALARM associated with the RTD1 ALARM threshold : from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0.1 s

RTD 1 TRIP = 0°C

Setting of the tripping temperature threshold value for RTD1 TRIP: from 0 to 200°C in steps of 1°C

t RTD 1 TRIP = 0.0 s

Setting of the time delay tRTD1 TRIP associated with the RTD1 TRIP threshold : from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0,1 s ...and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6


7.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu


[49] THERMISTOR

To move about in the [49] THERMISTOR submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

Thermistor 1 ? YES

To switch on the temperature protection function using thermistor 1: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

Thermist 1 = 0.1 kΩ

Setting of the resistance threshold value for Thermistor1: from 100 to 30000 Ω in steps of 100 Ω

Thermistor 2 ? YES

To switch on the temperature protection function using thermistor 2: press the # key: select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

Thermist 2 = 0.1 kΩ

Setting of the resistance threshold value for Thermistor2: from 100 to 30000 Ω in steps of 100 Ω


8. THE AUTOMATIC CTRL MENU

8.1 The [66] Start number submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

[66] START NUMBER

To move about in the [66] START NUMBER submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

START NB LIMITAT FUNCT ? YES

To switch on the "number of starts limitation" function: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

Treference = 10 mn

Setting of the reference time Treference during which the starts are counted: from 10 to 120 min in steps of 5 min

HOT START NB = 0

Setting of the threshold of the number of hot starts: from 0 to 5 in steps of de 1

COLD START NB = 0

Setting of the threshold of the number of cold starts : from 0 to 5 in steps of de 1

T interdiction = 1 mn

Setting of the time delay during which starting is forbidden Tinterdiction: from 1 to 120 min in steps of 1 min

8.2 The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu


MIN TIME BETW 2 START

To move about in the MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

TIME BETW START FUNCT ? YES

To switch on the "minimum time between two starts" function: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys To confirm the selection, press the # key.

T betw 2 start = 1 mn

Setting of the minimum time between two starts Tbetw 2 starts : from 1 to 120 min in steps of 1 min


8.3 The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu


REACCEL AUTHORIZ

To move about in the REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

REACCEL AUTHORIZ FUNCT ? YES

To switch on the "re-acceleration authorisation" function: press the # key, and select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key.

VOLT DIP DURAT Treacc = 0.2 s

Setting of the re-acceleration time delay Treacc : from 0.2 s to 10 s in steps of 0.05 s


8.4 The INPUTS submenu


INPUTS

To move about in the INPUTS submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. .

INPUT 3 = NONE

INPUT 4 = NONE

INPUT 5 = NONE

To programme the inputs numbered 3, 4 and 5, press the # key, then press the ! and " keys to scroll through the possible allocations : - none (no allocation) : NONE -emergency start : EMERG ST -change of configuration : SET GROUP -voltage dip : VOLT. DIP -triggering of the disturbance recording : DIST TRIG - external acknowledgement : EXT RESET - external auxiliary1 : EXT 1 - external auxiliary 2 : EXT 2 - external auxiliary 3 : EXT 3 - external auxiliary 4 : EXT 4 To confirm your selection, press the # key.

t EXT 1 = 0 s

Setting of the time delay tEXT1 associated with the input EXT 1 : from 0 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s

t EXT 2 = 0 s


t EXT 3 = 0 s


t EXT 4 = 0 s



8.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu


AND LOGIC EQUATION

To move about in the AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

THERM OV D C B A 0 0 0 0

To allocate the "thermal tripping information" (protection against thermal overloads) to one (or more) of the equations A, B, C and D : press the # key, allocate the value 1 under the letter by pressing the ! and " keys to increase or decrease,then confirm the selection using the #.

θ ALARM D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the thermal alarm threshold θALARM

θ FORBID D C B A START 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the thermal threshold for prohibiting starting θforbid

I >> D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the instantaneous threshold I >> (short-circuit)

t I >> D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tI >> (short-circuit)

Io> D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io> (earth fault)

t Io> D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo> (earth fault)

Io>> D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io >> (earth fault)

t Io>> D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo>> (earth fault)


t Ii > D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time delayed threshold tIi> (unbalance)

t Ii >> D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi>> (unbalance)

EXCES LG D C B A START 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstart (excessively long starts)

t Istall D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstall (stalling of the rotor when the motor is running)

LOCKED D C B A ROTOR 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the function "rotor locked at start"

t I < D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold I < (undercurrent/loss of load)

START NB D C B A LIMIT 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the function "limitation of the number of starts"

T betw 2 D C B A Start 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the function Tbetw 2 start (function of the minimum time between 2 starts)

t RTD 1 D C B A ALARM 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 ALARM (temperature protection: optional)

t RTD 1 D C B A TRIP 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 TRIP (temperature protection: optional) and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD 5 and RTD6 (optional)

Thermist1 D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the threshold Thermistor1: (temperature protection: optional) ditto for thermistor 2 (optional)

EXT1 D C B A 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the input EXT1 (instantaneous or with time delay)


EXT2 D C B A 0 0 0 0


EXT3 D C B A 0 0 0 0


EXT4 D C B A 0 0 0 0


SUCCESS D C B A START 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the information "successful start"

8.6 The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu


AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY

To move about in the AND LOGIC EQUATION T DELAY submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

EQU. A T operat = 0 mn

Setting of the time delay Toperat allocated to the logic equation A: from 0 to 60 min in steps of 0.1 s

EQU. A T reset = 0 mn

Setting of the time delay Treset allocated to the logic equation A: from 0 to 60 min in steps of 0.1 s ... and so on for the logic equations B, C and D


8.7 The AUX OUPUT RLY submenu


AUX OUTPUT RLY

To move about in the AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu, press the ! and " keys To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

THERM OV. 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

To allocate the "thermal tripping" information (protection against thermal overloads) to one (or more) of the outputs Nos. 2 to 5 : press the # key, allocate the value 1 under the letter by pressing the ! and " keys to increase or decrease,then confirm the selection using the # key.

θ ALARM 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the thermal alarm threshold θALARM

θ FORBID. 5 4 3 2 START 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the thermal threshold for prohibiting starting θ forbid

I >> 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the instantaneous threshold I >> (short-circuit)

t I >> 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0


Io> 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io> (earth fault)

t Io> 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo> (earth fault)

Io>> 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io >> (earth fault)

t Io>> 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo>> (earth fault)


t Ii > 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time delayed threshold tIi> (unbalance)

t Ii >> 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi>> (unbalance)

EXCES LG 5 4 3 2 START 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstart (excessively long starts)

t Istall 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstall (stalling of the rotor when the motor is running

LOCKED 5 4 3 2 ROTOR 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the function "rotor locked at start

t I < 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold I < (undercurrent / loss of load)

START NB 5 4 3 2 LIMIT 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the function "limitation of the number of starts"

T betw 2 5 4 3 2 start 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the function Tbetw 2 start (functions of the minimum time between 2 starts)

t RTD 1 5 4 3 2 ALARM 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 ALARM (temperature protection: optional)

t RTD 1 5 4 3 2 TRIP 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 TRIP (temperature protection: optional) and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6 (optional)

Thermist1 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the threshold Thermistor 1: (temperature protection: optional) ditto for thermistor 2 (optional)

EXT1 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0



EXT2 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0


EXT3 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0


EXT4 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0


CLOSE 5 4 3 2 ORDER 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the closing command (order given by a supervisor via the RS485)

TRIP 5 4 3 2 ORDER 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the tripping command (order given by a supervisor via the RS485)

ORDER 1 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the command ORDER 1 (any order given by a supervisor via the RS485)

ORDER 2 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the command ORDER 2 (any order given by a supervisor via the RS485)

SUCCESS 5 4 3 2 START 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the "successful start" information

t EQU. A 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the logic equation A

t EQU. B 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the logic equation B

t EQU. C 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the logic equation C

t EQU. D 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the logic equation D


SW OPER 5 4 3 2 TIME 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the circuit breaker operating time threshold

SW OPER 5 4 3 2 NB 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the threshold of the number of operations performed by the circuit breaker

S A n 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the threshold of the sum of amperes to the power of n interrupted by the circuit breaker

ACTIVE GR 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0

Allocation of the active group

8.8 The LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu

OUTPUT 2 NO

Latching configuration of ouput relay n°2.

OUTPUT 3 NO


OUTPUT 4 NO


OUTPUT 5 NO



8.9 The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu


TRIP OUTPUT RLY

To move about in the TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

THERM OVERLOAD ? YES

To allocate the « thermal tripping information (protection against thermal overloads) to the trip outputrelay (output relay n° 1), press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys, then confirm the selection using the # key.

t I >> ? YES


t Io> ? YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo > (earth fault)

t Io>> ? YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo >> (earth fault)

t Ii > ? YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi > (unbalance)

t Ii >> ? YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi >> (unbalance)

EXCES LONG START ? YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstart (excessively long start)

t Istall ? YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstall (rotor stalled while motor is running)

LOCKED ROTOR ? YES

Allocation of the function "rotor locked at start"


t I < ? YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tI < (undercurrent / loss of load)

t RTD1 ? TRIP YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 TRIP (temperature protection: optional) and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6 (optional)

Thermist 1 ? YES

Allocation of the threshold Thermistor1: (temperature protection: optional) ditto for thermistor 2 (optional)

EXT 1 ? YES


EXT 2 ? NO


EQUATION A ? YES

Allocation of the logic equation A

EQUATION B ? NO

Allocation of the logic equation B

EQUATION C ? NO

Allocation of the logic equation C

EQUATION D ? NO

Allocation of the logic equation D


8.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu

LATCH TRIP ORDER

To move about in the LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu, press the ! and " key. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys

LATCH t I>> ? YES

Latching of the output relay n°1 (trip output relay) on exceeding the time delayed short-circuit threshold tI> : press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys, then confirm the selection using the # key.

LATCH t Io>> ? YES

Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tIo >> (earth fault)

LATCH t Ii >> ? YES

Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tIi >> (unbalance)

LATCH EQUA A ? YES

Latching on validation of equation A

LATCH EQUA B ? NO

Latching on validation of equation B

LATCH EQUA C ? NO

Latching on validation of equation C

LATCH EQUA D ? NO

Latching on validation of equation D


8.11 The SW SUPERVISION submenu

AUTOMAT. CTRL Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu

SW SUPERVISION

To move about in the SW SUPERVISION submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

SW OPERATING TIME ? YES

To switch on the circuit breaker operating time threshold function: press the # key, and select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key again

SW OPERATING TIME= 150 ms

Setting of the operating time threshold SW OPERATINGTIME : from 50ms to 1s in steps of 50ms

SW OPERATION NB ? YES

Switching on the threshold of the number of operations performed by the circuit breaker: select YES

SW OPERATION NB = 150

Setting of the threshold of the number of operations : from 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

S A n ? YES

Switching on the threshold of the sum of amperes to the power n interrupted by the circuit breaker: select YES

S A n = 0 E6

Setting of the threshold of the sum of amperes to the power n interrupted : from 106 to 4 000x106 in steps of 106 E6 means 106.

n = 1

Setting of the exponent n :1 or 2

TRIP T = 0.1 s

Setting of TRIP T: from 0.2 to 5 s in steps of 0.1 s

CLOSE T = 0.1 s

Setting of CLOSE T: from 0.2 to 5 s in steps of 0.1 s


9. RECORD MENU

9.1 The FAULT RECORD submenu

RECORD Press the ! and " keys to enter the RECORD menu.

FAULT RECORD

To move about in the FAULT RECORD submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter DISTURB RECORD submenu, press the % and $ keys.

FAULT NUMBER 5

Displays the fault number. To display the information on one of the last 5 faults, press the # key, and select the number (1 to 5) by using the ! and " keys, then press the # key again to confirm the selection

OCCUR FAULT HOUR 16 : 39 : 23 : 82

Displays the time of the fault

OCCUR FAULT DATE 01/09/98

Displays the date of the fault

ACTIVE SET GROUP 1

Displays the active configuration group (1 or 2) at the time of the fault

PHASE IN FAULT PHASE A

Displays the faulty phase or phases: phase A, phase B or phase C

FAULT DETECTED BY I>>

Displays the origin of the fault: here it is exceeding the instantaneous threshold I >>

MAGNITUDE 1.917 kA

Displays the amplitude of the fault

IA MAGNITUDE 1.917 kA

Displays the value of the current of phase A (IA) at the time of the fault (true RMS value)

IB MAGNITUDE 1.997 kA

Displays the value of the current of phase B (IB) at the time of the fault (true RMS value)


IC MAGNITUDE 1.931 kA

Displays the value of the current of phase C (IC) at the time of the fault (true RMS value)

IN MAGNITUDE 0.03 A

Displays the value of the earth current IN at the time of the fault (true RMS value)

9.2 The DISTURB RECORD submenu


DISTURB RECORD

To move about in the DISTURB RECORD submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter FAULT RECORD submenu, press the % and $ keys.

PRE-TIME = 0.1 s

Setting of the "pre-time" time : from 0,1 to 3 s in steps of 0,1 s

POST-TIME = 0.1 s

Setting of the "post-time" time delay : from 0,1 to 3 s in steps of 0,1 s

DISTUR REC TRIG = ON INST.

Selection of the criterion for starting the disturbance recording : - on exceeding certain instantaneous thresholds (I>, Io> et Io>>) : ON INST. - on tripping of the n°1 relay (trip output relay) : ON TRIP


9.3 The SW MONITORING submenu


SW MONITORING

To move about in the SW MONITORING submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys.

S A CLR ? = CL

To reset to zero the sum of the amperes to the power of n interrupted: press the & key

S A IA = 0 E00

Displays the sum of the square amperes interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of phase IA.

S A IB = 0 E00

Displays the sum of the amperes to the power n interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of phase IB.

S A IC = 0 E00

Displays the sum of the amperes to the power n interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of phase IC.

SW OPERATION NB = CLR ?=CL 0

Displays the number of operations performed by the circuit breaker. To reset to zero: press the & key

SW OPERAT TIME = 100 ms

Displays the opening time of the circuit breaker.

NOTE: If the user has set the exponent n to the value 1 in the SW MONITORING submenu, the term SA shall replace the term SA2 to indicate the sum of the amperes interrupted in place of the sum of the square amperes interrupted.


10. MENUS CONTENT D

EFA

ULT

DIS

PLA

Y

PASS

WO

RD = * *

* *

TYPE

=P2

20-4

REFE

REN

CE

= XXXX

FREQ

UEN

CY

= 50 H

z

INPU

T

5 4

3 2

1

ST =

0 0

0 0

0

OP

PARA

MET

ERS

OU

TPU

T

5 4

3 2

1ST

=

0

0 0

0 0

CO

NFI

G.

SELE

CT

SETT

ING

GRO

UP

1

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

IA R

MS

STA

RT D

ETEC

TIO

N.

52 A

+ I

AN

ALO

G.

OU

TPU

T0

- 20

mA

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

CT

RATI

O

PRIM

PH

=*

* *

*

SEC

PH

=*

LED

5 /

6 /

7 /

8

THER

M

OV

ERLO

AD

?Y/

N

θ A

LARM

?Y/

N

t I >

> ?

Y/N

t I0

> ?

Y/N

t I0

>>

?Y/

N

t Ii

> ?

Y/N

t Ii

>>

?Y/

N

t I<

?Y/

N

EXC

ES L

ON

GST

ART

?Y/

N

t Is

tall?

Y/N

LOC

KED

RO

TOR

?Y/

N

EMER

G

REST

ART

?Y/

N

FORB

IDD

ENST

ART

?Y/

N

t RT

D 1

, 2,

3

ALA

RM ?

Y/N

t RT

D 1

, 2,

3TR

IP ?

Y/N

t RT

D 4

, 5,

6A

LARM

?

Y/N

t RT

D 4

, 5,

6

TRIP

?

Y/N

MiC

OM

P2

20

- M

enu

cont

ent

PRIM

E =

* *

* *

SEC

E =

*

SOFT

WA

RE V

ERSI

ON

=

4.C

DA

TE

14/0

9/00

TIM

E

16

: 35

: 3

0

DA

TA T

YPE

AN

ALO

GIA

RM

S

RTD

Typ

e =

PT10

0

Ther

mis

t 1

Type

= PTC

Ther

mis

t 2

Type

= NTC

Ther

mis

t 1,

2 ?

Y/N

EXT

1 ?

Y/N

EXT

2 ?

Y/N

MO

TOR

STO

PPED

?Y/

N

MO

TOR

RUN

NIN

G ?

Y/N

SUC

CES

SFU

LST

ART

?Y/

N

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

IN

PUT

Inpu

ts:

54

321

1111

1

DA

TE F

ORM

AT

Dat

e fo

rmat

=

Pri

vate

Act

ive

Gro

up =

1

Cha

nge

GRO

UP

Inpu

t =

ED

GE


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

MiC

OM

P2

20

- M

enu

cont

ent

IA R

MS

=0.

00

A

IB R

MS

=0.

00

A

IC R

MS

= 0.00

A

IN R

MS

= 0.00

A

I1 P

OSI

TIV

E =

0.00

A

I2 N

EGA

TIV

E =

0.00

A

MEA

SURE

MEN

TS

FREQ

UEN

CY

=0.

0 H

z

MA

X PH

CU

RREN

T =

PRO

CES

S

0.0

0 A

Io Z

ERO

= 0.00

A

% I F

LC0

%

THER

MA

L ST

ATE

=C

LR ?

= C

L0

%

T be

fore

TH

TRI

P =

0 s

Tem

pera

ture

RTD

1 =

°CRT

D 2

=°C

....

..RT

D 6

=°C

PERM

IT S

TART

NB 0

T be

fore

STA

RT0 s

PRO

CES

S

Last

Sta

rt I

=0.0

A

Last

Sta

rt T

ime 0

s

EMER

G R

ESTA

RT N

BC

LR ?

= C

L

MO

T O

PERA

T H

OU

RSC

LR ?

= C

L 0

h

MO

TOR

STA

RT N

BC

LR ?

= C

L0

STA

TIST

ICS

CLR

? =

CL

TOTA

L TR

IP N

B 0

OPE

RATO

R TR

IP N

B0

THER

M T

RIP

NB

=0

t I0

>,

t I0

>>

TRI

PN

B =

0

t Ii>

, t

Ii >

> T

RIP

NB

=

0

t I >

> T

RIP

NB

=0

TRIP

STA

TIST

ICS

t Is

tart

TRI

PN

B =

0

t Is

tall

TRIP

NB

=

0

Ther

mis

t 1

TRIP

NB

=

0

Ther

mis

t 2

TRIP

NB

=

0

RTD

1 T

RIP

NB

=0

RTD

2 T

RIP

NB

=0

....

....

..RT

D 6

TRI

PN

B =

0

CO

M.

OK

= YES

DA

TA R

ATE

=192

00 B

d

PARI

TY =

WIT

HO

UT

RELA

Y A

DD

RESS

=1

STO

P BI

TS =

1

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

N

EQU

ATI

ON

A T

RIP

NB

=0

EQU

ATI

ON

C T

RIP

NB

=

0

EQU

ATI

ON

D T

RIP

NB

=

0

EQU

ATI

ON

B T

RIP

NB

=0

LOC

KED

RO

TOR

TPN

B =

0

I <

TRI

PN

B =

0

DA

TA B

ITS

=7


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

MiC

OM

22

0 -

Men

u co

nten

t

PRO

TEC

TIO

N

G1

/G2

[49

] TH

ERM

AL

OV

ERLO

AD

THER

MA

L O

VER

LOA

D

FUN

CTI

ON

?

YES

θ IN

HIB

IT ?

YES

Iθ >

=0.

2 In

Te1

=1

mn

RTD

IN

FLU

ENC

E ?

YES

θ A

LARM

?YE

S

θ FO

RBID

STA

RT ?

YES

θ FO

RBID

STA

RT =

20

%

Ke

=3

Tr =

1 m

n

[50

/51

] SH

ORT

-C

IRC

UIT

I>>

FU

NC

TIO

N ?

YES

I>>

=1.

0 In

t I>

> =

10 m

s

[50

N/5

1N

] EA

RTH

FAU

LT

I0>

FU

NC

TIO

N ?

YES

I0>

=0.

002

Ion

t I0

> =

0 m

s

I0>

> =

0.00

2 Io

n

I0>

> F

UN

CTI

ON

?YE

S

t I0

>>

=10

ms

Te2

=1

mn

[46

] U

NBA

LAN

CE

Ii> F

UN

CTI

ON

? YES

li> =

0.05

In

t li>

=0

ms

li>>

=0.

2 In

li>>

FU

NC

TIO

N ?

YES

θ A

LARM

=20

%

[48

] EX

CES

LO

NG

STA

RT

EXC

ES L

ON

G S

TART

FUN

CT

?

YES

Ista

rt D

ETEC

TIO

N=

1.0

Iθ

t Is

tart

=1

4 s

[51

LR/5

0S]

BLO

CK

ROTO

R

BLO

CK

ED R

OTO

RFU

NC

T ?

YES

t Is

tall

=0.

1 s

STA

LLED

RO

TOR

?YE

S

LOC

KED

RO

TOR

AT

STA

RT ?

YES

Ista

ll D

ETEC

TIO

N=

1.0

Iθ

[37

] LO

SS O

F LO

AD

I< F

UN

CTI

ON

?YE

S

I< =

0.1 In

t I<

=0.

2 s

T in

hib

=50

ms


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

MiC

OM

22

0 -

Men

u co

nten

t

PRO

TEC

TIO

N

G1

/G2

[49

/38

] RT

D

SEN

SORS

RTD

1 F

UN

CTI

ON

?YES

RTD

1 A

LARM

= 0°C

t RT

D 1

ALA

RM =

0.0

s

t RT

D 1

TRI

P = 0.

0 s

t RT

D 2

TRI

P = 0.

0 s

....

....

t RT

D 6

TRI

P=0.

0 s

RTD

1 T

RIP

=0°C

[49

] TH

ERM

ISTO

R

Ther

mis

tor

1 ? Y

ES

Ther

mis

t 1

= 0.1

kΩ

Ther

mis

tor

2 ? Y

ES

Ther

mis

t 2

=0.

1 kΩ

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

[66

] ST

ART

NU

MBE

R

STA

RT N

B LI

MIT

AT

FUN

CT

?YE

S

Tref

eren

ce =

10 m

n

HO

T ST

ART

NB

= 0

T in

terd

ictio

n = 1 m

n

CO

LD S

TART

NB

=0

MIN

TIM

E BE

TW 2

STA

RT

TIM

E BE

TW S

TART

FUN

CT

?YE

S

T be

tw 2

sta

rt = 1 m

n

INPU

TS

INPU

T 3 = N

ON

E

INPU

T 4 = N

ON

E

INPU

T 5 = N

ON

E

EXT

1 =

0 s

EXT

3 =

0 s

EXT

2 =

0 s

EXT

4 =

0 s

REA

CC

EL A

UTO

RIZ

REA

CC

EL A

UTH

ORI

ZFU

NC

T ?

YES

VO

LT D

IP D

URA

TTr

eacc

=0.

2 s


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

AN

D L

OG

ICEQ

UA

TIO

N

THER

M O

V.

D C

B A

0 0

0 0

θ A

LARM

D

C B

A0

0 0

0

θ FO

RBID

D

C B

AST

ART

0 0

0 0

t I >

>

D C

B A

0 0

0 0

I0 >

D

C B

A0

0 0

0

I >>

D

C B

A0

0 0

0

I0 >

>

D C

B A

0 0

0 0

t 0

>

D C

B A

0 0

0 0

t I0

>>

D

C B

A0

0 0

0

MiC

OM

P2

20

-M

enu

cont

ent

t Ii>

D

C B

A0

0 0

0

t li>

>

D C

B A

0 0

0 0

EXC

ES L

G

D C

B A

STA

RT0

0 0

0

t Is

tall

D C

B A

0 0

0 0

t I <

D C

B A

0 0

0 0

STA

RT N

B D

C B

ALI

MIT

0 0 0

0

LOC

KED

D

C B

ARO

TOR

0 0

0 0

t RT

D 1

D

C B

AA

LARM

0

0 0

0

T be

tw 2

D

C B

ASt

art

0 0

0 0

t RT

D 1

D

C B

ATR

IP0

0 0

0t

RTD

2

D C

B A

TRIP

0 0

0 0

....

..

t RT

D 6

D

C B

ATR

IP0

0 0

0

Ther

mis

t 1

D C

B A

0 0

0 0

EXT

1 D

C B

A0

0 0

0

EXT

2 D

C B

A0

0 0

0

EXT

3 D

C B

A0

0 0

0

SUC

CES

S D

C B

AST

ART

0 0

0 0

EXT

4 D

C B

A0

0 0

0

AN

D L

OG

IC E

QU

AT

T D

ELA

Y

EQU

. A

T o

pera

t =

0 m

n

EQU

. A

T r

eset

= 0 m

nTh

erm

ist

2 D

C B

A0

0 0

0

EQU

. B

T op

erat

=0

mn

EQU

. B

T re

set

= 0 m

n

EQU

. C

T o

pera

t =

0 m

n

EQU

. C

T r

eset

= 0 m

n

EQU

. D

T o

pera

t =

0 m

n

EQU

. D

T r

eset

= 0 m

n

AU

X O

UTP

UT

RLY

THER

M O

V.

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

θ A

LARM

5

4 3

20

0 0

0

θ FO

RBID

. 5

4 3

2ST

ART

0 0

0 0

t I >

>

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

I0 >

5

4 3

20

0 0

0

I >>

5

4 3

20

0 0

0

I0 >

>

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

t I0

>

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

t I0

>>

5

4 3

20

0 0

0

t Ii>

5

4 3

20

0 0

0

t li>

>

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

EXC

ES L

G

5 4

3 2

STA

RT0

0 0

0

t I <

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

STA

RT N

B 5 4

3 2

LIM

IT0

0 0

0

LOC

KED

5

4 3

2RO

TOR

0 0

0 0

t RT

D 1

5 4

3 2

ALA

RM

0 0

0 0

T be

tw 2

5

4 3

2st

art

0 0

0 0

t RT

D 1

5 4

3 2

TRIP

0 0

0 0

t RT

D 2

5 4

3 2

TRIP

0 0

0 0

....

...

t RT

D 6

5 4

3 2

TRIP

0 0

0 0

EXT

1 5

4 3

20

0 0

0

Ther

mis

t 1

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

Ther

mis

t 2

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

t Is

tall

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0


EXT

3 5

4 3

2 0

0 0

0

CLO

SE 5

4 3

2O

RDER

0 0

0 0

TRIP

5

4 3

2O

RDER

0 0

0 0

EXT

4 5

4 3

2 0

0 0

0

ORD

ER 2

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

ORD

ER 1

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

SUC

CES

S 5

4 3 2

STA

RT0

0 0

0DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

AU

X O

UTP

UT

RLY

MiC

OM

P2

20

- M

enu

cont

ent

SW O

PER

5 4

3 2

TIM

E0

0 0

0

SW O

PER

5 4

3 2

NB

0 0

0 0

S A

n

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

THER

M O

VER

LOA

D ?

YES

t I0

>?

YES

t I0

>>

?

YES

t I >

> ?

YES

t Ii

>>

?YES

t Ii

> ?

YES

EXC

ES L

ON

G ?

STA

RTYES

TRIP

OU

TPU

T RL

Y

Ther

mis

t 1 ?

YES

EXT

1 ?

YES

EQU

ATI

ON

A ? YE

S

EXT

2 ?

YES

EQU

ATI

ON

B ? YE

S

t Is

tall

?YE

S

LOC

KED

RO

TOR

?YE

S

t I <

?

YES

EQU

ATI

ON

C ? YE

S

EQU

ATI

ON

D ? YE

S

LATC

H

t I >

> ?

YE

S

LATC

H

t Ii

>>

?

YES

LATC

H

t I0

>>

?YE

S

LATC

H E

QU

A B

?YE

S

LATC

H E

QU

A A

?YE

S

LATC

H E

QU

A C

?YE

S

LATC

H T

RIP

ORD

ER

LATC

H E

QU

A D

?YE

S

t RT

D 1

TR

IPYE

St

RTD

2

TRIP

YES

....

...

t RT

D 6

TR

IPYE

S

Ther

mis

t 2 ?

YES

EXT

2 5

4 3

2 0

0 0

0

t EQ

U.

A

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

t EQ

U.

C

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

t EQ

U.

B5

4 3 2

0 0

0 0

t EQ

U.

D

5 4

3 2

0 0

0 0

Act

ive

Gro

up 5

4 3

2 0

0 0

0

LATC

H

OU

TPU

T R

ELA

YS

Out

put

3N

O

Out

put

4N

O

Out

put

5N

O

Out

put

2N

O


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

MiC

OM

P2

20

Men

u co

nten

t

FAU

LT R

ECO

RD

FAU

LT N

UM

BER

5

OC

CU

R FA

ULT

HO

UR

16:3

9:23

:82

OC

CU

R FA

ULT

DA

TE01/

09/9

8

PHA

SE IN

FA

ULT

Phas

e A

AC

TIV

E SE

T G

ROU

P

1

DIS

TURB

REC

ORD

REC

ORD

MA

GN

ITU

DE

1.917

kA

FAU

LT D

ETEC

TED

BYI>

>

PRE-

TIM

E =

0.1

s

POST

-TIM

E =

0.1

s

DIS

TUR

REC

TRI

G =

ON

INST

.

SW M

ON

ITO

RIN

G

S A

CLR

? =

CL

S A

IA =

E06

S A

IB =

E06

SW O

PERA

TIO

N N

B =

CLR

? =

CL

0

SW O

PERA

T TI

ME

=10

0 m

s

S A

IC =

E06

IA M

AG

NIT

UD

E 1

.917 k

A

IN M

AG

NIT

UD

E0.

03

A

IC M

AG

NIT

UD

E1.9

31 k

A

IB M

AG

NIT

UD

E1.9

97 k

A

SW S

UPE

RVIS

ION

SW O

PERA

TIN

GTI

ME

?YES

SW O

PERA

TIO

N N

B ?

YES

SW O

PERA

TIO

N N

B=

150

SW O

PERA

TIN

GTI

ME

=15

0 m

s

S A

n ?

YES

S A

n =

14 E

6

TRIP

T =

200 m

s

CLO

SE T

=20

0 m

s

n =

1

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L


BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P220/EN GC/B43 MiCOM P220

MODBUS COMMUNICATION

Technical Guide P220/EN GC/B43 Communication MiCOM P220 Page 1/94

CONTENTS

1. MODBUS PROTOCOL 5

1.1 MODBUS communication characteristics 5

1.1.1 MODBUS network characteristics 5

1.1.2 Parameters of the MODBUS connection 6

1.1.3 Synchronisation of exchanges messages 6

1.1.4 Message validity check 6

1.1.5 Address of the MiCOM relays 7

1.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays 7

1.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol 7

1.3.1 Frame size received by the MiCOM P220 relay 7

1.3.2 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM P220 relay 8

1.3.3 Messages validity check 8

1.4 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the disturbance records 9

1.4.1 Request to know the number of available disturbance records in the Saved RAM. 9

1.4.2 Service request 9

1.4.3 Request to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel 10

1.4.4 Request to retrieve an index frame 10

1.5 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the event records 10

1.5.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event 10

1.5.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated event 11

1.6 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records 11

1.6.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record 11

1.6.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record 11

1.7 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the start-up current form record 12

1.7.1 Request to know the number of current values stored into the saved memory 12

1.7.2 Request to retrieve the start-up current form record data 12

1.8 MiCOM P220 database organisation 13

1.8.1 Description of the MODBUS application mapping 13

1.8.2 Page 0 : Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements 14

1.8.3 Page 1 : Remote settings for general parameters 17

1.8.4 Page 2 : Remote settings for protection functions group No1 23

1.8.5 Page 3 : Remote settings for protection functions group No2 26

1.8.6 Page 4 : Remote controls 29

1.8.7 Pages 5 and 6 : reserved 29

P220/EN GC/B43 Technical Guide Communication Page 2/94 MiCOM P220

1.8.8 Page 7 : MiCOM P220 relay status word 29

1.8.9 Page 8 : Synchronisation 29

1.8.10 Page 9 to 21h : Disturbance record data (25 pages) 30

1.8.11 Page 22h : Index frame for the disturbance records 31

1.8.12 Page 23 to 33h : Start-up current form record data 31

1.8.13 Page 34h : Index frame for the start-up current form record 31

1.8.14 Page 35h : Event record data 32

1.8.15 Page 36h : Data of the oldest event 33

1.8.16 Page 37h : Fault value record data 33

1.8.17 Pages 38h à 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its channel 33

1.8.18 Page 3Dh : Number of available disturbance records 34

1.8.19 Page 3Eh : Data of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record 34

1.9 Description of the mapping format 34

2. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE 49

2.1 K-BUS 49

2.1.1 K-Bus transmission layer 49

2.1.2 K-Bus connection 49

2.1.3 Auxiliary equipment 50

2.2 Relay courier database 50

2.3 Setting changes 50

2.4 Systems integration data 50

2.4.1 Address of the relay 50

2.4.2 Measured values 51

2.4.3 Status word 51

2.4.4 Control status word 51

2.4.5 Logic input status word 51

2.4.6 Output relay status word 51

2.4.7 Control information 52

2.4.8 Protection Indication 52

2.4.9 Measurement control 54

2.4.10 Change of remote measurements 54

2.5 Event extraction 54

2.5.1 Automatic event extraction 54

2.5.2 Event types 55

2.5.3 Event format 55

2.5.4 Manual record extraction 55

2.6 Disturbance record extraction 56


3. LIST OF EVENTS CREATED BY THE RELAY 57

4. LIST OF FAULTS CREATED BY THE RELAY 60

5. COURIER DATABASES 61

6. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE 89

6.1 Physical connection and link layer 89

6.2 Initialisation 89

6.3 Time synchronisation 90

6.4 Spontaneous events 90

6.5 General interrogation 90

6.6 Cyclic measurements 90

6.7 Commands 90

6.8 Disturbance records 90

6.9 Blocking of monitor direction 90

7. IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASES 91


BLANK PAGE


1. MODBUS PROTOCOL

The MiCOM P220 relay offers MODBUSTM RTU mode communication via a rear RS485 port.

1.1 MODBUS communication characteristics

1.1.1 MODBUS network characteristics

The MODBUS protocol is based on the master-slave principle with the MiCOM P220 relay as slave.

The MODBUS protocol allows the master to read and to write one or several bits, one or several words and to remote the event logging data.

The access to the network can be :

• either according to a query/response principle

Equipment Slave

Equipment Slave

Equipment Slave

Response

Query

Master

P0211ENa

• or according to a broadcast message sent from the master to all the slaves.

Equipment Slave

Equipment Slave

Equipment Slave

Broadcast message

Master

P0212ENa

in that case :

− compulsory, the broadcast message is a writing order,

− the slaves return no response,

− the protocol is RTU mode. Each byte of the data frame is coded according to a hexadecimal base.

− At the end of each frame, two bytes of CRC16 validity checksum are applied on the whole of the frame content.


1.1.2 Parameters of the MODBUS connection

The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows :

− Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz).

− MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode.

− The baud rate can be configured by operator dialogue in the front panel of the relay :

Baud rate

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

38400

− Transmission mode of the configurable parameters by operator dialogue :

Transmission mode

1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop : total 10 bits

1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits

1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits




1 start / 7 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits

1 start / 7 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits



1.1.3 Synchronisation of exchanges messages

Any character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to a transmission time of 3 bytes is considered as a frame start.

1.1.4 Message validity check

The validation of a trame is performed with a 16-bit cyclical redundancy check (CRC). The generator polynomial is :

1 + x² + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h


1.1.5 Address of the MiCOM relays

The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1 and 255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages.

1.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays

The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are :

Function 1 or 2 : Reading of n bits

Function 3 or 4 : Reading of n words

Function 5 : Writing of 1 bit

Function 6 : Writing of 1 word

Function 7 : Fast reading of 8 bits

Function 8 : Reading of the diagnosis counters

Function 11 : Reading of the Event counter

Function 15: Writing of n bits

Function 16 : Writing of n words

1.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol

MODBUS is a master-slave protocol whereby every exchange involves a master query and a slave response.

1.3.1 Frame size received by the MiCOM P220 relay

Frame transmitted by the master (query) :

Slave number Function code Information CRC16

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes

0 to FFh 1 to 10h

Slave number :

The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.

Function code :

Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16).

Information :

Contains the parameters of the selected function.

CRC16 :

Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master.

NOTA: the MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames sent out by the master.


1.3.2 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM P220 relay

Frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) :

Slave number Function code Data CRC16

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes

1 to FFh 1 to 10h

Slave number :


Function code :

Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16).

Data :

Contains the response data to master query.

CRC16 :

Value of the CRC16 calculated by the MiCOM relay.

1.3.3 Messages validity check

When the MiCOM relay receives a master query, it validates the frame :

• If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. The MiCOM relay does not reply to the query. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message, this is the only case of non-reply by the MiCOM relay to a master query.

• If the CRC is correct but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sents to the master a exception response.

Exception frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) :

Slave number Function code Error code CRC16

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes

1 to 20h 81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh LSB ... MSB

Slave number :


Function code :

The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the exception frame is the code in which the most significant bit (bit7) is forced to 1.


Error code :

Among the 8 exception codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay manages two of them : • code 01 : Function code unauthorised or unknown.

• code 03 : A value of the data field is unauthorised (incorrect code).

− Control of pages being read.

− Control of pages being written.

− Control of address in pages.

− Length of request messages.

CRC16:

The CRC16 value is calculated by the slave.

1.4 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the disturbance records

To retrieve a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact given order :

1. (optional) : Send a request to know the number of disturbance records available in the saved RAM.

2. To retrieve the data of one channel: 2a (compulsory) : Send a service request specifying the record number and the channel number which have to be retrieved. 2b (compulsory) : Send requests to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel as many time as needed. 2c (compulsory) : send a request to retrieve the index frame.

3. Process the same operation (as described in the item 2) for each channel.

1.4.1 Request to know the number of available disturbance records in the Saved RAM.

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 3Dh 00 00 24h xx............xx

This request may be answered an error message with the error code :

EVT_NOK (0F) : No record available.

NOTA: If there is less than 5 records available, the answer will contain zero value in the non-used words.

1.4.2 Service request

This request shall be send before to retrieve the sample data of a disturbance record channel. It allows to specify the record number and the channel number which have to be retrieved. It allows also to know the number of samples in the channel.


xx 03h Refer to mapping

00 0Bh xx............xx


This request may be answered an error message. Two error codes are possible :

CODE_DEF_RAM (02) : Saved RAM failure.

CODE_EVT_NOK (03) : No disturbance record available in the saved RAM.

1.4.3 Request to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel



1 to 7Dh xx............xx

This request may be answered an error message. Two error codes are possible :

CODE_DEP_DATA (04) : The requested sample number is superior than the number of samples in the specified channel.

CODE_SERV_NOK (05) : The record number and the channel number have not been specified by a service request.

NOTA: This type of request can retrieve up to125 words. A sample is coded on 1 word (16 bits).

1.4.4 Request to retrieve an index frame


xx 03h 22h 00 00 07h xx............xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code :

CODE_SERV_NOK (05) : The record number and the channel number have not been specified by a service request.

1.5 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the event records

Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record :

− Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event.

− Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event.

1.5.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event


xx 03h 36h 00 00 09h xx............xx


EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : An event is being written into the saved RAM.

NOTA: On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event record acknowledgement : - a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval. - b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval.

a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged.


b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged.

To acknowledge this event, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 13 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.

1.5.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated event



00 09h xx............xx


EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : An event is being written into the saved RAM.

NOTA: This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.

1.6 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records

Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record :

− Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record.

− Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.

1.6.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record


xx 03h 3Eh 00 00 0Fh xx............xx

NOTA: On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault record acknowledgement: - a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval. - b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval.

a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged.

b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged.

To acknowledge this fault, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 14 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.

1.6.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record



00 0Fh xx............xx

NOTA: This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.


1.7 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the start-up current form record

To retrieve the start-up current form record, process as described below :

1. Send a request to know the number of current values stored into the saved RAM.

2. Send a request to retrieve the start-up current from record data.

1.7.1 Request to know the number of current values stored into the saved memory


xx 03h 34H 00 00 03h xx............xx

1.7.2 Request to retrieve the start-up current form record data



04 to 7Ch xx............xx

NOTA: The number of requested words shall be a 2 multiple number as the value of a start-up current from record sample is coded on 4 bytes. One page of the mapping can stored up to 248 words.


1.8 MiCOM P220 database organisation

1.8.1 Description of the MODBUS application mapping

The MODBUS mapping contains 60 pages.

Pages 0 to 8 : Contain the MiCOM P220 parameters.

Pages 9 to 3Dh : Contain the data of the event records, data of the fault value records, data of the disturbance records and data of the start-up current form record.

These pages are explained in the following way :

Page No Page content Access

Page 0 Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements

Reading

Page 1 Remote settings for general parameters Reading & writing

Page 2 Remote settings for protection group number 1 Reading & writing

Page 3 Remote settings for protection group number 2 Reading & writing

Page 4 Remote controls Writing

Page 5 Reserved page Not accessible

Page 6 Reserved page Not accessible

Page 7 MiCOM P220 relay status word Quick reading

Page 8 Synchronisation Writing

Pages 9h to 21h

Disturbance record data Reading

Page 22h Index frame for the disturbance records Reading

Pages 23h to 33h

Start-up current form record data Reading

Page 34h Index frame for the start-up current form record Reading

Page 35h Event record data Reading

Page 36h Data of the oldest event Reading

Page 37h Fault value record data Reading

Pages 38h to 3Ch

Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its channel

Reading

Page 3Dh Number of available disturbance records Reading

Page 3Eh Data of the oldest fault value record Reading


1.8.2 Page 0 : Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements

Access only for reading

Address Group Description Values range Step Unit Format

Default value

0000 Product informations

Description of the relay characters 1 and 2

32 -127 1 - F10

0001 Description of the relay characters 3 and 4

32-127 1 - F10 P2

0002 Description of the relay characters 5 and 6

32-127 1 - F10 20

0003 Factory reference characters 1 and 2

32-127 1 - F10 AL

0004 Factory reference characters 3 and 4

32-127 1 - F10 ST

0005 Software version 10 - xx 1 - F21

0006 to 000C Reserved

000D Active group 1 to 2 1 F1

000E Reserved

000F Status of the MiCOM relay self-test

F46

0010 Remote-signaling

Logic inputs 0 to 31 1 - F12

0011 Logic datas 0 to FFFF 1 - F20

0012 Internal logics 0 to FFFF 1 - F22

0013 Output relays 0 to 63 1 - F13

0014 Output information: threshold I>>

0 to FFFF 1 - F17

0015 Output information: threshold I0>

0 to FFFF 1 - F16

0016 Output information: threshold I0>>

0 to FFFF 1 - F16

0017 Output information:

I2 >

0 to FFFF 1 - F16

0018 Output information:

I2 >>

0 to FFFF 1 - F16

0019 Output information : I< 0 to FFFF 1 - F17

001A Thermal image Information :

0 to FFFF 1 - F33

001B Informations : EXT1, EXT2 timers and « AND » logical gates

0 to FFFF 1 - F36

001C Informations : Excessive long start/stalled rotor

0 to FFFF 1 - F34

001D Informations : RTDs 0 to FFFF 1 - F4

001E Number of available disturbance records

0 to 5 1 F55

001F and 0020

Reserved

0021 Circuit breaker monitoring flag

F43



Default value

0022 Display alarm message : tI>> PHASE

F17

0023 Display alarm message: tI< PHASE (Mini I)

F17

0024 Display alarm messages F41



0027 to 002F Reserved

0030 Remote-measurement

Phase A current IA RMS 1 A/100 F3

0032 Phase B current IB RMS 1 A/100 F3

0034 Phase Current IC RMS 1 A/100 F3

0036 Neutral current IN RMS 1 A/100 F3

0038 Negative sequence I2 current (fundamental)

1 A/100 F3

003A Positive sequence I1 current (fundamental)

1 A/100 F3

003C Zero sequence current (fundamental)

I0 (1/3 IN)

1 A/100 F3

003E Frequency 4500 to 6500

1 1/100 Hz F1

003F and 0040

Phase current maximeter F1


0050 Process Load current as % Iθ> % F1

0051 Thermal status value % F1

0052 Reserved

0053 Time before thermal trip Seconds F1

0054 RTD1 temperature value -400 to 2000

1/10 °C F2


1/10 °C F2


1/10 °C F2


1/10 °C F2


1/10 °C F2


1/10 °C F2

005A Thermistor 1 value 0 to 30000 1 Ohm F1

005B Thermistor 2 value 0 to 30000 1 Ohm F1

005C Number of authorised start-ups

- F1

005D Time before an authorised start-up

seconds F1

005E Last start current value A/100 F1



Default value

005F Reserved

0060 Last start time value seconds F1

0061 Total motor start number - F1

0062 Total emergency start number

- F1

0063 Total motor running hours

hours F1

0064 RTDs status F45


0070 Trip Cause Statistics

Reserved

0071 Total trip number (based on output relay No1)

- F1

0072 Operator trip number (logic inputs, pushbuttons or remote communication)

- F1

0073 Thermal trip number - F1

0074 Earth fault trip number - F1

0075 Short-circuit trip number - F1

0076 Excessive long start trip number

- F1

0077 Stalled rotor trip number (whilst running)

- F1

0078 Locked rotor trip number (at start)

- F1

0079 Loss of load trip number - F1

007A Unbalance trip number - F1

007B EQUATION A trip number

F1

007C EQUATION B trip number

F1

007D EQUATION C trip number

F1

007E EQUATION D trip number

F1

007F RTD1 trip number - F1

0080 RTD2 trip number - F1





0085 Thermistor 1 trip number - F1

0086 Thermistor 2 trip number - F1

0087 to 008F Reserved -



Default value

0090 Fourier Magnitude

IA magnitude - F1

0091 IB magnitude - F1

0092 IC magnitude - F1

0093 3.I0 magnitude - F1

0094 Fourier Angle IA angle - F1

0095 IB angle - F1

0096 IC angle - F1

0097 3.I0 angle - F1

0098 Fourier Magnitude

I1 magnitude F1

0099 I2 magnitude F1

009A to 009F Reserved

1.8.3 Page 1 : Remote settings for general parameters

Access for reading and writing

Address Group Description Values range

Step Unit Format Default value

0100 Remote-settings Address 1 to 255 1 - F1 1

0101 Reserved

0102 Password : characters 1 and 2

0x410x5a 1 - F10 AA

0103 Password : characters 3 and 4

0x410x5a 1 - F10 AA

0104 Frequency 50-60 10 Hz F1 50

0105 Default displayed value 1-6 1 - F26 1

0106 Motor start-up detection criterion

0-1 1 F5 0

0107 Analogue output type 0 to 1 1 - F18 0

0108 Data transmitted on the analogue output

0 to 15 1 F7 0

0109 Active setting group 1-2 1 F1 1

010A User reference : characters 1 and 2

0x300x5a 1 - F10 MO

010B User reference : characters 3 and 4

0x300x5a 1 - F10 T1

10C Displayed fault record number

1 5 1 F39 5

010D Thermistor 1 type 0-1 1 - F32 0

010E Thermistor 2 type 0-1 1 - F32 0

010F RTDs type 0-3 1 - F42 0

0110 to 0113 Reserved


0114 EDGE validation configuration for logic input

0-31 1 - F12 0



Default value

0115 Latching Output Relays 0-31 1 - F12 0


0118 Configuration of Change of active group

0-1 1 - F47 1


0120 CT Ratio Phases CT primary 1 to 3000 1 - F1 1

0121 Phase CT secondary 1 to 5 4 - F1 1

0122 Earth CT primary 1 to 3000 1 - F1 1

0123 Earth CT secondary 1 to 5 4 - F1 1


0130 Rear RS485 Communication

Data rate 0 to 7 1 - F28 6 = 19200 bauds

0131 Parity 0 to 2 1 - F29 0 = without

0132 Data bits 0 to 1 1 - F30 1 = 8 bits

0133 Stop bit 0 to 1 1 - F31 0 =1 bit

0134 Communication available 0 to 1 1 - F24 1 = Commu-nication available

0135 to 013C Reserved

013D CB supervision CB operation number 1 - F1

013E CB operating time 1 sec/100 F1

013F S An IA (phase A) 1 An F3

0141 S An IB (phase B) 1 An F3

0143 S An IC (phase C) 1 An F3

0145 Date Format 0 to 1 1 - F48 0=Private


0150 LED allocation Led 5 2n - F19 0

0152 Led 6 2n - F19 0

0154 Led 7 2n - F19 0

0156 Led 8 2n F19 0


0160 Logic inputs allocation

Logic input L3 0 to 2n - F15 0

0161 Logic input L4 0 to 2n - F15 0

0162 Logic input L5 0 to 2n - F15 0

0163 to 16E Reserved

016F Active Group: If Group 2 then Output =1

0-15 1 - F14 0

0170 Auxiliary output relays allocation

Thermal overload : THERM OV.

0 to 15 1 F14 0

0171 Thermal alarm : θ ALARM

0 to 15 1 - F14 0



Default value

0172 Thermal start inhibition θ FORBID. START

0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0173 I0> (instantaneous) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0174 tI0> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0175 I0>> (instantaneous) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0176 tI0>> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0177 I>> (instantaneous) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0178 tI>> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0179 tI2> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

017A tI2>> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

017B Excessive long start : EXCES LG START

0 to 15 1 - F14 0

017C Stalled rotor (whilst running): t Istall

0 to 15 1 - F14 0

017D Locked rotor (at start): LOCKED ROTOR

0 to 15 1 - F14 0

017E Loss of load : t I<

0 to 15 1 - F14 0

017F Start number limitation START NB LIMIT

0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0180 Time between 2 start: T betw 2 start

0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0181 t RTD1 ALARM 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0182 t RTD1 TRIP 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0183 t RTD2 ALARM 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0184 t RTD2 TRIP 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0185 t RTD3 ALARM 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0186 t RTD3 TRIP 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0187 t RTD4 ALARM 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0188 t RTD4 TRIP 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0189 t RTD5 ALARM 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

018A t RTD5 TRIP 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

018B t RTD6 ALARM 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

018C t RTD6 TRIP 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

018D Thermist 1 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

018E Thermist 2 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

018F EXT 1 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0190 EXT 2 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0191 CLOSE ORDER 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0192 TRIP ORDER 0 to 15 1 F14 0

0193 ORDER 1 0 to 15 1 F14 0

0194 ORDER 2 0 to 15 1 F14 0

0195 SUCCESS START 0 to 15 1 F14 0



Default value

0196 « AND » logical gate A: t EQU. A

0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0197 « AND » logical gate B: t EQU. B

0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0198 « AND » logical gate C t EQU. C

0 to 15 1 - F14 0

0199 « AND » logical gate D t EQU. D

0 to 15 1 - F14 0

019A CB opening time : SW OPER TIME

0 to 15 1 F14 0

019B CB operation number : SW OPER NB

0 to 15 1 F14 0

019C Σ Ampsn cut by CB : S An

0 to 15 1 F14 0

019D EXT 3 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

019E EXT 4 0 to 15 1 - F14 0

019F Reserved

01A0 « AND » logical gates allocation

Thermal overload : THERM OV.

0 to 15 1 F14 0

01A1 Thermal alarm : θ ALARM

0 to 15 1 F14 0

01A2 Thermal start inhibition θ FORBID. START

0 to 15 1 F14 0

01A3 I0> (instantaneous) 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01A4 tI0> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01A5 I0>> ( instantaneous) 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01A6 tI0>> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01A7 I>> (instantaneous) 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01A8 tI>> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01A9 tI2> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01AA tI2>> (time delayed) 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01AB Excessive long start : EXCES LG START

0 to 15 1 F14 0

01AC Stalled rotor (running): t Istall

0 to 15 1 F14 0

01AD Locked rotor (at start): LOCKED ROTOR

0 to 15 1 F14 0

01AE Loss of load : t I< 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01AF Start number limitation START NB LIMIT

0 to 15 1 F14 0

01B0 Time between 2 starts : T betw 2 start

0 to 15 1 F14 0

01B1 t RTD1 ALARM 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01B2 t RTD1 TRIP 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01B3 t RTD2 ALARM 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01B4 t RTD2 TRIP 0 to 15 1 F14 0



Default value

01B5 t RTD3 ALARM 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01B6 t RTD3 TRIP 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01B7 t RTD4 ALARM 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01B8 t RTD4 TRIP 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01B9 t RTD5 ALARM 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01BA t RTD5 TRIP 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01BB t RTD6 ALARM 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01BC t RTD6 TRIP 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01BD Thermist 1 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01BE Thermist 2 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01BF EXT 1 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01C0 EXT 2 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01C1 SUCESS START 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01C2 EXT 3 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01C3 EXT 4 0 to 15 1 F14 0

01C4 to 01CF Reserved -

01D0 Automation Control functions

Trip output relay assignment (relay 1)

0 to 32767 2n F6 0

01D1 Trip output relay assignment (relay 1)

0 to 127 2n F6 0

01D2 Latching of the trip output relay (relay 1)

0 to 127 2n - F8 0

01D3 Function : Start number limitation

0 1 1 - F24 0

01D4 Reference time : Treference

10 120 5 minute F1 10

01D5 Hot start number 0 5 1 - F1 0

01D6 Cold start number 0-5 1 - F1 0

01D7 Start interdiction time : Tinterdiction

1-120 1 minute F1 1

01D8 Function : Time between 2 starts

0 to 1 1 - F24 0

01D9 T betw 2 start 1 to 120 1 minute F1 1

01DA Function : Reacceleration authorization

0-1 1 - F24 0

01DB Voltage dip duration : Treacc

2-100 1 1/10 sec F1 2

01DC Function : CB Opening time

0-1 1 - F24 0

01DD SW OPERATING TIME threshold

5 to 100 1 1/100 sec F1 5

01DE Function : CB Operation number

0-1 1 - F24 0

01DF SW OPERATION NB threshold

0-50000 1 - F1 0



Default value

01E0 Σ Ampsn cut by CB : S An

0-1 1 - F24 0

01E1 SAn threshold 0 to 4000 10e6 A^n F3 0

01E2 « n » exponent value 1 to 2 1 1 F1 1

01E3 TRIP T duration value (remote order)

20 to 500 5 1/100 sec F1 20

01E4 CLOSE T duration value (remote order)

20 to 500 5 1/100 sec F1 20

01E5 Logic inputs EXT1 time delay 0 to 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0

01E6 EXT2 time delay 0 to 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0

01E7 Disturbance record

Pre-time 1 to 30 1 1/10 sec F1 1

01E8 Post-time 1 to 30 1 1/10 sec F1 1

01E9 Disturbance record trigging criterion : DISTUR REC TRIG

0 1 1 F40 0

01EA EXT3 time delay 0 to 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0

01EB EXT4 time delay 0 to 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0

01EC to 01EF Reserved -

01F0 « AND » logical gate A operation time delay : EQU. A Toperat

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

01F1 « AND » logical gate A reset time delay : EQU. A Treset

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec 0

01F2 « AND » logical gate B operation time delay : EQU. B Toperat

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

01F3 « AND » logical gate B reset time delay : EQU. B Treset

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

01F4 « AND » logical gate C operation time delay : EQU. C Toperat

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

01F5 « AND » logical gate C reset time delay : EQU. C Treset

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

01F6 « AND » logical gate D operation time delay : EQU. D Toperat

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

01F7 « AND » logical gate D reset time delay : EQU. D Treset

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

01F8 to 01FF Reserved


1.8.4 Page 2 : Remote settings for protection functions group No1



Default value

0200 Protection group 1

Thermal overload function

0-1 1 - F24 0

0201 Thermal inhibition at start : θ INHIBIT

0-1 1 - F24 0

0202 Thermal current threshold : Iθ>

20 to 150 1/100 In

- F1 20

0203 Ke factor 0 to 10 1 - F1 3

0204 Thermal constant time Te1

1 to 180 1 Minute F1 1



0206 Cooling constant time Tr 1 to 999 1 Minute F1 1

0207 RTD1 influence : RTD1 INFLUENCE

0-1 1 - F24 0

0208 Thermal alarm function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0209 θ ALARM threshold 20 to 100 1 % F1 20

020A Thermal start inhibition function

0-1 1 - F24 0

020B θ FORBID START 20 to 100 1 % F1 20

020C to 020F Reserved -

0210 I>> function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0211 I>> threshold 10 to 120 1 In/10 F1 10

0212 tI>> time delay 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 0


0220 I0> function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0221 I0> threshold 2 to 1000 1 1/1000 I0n F1 2

0222 tI0> time delay 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 0

0223 I0>> function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0224 I0>> threshold 2 to 1000 1 1/1000 I0n F1 2

0225 tI0>> time delay 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 0


0230 I2> function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0231 I2> threshold 50 to 800 25 1/1000 In F1 50


0233 I2>> function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0234 I2>> threshold 200 to 800 50 1/1000 In F1 200

0235 to 023F Reserved - 0

0240 Excessive long start function

0-1 1 - F24 0

0241 Istart detection threshold 10 to 50 5 1/10 Iθ F1 10

0242 t Istart time delay 1 to 200 1 Second F1 1

0243 Reserved - -



Default value

0244 Blocked rotor function 0 1 1 - F24 0

0245 t Istall time delay 1 600 1 1/10 sec F1 1

0246 Stalled rotor function 0 1 1 - F24 0

0247 Istall detection threshold 10 to 50 5 1/10 Iθ F1 10

0248 Locked rotor at start function

0-1 1 - F24 0


0250 I< function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0251 I< threshold 10 to 100 1 1/100 In F1 10

0252 t I< time delay 2 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F24 2

0253 Tinhib inhibition time 5 to 30000 5 1/100 sec F1 5


0260 RTD1 function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0261 RTD1 ALARM threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0

0262 t RTD1 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

0263 RTD1 TRIP threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0

0264 t RTD1 TRIP time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

0265 RTD2 function 0 1 1 - F24 0





026A RTD3 function 0-1 1 - F24 0

026B RTD3 ALARM threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0

026C t RTD3 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

026D RTD3 TRIP threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0

026E t RTD3 TRIP time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

026F RTD4 function 0-1 1 - F24 0





0274 RTD5 function 0-1 1 - F24 0





0279 RTD6 function 0-1 1 - F24 0

027A RTD6 ALARM threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0

027B t RTD6 ALARM time delay 0 à 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

027C RTD6 TRIP threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0

027D t RTD6 TRIP time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0



Default value

027E Thermistor 1 function 0-1 1 - F24 0

027F Thermistor 1 threshold 1-300 1 1/10 kΩ F1 1

0280 Thermistor 2 function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0281 Thermistor 2 threshold 1-300 1 1/10 kΩ F1 1



1.8.5 Page 3 : Remote settings for protection functions group No2



Default value

0300 Protection group 2

Thermal overload function

0-1 1 - F24 0

0301 Thermal inhibition at start : θ INHIBIT

0-1 1 - F24 0

0302 Thermal current threshold : Iθ>

20 to 150 1/100 In

- F1 20

0303 Ke factor 0 to 10 1 - F1 3





0306 Cooling constant time Tr 1 to 999 1 Minute F1 1

0307 RTD1 influence :

RTD1 INFLUENCE

0-1 1 - F24 0

0308 Thermal alarm function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0309 θ ALARM threshold 20 to 100 1 % F1 20

030A Thermal start inhibition function

0-1 1 - F24 0

030B θ FORBID START 20 to 100 1 % F1 20

030C to 030F Reserved -

0310 I>> function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0311 I>> threshold 10 to 120 1 In/10 F1 10

0312 tI>> time delay 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 0


0320 I0> function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0321 I0> threshold 2 to 1000 1 1/1000 I0n F1 2


0323 I0>> function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0324 I0>> threshold 2 to 1000 1 1/1000 I0n F1 2

0325 tI0>> time delay 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 0


0330 I2> function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0331 I2> threshold 50 to 800 25 1/1000 In F1 50


0333 I2>> function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0334 I2>> threshold 200 to 800 50 1/1000 In F1 200

0335 to 033F Reserved - 0

0340 Excessive long start function

0-1 1 - F24 0

0341 Istart detection threshold 10 to 50 5 1/10 Iθ F1 10

0342 t Istart time delay 1 to 200 1 Second F1 1

0343 Reserved - -



Default value

0344 Blocked rotor function 0 1 1 - F24 0

0345 t Istall time delay 1 600 1 1/10 sec F1 1

0346 Stalled rotor function 0 1 1 - F24 0

0347 Istall detection threshold 10 to 50 5 1/10 Iθ F1 10

0348 Locked rotor at start function

0-1 1 - F24 0


0350 I< function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0351 I< threshold 10 to 100 1 1/100 In F1 10

0352 t I< time delay 2 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F24 2

0353 Tinhib inhibition time 5 to 30000 5 1/100 sec F1 5


0360 RTD1 function 0-1 1 - F24 0





0365 RTD2 function 0 1 1 - F24 0





036A RTD3 function 0-1 1 - F24 0

036B RTD3 ALARM threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0

036C t RTD3 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

036D RTD3 TRIP threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0

036E t RTD3 TRIP time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

036F RTD4 function 0-1 1 - F24 0





0374 RTD5 function 0-1 1 - F24 0





0379 RTD6 function 0-1 1 - F24 0

037A RTD6 ALARM threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0

037B t RTD6 ALARM time delay 0 à 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0

037C RTD6 TRIP threshold 0-200 1 °C F1 0

037D t RTD6 TRIP time delay 0 to 1000 1 1/10 sec F1 0



Default value

037E Thermistor 1 function 0-1 1 - F24 0

037F Thermistor 1 threshold 1-300 1 1/10 kΩ F1 1

0380 Thermistor 2 function 0-1 1 - F24 0

0381 Thermistor 2 threshold 1-300 1 1/10 kΩ F1 1



1.8.6 Page 4 : Remote controls

Access in writing



0400 Remote control Remote control word 1 0 to 31 1 - F9 0

1.8.7 Pages 5 and 6 : reserved

1.8.8 Page 7 : MiCOM P220 relay status word

Access for quick reading



0700 Quick reading byte

Quick reading byte 1 - F23 0

1.8.9 Page 8 : Synchronisation

Access in writing. The format of the clock synchronisation is coded on 8 bytes (4 words).

Clock @page byte number Value range Unit

Year LSB + MSB 8 2 Year

Months 8 1 1 - 12 Month

Days 8 1 1 - 31 Day

Hours 8 1 0 - 23 Hour

Minutes 8 1 0 - 59 Minute

ms LSB + MSB 8 2 0 - 59999 ms


1.8.10 Page 9 to 21h : Disturbance record data (25 pages)

Access in reading. Each page of the mapping contains 250 words.

Address Contents Format

0900 to 09FAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58

0A00 to 0AFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58

0B00 to 0BFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58

0C00 to 0CFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58

0D00 to 0DFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58

0E00 to 0EFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58

0F00 to 0FFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58











1A00 to 1AFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58

1B00 to 1BFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58

1C00 to 1CFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58

1D00 to 1DFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58

1E00 to 1EFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58

1F00 to 1FFAh 250 words of disturbance record data F58



NOTA: The above disturbance record data pages of the mapping contains the data for only one record channel.


1.8.11 Page 22h : Index frame for the disturbance records

Access in reading.


2200h Index frame for the disturbance records F50

1.8.12 Page 23 to 33h : Start-up current form record data

Access in reading.


2300 to 23F8h 124 values







2A00 to 2AF8h 124 values

2B00 to 2BF8h 124 values

2C00 to 2CF8h 124 values

2D00 to 2DF8h 124 values

2E00 to 2EF8h 124 values

2F00 to 2FF8h 124 values




3300 to 3320h 16 values

1.8.13 Page 34h : Index frame for the start-up current form record

Access in reading.


3400h Number of available values of the start-up current form record

F51


1.8.14 Page 35h : Event record data

Access in reading.

Address Contents Format Address Contents Format Address Contents Format

3500h EVENT n°1 F52 3519h EVENT n°26 F52 3532h EVENT n°51 F52

3501h EVENT n°2 F52 351Ah EVENT n°27 F52 3533h EVENT n°52 F52

3502h EVENT n°3 F52 351Bh EVENT n°28 F52 3534h EVENT n°53 F52

3503h EVENT n°4 F52 351Ch EVENT n°29 F52 3535h EVENT n°54 F52

3504h EVENT n°5 F52 351Dh EVENT n°30 F52 3536h EVENT n°55 F52

3505h EVENT n°6 F52 351Eh EVENT n°31 F52 3537h EVENT n°56 F52

3506h EVENT n°7 F52 351Fh EVENT n°32 F52 3538h EVENT n°57 F52


3508h EVENT n°9 F52 3521h EVENT n°34 F52 353Ah EVENT n°59 F52

3509h EVENT n°10 F52 3522h EVENT n°35 F52 353Bh EVENT n°60 F52

350Ah EVENT n°11 F52 3523h EVENT n°36 F52 353Ch EVENT n°61 F52

350Bh EVENT n°12 F52 3524h EVENT n°37 F52 353Dh EVENT n°62 F52

350Ch EVENT n°13 F52 3525h EVENT n°38 F52 353Eh EVENT n°63 F52

350Dh EVENT n°14 F52 3526h EVENT n°39 F52 353Fh EVENT n°64 F52

350Eh EVENT n°15 F52 3527h EVENT n°40 F52 3540h EVENT n°65 F52

350Fh EVENT n°16 F52 3528h EVENT n°41 F52 3541h EVENT n°66 F52


3511h EVENT n°18 F52 352Ah EVENT n°43 F52 3543h EVENT n°68 F52

3512h EVENT n°19 F52 352Bh EVENT n°44 F52 3544h EVENT n°69 F52

3513h EVENT n°20 F52 352Ch EVENT n°45 F52 3545h EVENT n°70 F52

3514h EVENT n°21 F52 352Dh EVENT n°46 F52 3546h EVENT n°71 F52

3515h EVENT n°22 F52 352Eh EVENT n°47 F52 3547h EVENT n°72 F52

3516h EVENT n°23 F52 352Fh EVENT n°48 F52 3548h EVENT n°73 F52


3518h EVENT n°25 F52 3531h EVENT n°50 F52 354Ah EVENT n°75 F52


1.8.15 Page 36h : Data of the oldest event

Access in reading.


3600h Data of the oldest event F52

1.8.16 Page 37h : Fault value record data

Access in reading.


3700h Data of the fault value record n°1 F53





1.8.17 Pages 38h à 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its channel

Access in reading.

Address Disturbance record number Channel Format

3800h 1 I A (phase A current) F54

3801h 1 I B (phase B current) F54

3802h 1 I C (phase C current) F54

3803h 1 I N (neutral current) F54

3804h 1 Frequency F54

3805h 1 Logic inputs and logic outputs F54

3900h 2 I A (phase A current) F54

3901h 2 I B (phase B current) F54

3902h 2 I C (phase C current) F54

3903h 2 I N (neutral current) F54

3904h 2 Frequency F54

3905h 2 Logic inputs and logic outputs F54

3A00h 3 I A (phase A current) F54

3A01h 3 I B (phase B current) F54

3A02h 3 I C (phase C current) F54

3A03h 3 I N (neutral current) F54

3A04h 3 Frequency F54

3A05h 3 Logic inputs and logic outputs F54

3B00h 4 I A (phase A current) F54

3B01h 4 I B (phase B current) F54

3B02h 4 I C (phase C current) F54

3B03h 4 I N (neutral current) F54

3B04h 4 Frequency F54

3B05h 4 Logic inputs and logic outputs F54


Address Disturbance record number Channel Format

3C00h 5 I A (phase A current) F54

3C01h 5 I B (phase B current) F54

3C02h 5 I C (phase C current) F54

3C03h 5 I N (neutral current) F54

3C04h 5 Frequency F54

3C05h 5 Logic inputs and logic outputs F54

1.8.18 Page 3Dh : Number of available disturbance records

Access in reading.


3D00h Number of available disturbance records F55

1.8.19 Page 3Eh : Data of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record

Access in reading.


3E00h Data of the oldest fault value record F53

1.9 Description of the mapping format

CODE DESCRIPTION

F1 unsigned integer numerical data 1 65535

F2 signed integer numerical data 32768 to +32767

F3 unsigned Long integer numerical data 0 to 4294967925

F4 Unsigned integer RTD/thermistor monitoring function status Bit 0 : t RTD1 ALARM signal or Thermist1 signal Bit 1 : t RTD1 TRIP signal or Thermist2 signal Bit 2 : t RTD2 ALARM signal Bit 3 : t RTD2 TRIP signal Bit 4 : t RTD3 ALARM signal Bit 5 : t RTD3 TRIP signal Bit 6 : t RTD4 ALARM signal Bit 7 : t RTD4 TRIP signal Bit 8 : t RTD5 ALARM signal Bit 9 : t RTD5 TRIP signal Bit 10 : t RTD6 ALARM signal Bit 11 : t RTD6 TRIP signal Bits 13 to 15 : reserved

F5 Unsigned integer : Motor start-up detection criterion Bit 0 : Closing of the CB (52A) Bit 1 : Closing of the CB and overshoot of the Istart current threshold (52A + Istart)


CODE DESCRIPTION

F6 Unsigned long : Trip output relay assignment (relay n°1) bit 0 : tI>> bit 1 : tI0> Bit 2 : tI0>> Bit 3 : tI2> Bit 4 : tI< (loss of load) Bit 5 : THERM OVERLOAD (Thermal overload) Bit 6 : EXCES LONG START (Excessive long start) Bit 7 : t Istall (Stalled rotor whilst running) Bit 8 : LOCKED ROTOR (locked rotor at start) Bit 9 : t RTD1 TRIP or Thermist1 Bit 10 : t RTD2 TRIP or Thermist2 Bit 11 : t RTD3 TRIP Bit 12 : t RTD4 TRIP Bit 13 : t RTD5 TRIP Bit 14 : t RTD6 TRIP

F6 Bit 0 : t I2>> Bit 1 : EXT 1> Bit 2 : EXT 2> Bit 3 : Equation A (« AND » logical gate A) Bit 4 : Equation B (« AND » logical gate B) Bit 5 : Equation C (« AND » logical gate C) Bit 6 : Equation D (« AND » logical gate D)

F7 Unsigned integer : Data transmitted on the analogue output 0 : IA RMS 1 : IB RMS 2 : IC RMS 3 : IN RMS 4 : THERM ST (thermal state) 5 : % I LOAD (load in % of full load current) 6 : Tbef Start (time before a permitted start) 7 : Tbef Trip (time before a thermal trip) 8 : T°C RTD1 9 : T°C RTD2 10 : T°C RTD3 11 : T°C RTD4 12 : T°C RTD5 13 : T°C RTD6

F8 Unsigned integer : Latching of the trip output relay (relay n°1) Bit 0 : tI>> Bit 1 : tI0>> Bit 2 : tI2>> Bit 3 : Equation A Bit 4 : Equation B Bit 5 : Equation C Bit 6 : Equation D Bits 7 to 15 : reserved

F9 Unsigned integer : Remote order Bit 0 : Remote delocking of the trip output relay (relay n°1) Bit 1 : Remote alarm acknowledgement Bit 2 : Remote TRIP ORDER Bit 3 : Remote CLOSE ORDER Bit 4 : Remote EMERGENCY START Bit 5 : Remote order to change of active setting group Bit 6 : Remote ORDER 1 Bit 7 : Remote ORDER 2 Bit 8 : Remote trigging of disturbance record Bit 9 : Remote maintenance mode enabling order Bit 10 : Remote maintenance mode disabling order Bit 11 : Reserved Bit 12 : Non automatic event/fault record acknowledgement on record retrieval Bit 13 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged event record Bit 14 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record Bit 15 : Remote acknowledgement of the « RAM memory error » alarm


CODE DESCRIPTION

F10 ASCII characters 32 127 = ASCII character1 32 127 = ASCII character 2

F11 Unsigned integer : reserved

F12 Unsigned integer : Logic inputs status Bit 0 : Logic input 1 (CB/contactor status : 52a) Bit 1 : Logic input 2 (speed switch input) Bit 2 : Logic input 3 Bit 3 : Logic input 4 Bit 4 : Logic input 5

F13 Unsigned integer : Output relays status Bit 0 : Output relay 1 (trip output relay) Bit 1 : Output relay 2 Bit 2 : Output relay 3 Bit 3 : Output relay 4 Bit 4 : Output relay 5 Bit 5 : Watchdog relay

F14 Unsigned integer : Auxiliary output relays allocation Bit 0 : Allocation to relay 2 Bit 1 : Allocation to relay 3 Bit 2 : Allocation to relay 4 Bit 3 : Allocation to relay 5 Bits 4 to 15 : reserved

F14 Unsigned integer : « AND » logical gates allocation Bit 0 : Allocation to equation A Bit 1 : Allocation to equation B Bit 2 : Allocation to equation C Bit 3 : Allocation to equation D Bits 4 to 15 : reserved

F15 Unsigned integer :Logic inputs allocation. Bit 0 : EMERG ST (emergency start) Bit 1 : SET GROUP (change from one protection setting group to another) Bit 2 : VOLT. DIP (voltage dip re acceleration authorisation) Bit 3 : DIST TRIG (trigging of a disturbance recording) Bit 4 : EXT RESET (external reset) Bit 5 : EXT 1 (auxiliary 1 timer) Bit 6 : EXT 2 (auxiliary 2 timer) Bit 7 : EXT 3 (auxiliary 3 timer) Bit 8 : EXT 4 (auxiliary 4 timer) Bits 9 to 15 : reserved

F16 Unsigned integer : Earth fault and unbalance protection information Bits 0 to 4: reserved Bit 5 : Instantaneous signal (I0> or I0>>) bit 6 : Time delayed signal (tI0> or tI0>> or tI2> or tI2>>) Bits 7 to 15 : reserved

F17 Unsigned integer : Short-circuit and loss of load protection information Bit 0 : reserved Bit 1 : Phase A signal , overshoot of the I>> threshold Bit 2 : Phase B signal, overshoot of the I>> threshold Bit 3 : Phase C signal, overshoot of the I>> threshold Bit 4 : reserved Bit 5 : Instantaneous signal I>> Bit 6 : Time delayed signal tI>> or tI< Bits 7 à 15 : reserved

F18 Unsigned integer : Analogue output type 0 : 4-20 mA 1 : 0-20 mA


CODE DESCRIPTION

F19 Unsigned long : LED allocation Bit 0 : θ ALARM (thermal alarm) Bit 1 : THERM OVERLOAD (thermal overload) Bit 2 : tI0> Bit 3 : tI0>> Bit 4 : t I >> Bit 5 : tI2> Bit 6 : tI2>> Bit 7 : tI< Bit 8 : EXCES LONG START Bit 9 : t Istall (stalled rotor whilst running) Bit 10 : LOCKED ROTOR (at start) Bit 11 : EMERG RESTART (emergency restart) Bit 12 : FORBIDDEN START Bit 13 : t RTD1,2,3 ALARM Bit 14 : t RTD1,2,3 TRIP Bit 15 : t RTD4 ,5 ,6 ALARM Bit 16 : t RTD4 ,5 ,6 TRIP Bit 17 : Thermist1, 2 Bit 18 : EXT 1 Bit 19 : EXT 2 Bit 20 : MOTOR STOPPED Bit 21 : MOTOR RUNNING Bit 22 : SUCCESSFUL START Bit 23 to 31 : reserved

F20 Unsigned integer : Status of the information assigned to the logic inputs Bit 0 : Emergency start Bit 1 : Change from one protection setting group to another Bit 2 : Voltage dip Bit 3 : CB/Contactor status (52a interlock) : open = 0 close = 1 Bit 4 : Trigging of a disturbance recording Bit 5 : Speed switch signal Bit 6 : External reset Bit 7 : Auxiliary timer EXT 1 Bit 8 : Auxiliary timer EXT 2 Bit 9 : Auxiliary timer EXT 3 Bit 10 : Auxiliary timer EXT 4 Bits 11 to 15 : reserved

F21 Unsigned integer : Software version most significant digit : software version number lost significant digit : software version letter 10 : 1.A version 11 : 1.B version 20 : 2.A version 32 : 3.C version 41 : 4.B version

F22 Unsigned integer : Internal logics Bit 0 : Trip output relay latched (relay n°1) Bit 1 : reserved

F23 Unsigned integer : Quick reading byte Bit 0 : General MiCOM relay status Bit 1 : Minor relay failure Bit 2 : Presence of a non-acknowledged event record Bit 3 : Clock synchronisation status Bit 4 : Presence of a non-acknowledged disturbance record Bit 5 : Presence of a non-acknowledged fault record Bit 6 to 15 : reserved

F24 0 : Function in service 1 : Function out of service

F25 2 : ASCII characters


CODE DESCRIPTION

F26 Default displayed value 1 : IA RMS 2 : IB RMS 3 : IC RMS 4 : I0 RMS 5 : THERM ST (Thermal state) 6 : % I LOAD (load in % of full load current)

F27 Reserved F28 Unsigned integer : Baudrate

0 : 300 1 : 600 2 : 1200 3 : 2400 4 : 4800 5 : 9600 6 : 19200 7 : 38400

F29 Unsigned integer : parity 0 : Without 1 : Even 2 : Odd

F30 Unsigned integer : Data bits 0 : 7 data bits 1 : 8 data bits

F31 Unsigned integer : Stop bit 0 : 1 stop bit 1 : 2 stop bits

F32 Unsigned integer : Thermistor type 0 : PTC 1 : NTC

F33 Unsigned integer : Thermal image information Bit 0 : θ ALARM signal (thermal alarm) Bit 1 : THERM OV. signal (thermal overload) Bit 2: θ FORBID START signal (prohibited start due to thermal criteria) Bits 3 to 15 : reserved

F34 Unsigned integer : Start sequence and stalled/locked rotor information Bit 0 : Start sequence in progress signal Bit 1 : Successful start signal Bit 2 : Excessive long start signal Bit 3 : Stalled rotor whilst running signal Bit 4 : Locked rotor at start signal Bit 5 : Overshoot of the permitted cold starts number signal Bit 6 : Overshoot of the permitted hot starts number signal Bit 7 : Limitation of the starts number signal Bit 8 : Minimum time between two starts signal Bit 9 : Prohibiting start signal Bit 10 : Reserved Bit 11 : Re-acceleration phase in progress signal Bit 12 : Reserved Bit 13 : Overshoot of the Istall threshold signal Bit 14 : Motor running signal Bit 15 : Reserved

F35 Reserved

F36 Unsigned integer : EXT1EXT4 timers and « AND » logical gates information Bit 0 : EXT1 timer signal Bit 1 : EXT2 timer signal Bit 2 : Equation A signal Bit 3 : Equation B signal Bit 4 : Equation C signal Bit 5 : Equation D signal Bit 6 : reserved Bit 7 : EXT3 timer signal Bit 8 : EXT4 timer signal Bits 9 to 15 : reserved


CODE DESCRIPTION

F37 Reserved

F38 Reserved

F39 Unsigned integer : Displayed fault record number 0 : reserved 1 : Fault record n°1 2 : Fault record n°2 3 : Fault record n°3 4 : Fault record n°4 5 : Fault record n°5

F40 Disturbance record trigging criterion 0 : ON INST : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, I0> or I0>>) 1 : ON TRIP : Relay n°1 operation (trip output relay operation)

F41 Display alarm message Bit 0 a : TH OVERLOAD (thermal overload) Bit 1 a : tIo> Bit 2 a : tIo>> Bit 3 a : tIi> Bit 4 a : tIi>> Bit 5 a : LONG START tIstart Bit 6 a : MECHAN JAM tIstall (whilst running) Bit 7 a : LOCKED ROTOR (at start) Bit 8 a : t RTD 1 TRIP Bit 9 a : t RTD 2 TRIP Bit 10 a : t RTD 3 TRIP Bit 11 a : t RTD 4 TRIP Bit 12 a : t RTD 5 TRIP Bit 13 a : t RTD 6 TRIP Bit 14 a : Thermist 1 Bit 15 a : Thermist 2

F41 Bit 0 b : EXT 1 Bit 1 b : EXT 2 Bit 2 b : EQUATION A Bit 3 b : EQUATION B Bit 4 b : EQUATION C Bit 5 b : EQUATION D Bit 6 b : θ ALARM (thermal alarm) Bit 7 b : t RTD 1 ALARM or START Bit 8 b : t RTD 2 ALARM or START Bit 9 b : t RTD 3 ALARM or START Bit 10 b : t RTD 4 ALARM or START Bit 11 b : t RTD 5 ALARM or START Bit 12 b : t RTD 6 ALARM or START Bit 13 b : θ FORBIDDEN START Bit 14 b : START NB LIMIT Bit 15 b : T between 2 start

F41 Bit 0 c : RE-ACCELER AUTHOR Bit 1 c : OPERATING TIME SW (CB operating time) Bit 2 c : OPERTION NB SW (CB operating time) Bit 3 c : SA2n (Σ Ampsn cut by CB)

F42 RTD type 0 : Pt100 type 1 : Ni 120 type 2 : Ni 100 type 3 : Cu 10 type

F43 Circuit breaker monitoring flag Bit 0 : CB operating time signal Bit 1 : CB operation number signal Bit 2 : Σ Ampsn cut by CB signal

F44 Reserved


CODE DESCRIPTION

F45 RDT status Bit 0 : RTD1 failure or thermistance 1 failure Bit 1 : RTD2 failure or thermistance 2 failure Bit 2 : RTD3 failure Bit 3 : RTD4 failure Bit 4 : RTD5 failure Bit 5 : RTD6 failure Bit 6 : RTD board error

F46 Unsigned integer : Status of the MiCOM relay selftest Bit 0 : Analogue output error Bit 1 : Communication error Bit 2 : EEPROM memory error Bit 3 : Analogue signals acquisition error Bit 4 : Internal clock error Bit 5 : EEPROM calibration error Bit 6 : RAM memory error Bit 7 : RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open circuit) Bit 8 to 15 : reserved

F47 Reserved

F48 Reserved

F49 Reserved

F50 1st word : Disturbance record number 2nd word : Disturbance recording end time (sec)..lsb (low significant bit) 3rd word : Disturbance recording end time (sec)..msb (most significant bit) 4th word : Disturbance recording end time (ms)..lsb (low significant bit) 5th word : Disturbance recording end time (ms)..msb (most significant bit) 6th word :Cause of the disturbance record trigging 1 : Relay n°1 operation 2 : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, Io> or Io>>) 3 : Remote trig 4 : Trig order received through a logic input 7th word : Frequency

F51 1st word : Number of available current values of the start-up current form record 2nd word : Address of the last page containing significant record data 3rd word : Word number contained in the last page (containing significant record data)

F52 1st word : event type : Refer to format F56 2nd word : associated value type : Refer to format F56 3rd word : mapping address of the associated value 4th word : reserved 5th word : event occurrence date (second) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994lsb 6th word : event occurrence date (second) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994..msb 7th word : event occurrence date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit) 8th word : event occurrence date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit) 9th word: acknowledgement : (0 = non acknowledged event ; 1 = acknowledged event)

F53 1st word : Fault record number 2nd word : Fault date (sec) : second number since 01/01/1994.lsb (low significant bit) 3rd word : Fault date (sec) : second number since 01/01/1994.msb (most significant bit) 4th word : Fault date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit) 5th word : Fault date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit) 6th word : Fault date (season) : (0 = winter,1 = summer, 2 = non defined) 7th word : Active setting group while the fault occurrence : (1 or 2) 8th word :Faulty phase : ( 0 =none, 1 = phase A, 2 = phase B, 3 = phase C, 4 = phases A-B, 5 = phases AC, 6 = phases B-C, 7 = phases A-B-C, 8 = earth) 9th word : Cause of the fault record : refer to format F57 10th word : Fault value magnitude (fundamental value) : refer to format F59 11th word : Phase A current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59 12th word : Phase B current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59 13th word : Phase C current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59 14th word : Earth current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59 15th word : Acknowledgement : (0 = non acknowledged fault record; 1 = acknowledged fault record)


CODE DESCRIPTION

F54 1st word : Samples number containing in the mapping 2nd word : Pre-time sample number 3rd word : Post-time sample number 4th word : Primary phase CT value 5th word : Secondary phase CT value 6th word : Primary earth CT value 7th word : Secondary earth CT value 8th word : Ratio of the internal phase CT 9th word : Ratio of the internal earth CT 10th word : Address of the last page containing samples 11th word : Word number contained in the last page (containing samples)

F55 1st word : Number of disturbance record available 2nd word : Oldest disturbance record number 3rd word : Oldest disturbance record date (sec) ..lsb (low significant bit) 4th word : Oldest disturbance record date (sec) ..msb (most significant bit) 5th word : Oldest disturbance record date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit) 6th word : Oldest disturbance record date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit) 7th word : Cause of the oldest disturbance record : 1 : Relay n°1 operation 2 : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, Io> or Io>>) 3 : Remote trig 4 : Trig order received through a logic input 8th word : Acknowledgement 9th word : Previous disturbance record number 10th word : Previous disturbance record date (sec) ..lsb (low significant bit) 11th word : Previous disturbance record date (sec) ..msb (most significant bit) 12th word : Previous disturbance record date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit) 13th word : Previous disturbance record date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit) 14th word : Cause of the previous disturbance record : 1 : Relay n°1 operation 2 : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, Io> or Io>>) 3 : Remote trig 4 : Trig order received through a logic input 15th word : Acknowledgement and so on regarding the other disturbance records.


Code Event type Associated value type

F56 00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

"No EVENT"

"REMOTE CLOSING"

"REMOTE TRIPPING"

«DISTURBANCE RECORD TRIGGING»

«SETTING CHANGE»

"I >>" (instantaneous signal)

"I0 >" (instantaneous signal)

"I0 >>" (instantaneous signal)

"I2 >" (instantaneous signal)

"I2 >>" (instantaneous signal)

"I <" (instantaneous signal)

"THERMAL ALARM"

"t RTD1 ALARM"

"t RTD2 ALARM"

"t RTD3 ALARM"

"t RTD4 ALARM"

"t RTD5 ALARM"

"t RTD6 ALARM"

"THERMAL OVERLOAD"

"FORBIDDEN START"

"t I >>" (time delayed signal)

"t I0 >" (time delayed signal)

"t I0 >>" (time delayed signal)

"t I2 >" (time delayed signal)

"t I2 >>" (time delayed signal)

"t I <" (time delayed signal)

"REACCELERATION IN PROGRESS"

"EMERGENCY START"

"START-UP DETECTION"

"MOTOR HALTED"

"EXCESSIVE START TIME"

"STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING"

"LOCKED ROTOR AT START"

"START NUMBER LIMITATION"

"MINIMUM TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS"

"EXT 1"

"EXT 2"

"EQUATION A"

"EQUATION B"

"EQUATION C"

"EQUATION D"

-

F9

F9

F9

MODBUS address of the modified value

F17 ↑ ↓

F16 ↑ ↓

F16 ↑ ↓

F16 ↑ ↓

F16 ↑ ↓

F17 ↑ ↓

F33 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F33 ↑ ↓

F33 ↑ ↓

F17 ↑ ↓

F16 ↑ ↓

F16 ↑ ↓

F16 ↑ ↓

F16 ↑ ↓

F17 ↑ ↓

F34 ↑ ↓

F34

F34

F34

F34 ↑ ↓

F34 ↑ ↓

F34 ↑ ↓

F34 ↑ ↓

F34 ↑ ↓

F36 ↑ ↓

F36 ↑ ↓

F36 ↑ ↓

F36 ↑ ↓

F36 ↑ ↓

F36 ↑ ↓



F56 41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

"t RTD1 TRIP"

"t RTD2 TRIP"

"t RTD3 TRIP"

"t RTD4 TRIP"

"t RTD5 TRIP"

"t RTD6 TRIP"

"THERMISTOR 1"

"THERMISTOR 2"

"CB OPERATING TIME ALARM"

"CB OPERATION NUMBER ALARM"

"CB SAn ALARM"

"TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD"

"TRIPPING : t I >>" (time delayed signal)

"TRIPPING : t I0 >" (time delayed signal)

"TRIPPING : t I0 >>" (time delayed signal)

"TRIPPING : t I2 >" (time delayed signal)

"TRIPPING : t I2 >>" (time delayed signal)

"TRIPPING : t I <" (time delayed signal)

"TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE START TIME"

" TRIPPING : STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING"

"TRIPPING : LOCKED ROTOR AT START"

"TRIPPING : EXT 1"

"TRIPPING : EXT 2"

"TRIPPING : EQUATION A"

"TRIPPING : EQUATION B"

"TRIPPING : EQUATION C"

"TRIPPING : EQUATION D"

"TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP"






"TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1"

"TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 2"

"ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM USING KEYPAD"

"ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS USING KEYPAD"

"REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM"

"REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS"

"CHANGE OF THE LOGIC INPUTS STATUS"

"MAJOR RELAY FAILURE»

"MINOR RELAY FAILURE"

F4 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F4 ↑ ↓

F43 ↑ ↓

F43 ↑ ↓

F43 ↑ ↓

F33

F17

F16

F16

F16

F16

F17

F34

F34

F34

F36

F36

F36

F36

F36

F36

F4

F4

F4

F4

F4

F4

F4

F4

-

-

-

-

F12 ↑ ↓

F46 ↑ ↓

F46 ↑ ↓



F56 83

84

85

"CHANGE OF THE LOGIC OUTPUTS STATUS"

"EXT 3"

"EXT 4"

F13 ↑ ↓

F36 ↑ ↓

F36 ↑ ↓

NOTE: - The double arrow ↑↓ means the event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance. - On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 1 ». - On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 0 ».

Code Fault origin

F57 00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

" NO FAULT

" REMOTE TRIPPING"

" TRIPPING : t I >>" (time delayed signal)

" TRIPPING :t I0 >" (time delayed signal)

" TRIPPING :t I0 >>" (time delayed signal)

" TRIPPING :t I2 >" (time delayed signal)

" TRIPPING :t I2 >>" (time delayed signal)

" TRIPPING :t I <" (time delayed signal)

" TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE LONG START "

" TRIPPING :STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING "

" TRIPPING :LOCKED ROTOR AT START "

" TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD "

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

" TRIPPING : EXT 1"

" TRIPPING : EXT 2"

" TRIPPING : EQUATION A"

" TRIPPING : EQUATION B"

" TRIPPING : EQUATION C"

" TRIPPING : EQUATION D"

" TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP "






" TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1"

" TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 2"


Conversion rules for the current values of the disturbance record

F58 * In order to obtain the phase current value at phase CT primary, apply the following formula :

«Primary phase current value (in Amps)» = «Remote value» x «Primary phase CT value» x √2 / 800

* In order to obtain the earth current value at the earth CT primary, apply the following formula :

«Primary earth current value (in Amps)» = «Remote value» x «Primary earth CT value» x √2 / 32700

Conversion rules for the current values of the fault data record

F59 * In order to obtain the phase current value at phase CT primary, apply the following formula :

« Primary phase current value (in Amps) » = « Remote value » x « Primary phase CT value » / 800

* In order to obtain the negative sequence component value of the current at phase CT primary, apply the following formula :

« Primary negative current value (in Amps) » = « Remote value » x « Primary phase CT value » / 800

* In order to obtain the earth current value at the earth CT primary, apply the following formula :

« Primary earth current value (in Amps) » = « Remote value » x « Primary earth CT value » / 32700

Origin of Triggering of the perturbographic recorder

F60 Value1 : Trigger on Trip output relay RL1 information Value 2 : Trigger on instantaneous thresholds Value 3 : Trigger o n (TC) via communication Value 4 : Trigger via a Logic Input Value 5 : No active perturbo.


BLANK PAGE


COURIER DATABASE V4.D


BLANK PAGE


2. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE

The serial communications are transmitted on K-Bus, a multi-drop network proposing an instantaneous interface with IEC 870 - 5 - FT1.2 standards. The language and the communication protocol used are Courier. This concept permits especially to the generic programmes of the principal units to access to a high number of different relay types without need to change permanently the principal unit program for each relay type. The relays forms a distributed database in which the principal workstation proceeds to a selective call of the slave relays in order to know all necessary information.

Courier has a concept for the functions with a selective call system which allows not a slave periphery to communicate directly with the central unit when one shall informs another about a particular event. The slave workstation has to wait that the principal workstation asks for the information. With Courier each information is given into a box with a code of the length and the database type. In knowing the database format the reception periphery can read them.

2.1 K-BUS

K-Bus is a communication system developed for connecting the slave peripheries in remoting on the central unit, permitting them to execute all remote monitoring and remote control functions using the appropriated communication language. K-Bus is not able to permit a direct communication between the slave peripheries. Only a communication between the central unit and the slave peripheries can be established. The principal characteristics of the K-Bus are his profitability, his high security level, his installation facility and his user friendliness.

2.1.1 K-Bus transmission layer

The communication port is supported on the reception levels and the voltage transmission RS485 with galvanic isolation assured by a transformer. A selective call protocol is used. No relay unit is allowed to transmit before having received a validation message without any error detection. The transmission is synchronous on a pair of isolated waves. The data are coded FM0 with a clock signal for eliminate all CC-component, allows the signal to cross the transformers.

With the exception of the central units, each network node is passive. No defective unit from the system can interfere with the communications established with the other units. The message format is HDLC. The data transmission speed is 64 kbits/s.

2.1.2 K-Bus connection

The connection on the K-Bus port is realised by screwed terminals of 4 mm of MIDOS standards or by FASTON-connectors. A cabled pair is sufficient to realise the connection, knowing that the polarity is not important. It is recommended to use an external screen earth linked at the end of the principal workstation only. The screen has to be fixed with a M4 screw following the wiring scheme. The functioning of the K-BUS network is guaranteed for 32 units connected on 1000 meters of cables. Thanks to the data code method, the polarity of the Bus cable connection is not important.

N.B. : The K-Bus network has to finish with a 150 ohms resistance on each end of the Bus. The principal workstation can be placed anywhere on the network. This command point has to be unique.


2.1.3 Auxiliary equipment

For communication with the relay it is necessary to have at least one converter case K-Bus/IEC870-5 of the type KITZ and a computer suitable software, an interconnection cable RS232 for connecting the KITZ to the computer and a software conform to the specification of the Courier protocol.

2.2 Relay courier database

The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal values, eg 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the contents of the column.

This data base is given in the APPENDIX 1.

2.3 Setting changes

This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:

Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits

Pre load Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this action.

Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be returned.

Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change.

This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the setting limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands are required for each change.

2.4 Systems integration data

2.4.1 Address of the relay

The relays can have any address between 1 and 254 included. The address 255 corresponds to the global address to which all relays and all the other slave peripheries are responding. The Courier protocol specifies that no response can be resent from a slave periphery to a global message. This permits to avoid that all peripheries respond at the same time creating by this way user conflict on the Bus.

Each relay possess an address settled on 255 in order to guarantee that in case of his connection to the operating network, his address cannot create any conflict with the address of another periphery already in exploitation. In order to permit to a new periphery to get entirely operational, his address has to be settled. The address can be modified manually in capturing the password, than in following the method of the setting change through the user interface on the front plate of the relay.

The same, if the network functioning on a computer takes in charge the auto-addressing, the relay address can be settled on 0 to active the characteristic of auto-addressing of the computer software. The relay receives then the next valid address on the Bus.


If the address is 255 or not known, she can be modified in sending a new address, with a global message, to a periphery possessing a particular serial number. This method is used for those peripheries which are not having any user interface for reading or changing the address in process.

2.4.2 Measured values

Each measured value can be periodically extracted by a selective call of the MiCOM relay.

2.4.3 Status word

Each response of a slave periphery contains an octet of status. This octet is resent by the relay at the beginning of each message for signalling important data. The principal workstation can be design for responding automatically to these important data.

The contained indications are the following :

Bit 0 - 1 = recording of disturbance available for retrieval Bit 1 - 1 = reserved Bit 2 - 1 = reserved Bit 3 - 1 = relay busy, no response possible in time Bit 4 - 1 = reserved Bit 5 - 1 = recording of events available for retrieval Bit 6 - 1 = reserved Bit 7 - 1 = reserved

2.4.4 Control status word

The Control status word is located in the cell of the menu 000D. It is used for transmitting the control information of the slave periphery to the central unit. Nevertheless, the relays described in this manual are protection relays, which are not using this control characteristic.

2.4.5 Logic input status word

The logic control input status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from the cell of menu 0020. The 2 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the status of each of the 2 logic inputs. This cell is accessible only in reading.

Bit 0 : logic input 1: CB/Contactor status (52a interlock) Bit 1 : logic input 2 : speed switch Bit 2 : logic input 3 Bit 3 : logic input 4 Bit 4 : logic input 5

2.4.6 Output relay status word

The output relay status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from the cell of menu 0021. The 8 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the status of each of the 5 output relays. This cell is accessible only in reading.

Bit 0 : relay RL1 (TRIP) Bit 1 : programmable relay RL2 Bit 2 : programmable relay RL3 Bit 3 : programmable relay RL4 Bit 4 : watchdog relay Bit 5 : programmable relay RL5


2.4.7 Control information

The status of internal controls triggered by the auto-control program of the relays can be observed in proceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0022.

The bits 0 to 6 indicate the material controls of the product.

Bit 0 analogue output error Bit 1 communication error Bit 2 EEPROM memory error Bit 3 analogue signals acquisition error Bit 4 internal clock error Bit 5 EEPROM calibration error Bit 6 RAM memory error Bit 7 RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open circuit)

2.4.8 Protection Indication

The protection indications gives the status of different protection elements in the relay. The fault indications are generated with these indications. They are transmitted in the events recordings, in case of a fault recording. This is the only way to access to these indications.

The status of internal protection indication of the relays can be observed in proceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0023, 0024 and 0025.

The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0023:

Bit position Function protection

0 I>> (instantaneous signal)

1 Io> (instantaneous signal)

2 Io>> (instantaneous signal)

3 Ii> (instantaneous signal)

4 Ii>> (instantaneous signal)

5 I< (instantaneous signal)

6 tI>> (time delayed signal)

7 tIo> (time delayed signal)

8 tIo>> (time delayed signal)

9 tIi> (time delayed signal)

10 tIi>> (time delayed signal)

11 tI< (time delayed signal)

12 Thermal alarm

13 Thermal overload

14 Thermal base start-up inhibition (θ forbidden start)

15 Reserved


The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0024:


0 Re-acceleration phase in progress

1 Start-up detection

2 Motor halted

3 Excessive long start

4 Stalled rotor whilst running

5 Locked rotor at start

6 Limitation of the start number (START NB LIMITATION)

7 Minimum time between two starts

8 EXT 1 timer

9 EXT 2 timer

10 Equation A

11 Equation B

12 Equation C

13 Equation D

14 EXT 3 timer

15 EXT 4 timer

The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0025 :


0 CB operating time alarm

1 CB operation number alarm

2 CB SA2n alarm

3 t RTD1 Alarm or thermist 1

4 t RTD2 Alarm or thermist 2

5 t RTD3 Alarm

6 t RTD4 Alarm

7 t RTD5 Alarm

8 t RTD6 Alarm

9 t RTD1 Trip

10 t RTD2 Trip

11 t RTD3 Trip

12 t RTD4 Trip

13 t RTD5 Trip

14 t RTD6 Trip

15 Reserved


2.4.9 Measurement control

The control functions through a MiCOM P220 relay can be executed on a serial link. These functions are supported in particular on the changes of the individual relay settings, on the changes of the setting groups, on the remote control of the circuit breaker, as well as on the functions and the locking of the selected output relays.

The remote control is limited in the control functions selected in the table of the relays menu. The CRC and the controls of the message length are used on each received message. No response is given for messages received with an error detection. The principal unit can be re-initialised in order to resent an order as often as wanted if he is not receiving any response or if he receives a response with an error detection.

N.B. : The control commands are generally materialised by the change of the cell value. They dispose the same inherent security. No response is allowed for the global orders to avoid any user conflict of the Bus. For this type of order, a double start is used for the verification of the message by the relay. The relay transmits then a confirmation indicating that the control order or the change of setting has been accepted. If this is not the case, the relay is sending an error message.

2.4.10 Change of remote measurements

The relay is only responding to the orders of a setting change through the serial port if the SD0 link = 1 is selected. The selection of the SD0 link = 1 is blocking all the changes of remote setting with the exception of the SC logical links and the password capture. When the SD0 link = 0 is selected, the remote setting are protected by the password.

For changing the remote links, the password has to be first remote captured . and the SD and SD0 function links have to be settled on 1.

2.5 Event extraction

Events can be extracted either automatically or manually . For automatic extraction all events are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier mechanism, this includes fault. The manual approach allows the user to select events, faults at random from the stored records.

2.5.1 Automatic event extraction

This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it is produced via the rear port.

When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest, unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command. The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records.

Once an event has been extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as below.


2.5.2 Event types

Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances:

• Change of state of output contact

• Change of state of opto input

• Protection element operation

• Alarm condition

• Setting Change

• Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)

2.5.3 Event format

The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay:

• Cell Reference

• Timestamp

• Cell Text

• Cell Value

APPENDIX 1 contains a table of the events created by the relay and indicates how the contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records will return a Courier Type 3 event which contains the above fields together with two additional fields:

• Event extraction column

• Event number

These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting which allows the fault record to be selected. This setting should be set to the event number value returned within the record, the extended data can be extracted from the relay by uploading the text and data from the column.

2.5.4 Manual record extraction

Column 02 of the database can be used for manual viewing fault records. The contents of this column will depend of the nature of the record selected. It is possible to select directly a fault record.

Fault Record Selection (Row 01) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault record using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records (0 will be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the details of the fault record selected (row 02 to 0A)

It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new fault occurs.


2.6 Disturbance record extraction

The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible via the Courier interface.

Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest un-extracted record, older records will be assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records. To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status byte is set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance records.

Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B.

As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide.


3. LIST OF EVENTS CREATED BY THE RELAY

Code Event type Cell Reference

00 "No EVENT" -

01 "REMOTE CLOSING" 0

02 "REMOTE TRIPPING" 0

03 «DISTURBANCE RECORD TRIGGING» 0

04 «SETTING CHANGE» 0

05 "I >>" (instantaneous signal) 0023

06 "I0 >" (instantaneous signal) 0023

07 "I0 >>" (instantaneous signal) 0023

08 "I2 >" (instantaneous signal) 0023

09 "I2 >>" (instantaneous signal) 0023

10 "I <" (instantaneous signal) 0023

11 "THERMAL ALARM" 0023

12 "t RTD1 ALARM" 0025






18 " THERMAL OVERLOAD" 0023

19 "FORBIDDEN START" 0023

20 "t I >>" (time delayed signal) 0023

21 "t I0 >" (time delayed signal) 0023

22 "t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) 0023

23 "t I2 >" (time delayed signal) 0023

24 "t I2 >>" (time delayed signal) 0023

25 "t I <" (time delayed signal) 0023

26 "REACCELERATION IN PROGRESS" 0024

27 "EMERGENCY START" 0024

28 "START-UP DETECTION" 0024

29 " MOTOR HALTED" 0024

30 "EXCESSIVE START TIME" 0024

31 "STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" 0024

32 "LOCKED ROTOR AT START" 0024

33 "START NUMBER LIMITATION" 0024



34 "MINIMUM TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS" 0024

35 "EXT 1" 0024

36 "EXT 2" 0024

37 "EQUATION A" 0024

38 "EQUATION B" 0024

39 "EQUATION C" 0024

40 "EQUATION D" 0024

41 "t RTD1 TRIP" 0025

42 "t RTD2 TRIP" 0025

43 "t RTD3 TRIP" 0025

44 "t RTD4 TRIP" 0025

45 "t RTD5 TRIP" 0025

46 "t RTD6 TRIP" 0025

47 "THERMISTOR 1" 0025

48 "THERMISTOR 2" 0025

49 "CB OPERATING TIME ALARM" 0025

50 "CB OPERATION NUMBER ALARM" 0025

51 "CB SAn ALARM" 0025

52 "TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD" 0

53 "TRIPPING : t I >>" (time delayed signal) 0

54 "TRIPPING : t I0 >" (time delayed signal) 0

55 "TRIPPING : t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) 0

56 "TRIPPING : t I2 >" (time delayed signal) 0

57 "TRIPPING : t I2 >>" (time delayed signal) 0

58 "TRIPPING : t I <" (time delayed signal) 0

59 "TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE START TIME" 0

60 "TRIPPING : STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" 0

61 "TRIPPING : LOCKED ROTOR AT START" 0

62 "TRIPPING : EXT 1" 0

63 "TRIPPING : EXT 2" 0

64 "TRIPPING : EQUATION A" 0

65 "TRIPPING : EQUATION B" 0

66 "TRIPPING : EQUATION C" 0

67 "TRIPPING : EQUATION D" 0

68 "TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP" 0








74 "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1" 0

75 "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 2" 0

76 "ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM USING KEYPAD" 0

77 "ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS USING KEYPAD" 0

78 "REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM" 0

79 "REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS" 0

80 "CHANGE OF THE LOGIC INPUTS STATUS" 0020

81 "MAJOR RELAY FAILURE" 0022

82 "MINOR RELAY FAILURE" 0022

83 "CHANGE OF THE LOGIC OUTPUTS STATUS" 0021

84 "EXT 3" 0024

85 "EXT 4" 0024

86 "OUTPUT RELAY LATCH" 0021

87 "CHANGE OF CONFIGURATION GROUP" 0

N.B. : - When the cell reference is different of zero this means that the event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance. - When the cell reference is equal to zero, only the event on edging edge is generated. - Sixteen bits are available in the string of characters to describe the contain of the Courier cell: - On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 1 ». - On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 0 ».


4. LIST OF FAULTS CREATED BY THE RELAY

Code Event type

00 "No FAULT"

01 "REMOTE TRIPPING"

02 "t I >>" (time delayed signal)

03 "t I0 >" (time delayed signal)

04 "t I0 >>" (time delayed signal)

05 "t I2 >" (time delayed signal)

06 "t I2 >>" (time delayed signal)

07 "t I <" (time delayed signal)

08 "EXCESSIVE START TIME"

09 "STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING"

10 "LOCKED ROTOR AT START"

11 THERMAL OVERLOAD"

12 "EXT 1"

13 "EXT 2"

14 "EQUATION A"

15 "EQUATION B"

16 "EQUATION C"

17 "EQUATION D"

18 "t RTD1 TRIP"

19 "t RTD2 TRIP"

20 "t RTD3 TRIP"

21 "t RTD4 TRIP"

22 "t RTD5 TRIP"

23 "t RTD6 TRIP"

24 "THERMISTOR 1"

25 "THERMISTOR 2"

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

61/

94

5.

CO

URIE

R D

ATA

BASE

S

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

00

00

SYST

EM D

ATA

0

01

La

ngua

ge

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

02

SYS

Pass

wor

d AS

CII

Pass

wor

d(4

byte

s)

AA

AA

Se

tting

65

/90/

1 0

03

Fn

links

: NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

04

SY

S D

escr

iptio

n AS

CII

Text

(16

byte

s)

Smm

p

Se

tting

32

/127

/1

1

05

SYS

Plan

t Ref

. AS

CII

Text

(4 b

ytes

)

AL

ST

Setti

ng

65/9

0/1

1

06

SYS

Mod

el N

o.

ASC

II Te

xt (6

byt

es)

P220

D

ata

07

SY

S Fi

rmw

are

No.

N

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TE

08

SY

S Se

rial N

o.

ASC

II Te

xt (7

byt

es)

0000

00

Dat

a

09

SYS

Freq

uenc

y U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

XXXX

Hz

Se

tting

50

/60/

10

1

0A

SYS

Com

ms

Leve

l U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

1

Dat

a

0B

SYS

Rly

Addr

ess

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

25

5 *

Se

tting

0/

255/

1 1

0C

Pl

ant S

tatu

s W

ord:

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

0D

C

ontro

l Sta

tus

Wor

d: N

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TE

0E

SYS

Setti

ng G

rp

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r

1*

D

ata

1

0F

Lo

ad s

hed

Stag

e: N

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TE

11

SYS

Softw

are

Ref

ASC

II Te

xt (1

6 ch

arac

ters

)

V X.

A

Dat

a

1

12-1

F U

nuse

d, re

serv

ed

20

SYS

Logi

c St

at

Bina

ry fl

ag (5

bits

)

0: lo

g in

put 1

= O

/O

1: lo

g in

put 2

= s

peed

2:

log

inpu

t 3

3: lo

g in

put 4

4:

log

inpu

t 5

D

ata

1

21

SY

S Re

lay

Stat

Bi

nary

flag

(5 b

its)

re

lay

1 (tr

ip)

1:

rel

ay 2

2:

rel

ay 3

3:

rel

ay 4

4:

rel

ay w

atch

-dog

D

ata

1

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

62/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

22

SY

S Al

arm

s Bi

nary

flag

(8 b

its)

0:

Ana

out

put e

rr

1: C

omm

err

2: E

epro

m e

rr d

ata

3: C

t err

or

4: C

lock

err

or

5: E

epro

m e

rr c

alib

6:

Ram

err

or

7: R

TD/t

herm

err

D

ata

1

23

SY

S Ps

eudo

-TS

grou

p 1

Stat

Bi

nary

flag

(15

bits

)

I>>

1: Ie

>

2: Ie

>>

3:

Ii>

4:

Ii>

>

5 : I

<

6: tI

>>

7:

tIe>

8:

tIe>

>

9: tI

i>

10: t

Ii>>

11

: tI<

12

: Th

erm

al A

larm

13

: Th

erm

al O

verlo

ad

14 :

Ther

mal

forb

id S

tart

D

ata

1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

63/

94

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

24

SY

S Ps

eudo

-TS

grou

p 2

Stat

Bi

nary

flag

(16

bits

)

0: R

eacc

eler

atio

n 1:

Sta

rt D

etec

t 2:

Mot

or S

topp

ed

3: S

tart

too

long

4:

Sta

lled

Roto

r 5:

Loc

ked

Roto

r 6:

Sta

rt nb

lim

it 7:

Tim

e be

twee

n 2

Star

ts8:

Ext

. 1

9: E

xt. 2

10

: Equ

atio

n 1

11: E

quat

ion

2 12

: Equ

atio

n 3

13: E

quat

ion

4 14

: Ext

. 3

15: E

xt. 4

D

ata

1

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

64/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

25

SY

S Ps

eudo

-TS

grou

p 3

Stat

Bi

nary

flag

(3 o

r 15

bits

)

0: S

W o

pera

ting

Tim

e 1:

SW

ope

ratin

g nb

2:

SA

2n

3: R

TD1

Alar

m (i

f opt

ion

RTD

) 3:

The

rmis

tor

1 (if

op

tion

Ther

mis

tors

) 4:

RTD

2 Al

arm

(if o

ptio

n RT

D)

4: T

herm

isto

r 2

(if

optio

n Th

erm

isto

rs )

5: R

TD3

Alar

m (o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

rs)

6: R

TD4

Alar

m (o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

rs)

7: R

TD5

Alar

m (o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

rs)

8: R

TD6

Alar

m (o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

rs)

9: R

TD1

Trip

(opt

ion

RTD

) 10

: RTD

2 Tr

ip (o

ptio

n RT

D)

11: R

TD3

Trip

(opt

ion

RTD

or

Ther

mis

tors

) 12

: RTD

4 Tr

ip (o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

rs)

13: R

TD5

Trip

( opt

ion

RTD

or

Ther

mis

tors

) 14

: RTD

6 Tr

ip (o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

rs)

D

ata

1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

65/

94

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

01

00

USE

R C

ON

TRO

L

01

U

SR R

emot

e C

ontro

l Bi

nary

flag

(11

bits

)

0: U

nlck

Trip

Con

t. 1:

Ack

all

alar

ms

2: T

rip

3: C

lose

4: E

mer

genc

y st

art

5: C

onfig

cha

nge

6: O

rder

1

7:

Ord

er 2

8:

Dis

t. tri

g

9: S

tart

mai

nten

ance

10

: End

mai

nten

ance

Se

tting

0/

2047

/1

1

02

00

FAU

LT R

ECO

RDS

01

Reco

rd n

umbe

r U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

5*

Se

tting

1/

5/1

1

02

Occ

ur fa

ult d

ate

IEC

DAT

E

Dat

a

1

03

Activ

e se

t gro

up

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1

D

ata

1

04

Ph

ase

in fa

ult

ASC

II Te

xt (1

4 by

tes)

PH

ASE

A

D

ata

1

05

Ph

ase

dete

cted

by

ASC

II Te

xt (1

4 by

tes)

I

>>

D

ata

1

06

M

agni

tude

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

12

.34

A

Dat

a

1

07

Ia

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

D

ata

1

08

Ib

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

D

ata

1

09

Ic

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

D

ata

1

0A

In

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

D

ata

1

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

66/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

03

00

MEA

SURE

MEN

TS

01

Ia R

MS

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

D

ata

1

02

Ib

RM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

12

.34

A

Dat

a

1

03

Ic

RM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

12

.34

A

Dat

a

1

04

IN

RM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

12

.34

A

Dat

a

1

05

I1

pos

itive

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

12

.34

A

Dat

a

1

06

I2

neg

ativ

e C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

12

.34

A

Dat

a

1

07

I0

zer

o C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

12

.34

A

Dat

a

1

08

Fr

eque

ncy

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 H

z

Dat

a

1

09

M

ax P

h cu

rren

t C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

12

.34

A

Dat

a

1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

67/

94

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

04

00

STA

TIST

ICS

01

Tota

l trip

num

ber

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

xx

xx

D

ata

1

02

O

pera

tor

trip

num

ber

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

xx

xx

D

ata

1

03

Th

erm

trip

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

04

tI>>

trip

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

05

tI0>

; tI0

>>

trip

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

06

tIi>

; tIi>

> tr

ip

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

xx

xx

D

ata

1

07

tIs

tart

trip

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

xx

xx

D

ata

1

08

tIs

tall

trip

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

xx

xx

D

ata

1

09

Lo

cked

rot

or tr

ip

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

xx

xx

D

ata

1

0A

I<

trip

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

0B

RTD

1 tri

p

(if o

ptio

n RT

D)

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

xx

xx

D

ata

1

0C

RT

D2

trip

(if

opt

ion

RTD

) U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

0D

RTD

3 tri

p

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r The

rmis

tor)

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

0E

RTD

4 tri

p

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r The

rmis

tor)

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

0F

RTD

5 tri

p

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r The

rmis

tor)

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

10

RTD

6 tri

p

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r The

rmis

tor)

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

11

Ther

mis

tor

1 tri

p (

if op

tion

Ther

mis

tor)

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

12

Ther

mis

tor

2 tri

p (

if op

tion

Ther

mis

tor)

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

13

Equa

tion

A tri

p U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

14

Equa

tion

B tri

p U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

15

Equa

tion

C tr

ip

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

xx

xx

D

ata

1

16

Eq

uatio

n D

trip

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxxx

Dat

a

1

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

68/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

05

00

PRO

CES

S

01

I F

LC P

er C

ent

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

xxx

%

D

ata

1

02

Th

erm

al s

tate

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

xx

x %

Dat

a

1

03

Ti

me

befo

re T

H tr

ip

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

xx

x s

D

ata

1

04

Te

mpe

ratu

re R

TD1

(if o

ptio

n RT

D)

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

xxx

°C

D

ata

1

05

Te

mpe

ratu

re R

TD2

(if o

ptio

n RT

D)

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

xxx

°C

D

ata

1

06

Te

mpe

ratu

re R

TD3

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

xxx

°C

D

ata

1

07

Te

mpe

ratu

re R

TD4

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r))

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

xxx

°C

D

ata

1

08

Te

mpe

ratu

re R

TD5

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

xxx

°C

D

ata

1

09

Te

mpe

ratu

re R

TD6

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

xxx

°C

D

ata

1

0A

Te

mpe

ratu

re R

1 (if

opt

ion

Ther

mis

tor)

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

xx

k O

hm

D

ata

1

0B

Te

mpe

ratu

re R

2 (if

opt

ion

Ther

mis

tor)

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

xx

k O

hm

D

ata

1

0C

Pe

rmit

star

t num

ber

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

xx

x

Dat

a

1

0D

Tim

e be

fore

sta

rt U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxx

s

Dat

a

1

0E

Last

sta

rt I

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

xxx

A

Dat

a

1

0F

La

st s

tart

time

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

xx

x s

D

ata

1

10

M

otor

sta

rt nu

mbe

r U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxx

Dat

a

1

11

Emer

genc

y st

art n

umbe

r U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

xxx

Dat

a

1

12

Mot

or o

pera

t hou

rs

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

xx

x h

D

ata

1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

69/

94

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

06

00

SW M

ON

ITO

RIN

G

01

SA2

IA

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

Dat

a

1

02

SA

2 IB

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

1

03

SA

2 IC

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

1

04

SW

ope

ratio

n nb

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

Dat

a

1

05

SW o

pera

tion

time

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0

s

Dat

a

1

08

00

TIM

E:

01

Dat

e/Ti

me

IEC

870

Tim

e &

Dat

e

Dat

a

1 0D

00

C

ON

FIG

. SEL

ECT

01

Star

t det

ectio

n In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 O

/O *

O

/O +

I

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

02

Th

erm

isto

r 1

type

(if

opt

ion

Ther

mis

tor)

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 PT

C *

N

TC

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

03

Th

erm

isto

r 2

type

(if

opt

ion

Ther

mis

tor)

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 PT

C *

N

TC

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

04

RT

D ty

pe

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1 2 3

PT10

0 N

i 120

N

i 100

C

u 10

Se

tting

0/

3/1

1

05

An

alog

out

put t

ype

( if o

ptio

n RT

D, o

r The

rmis

tor,

or A

nalo

g ou

tput

)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

4 -

20 m

A 0

- 20

mA

Se

tting

0/

1 1

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

70/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

06

Tr

ansm

itted

sig

nal o

n An

alog

out

put

( if o

ptio

n RT

D, o

r The

rmis

tor,

or A

nalo

g ou

tput

)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Ia

Ib

Ic

I0

Th S

tate

%

load

Ti

me

befo

re A

utho

rized

St

art

Tim

e be

fore

The

rmal

Tr

ip

Se

tting

0/

6 1

0E

00

CT

RATI

O

01

CFG

Prim

Ph

CT

Ratio

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

1000

*

Se

tting

1/

3000

/1

1

02

CFG

Sec

Ph

CT

Ratio

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

1 *

Se

tting

1/

5/4

1

03

CFG

Prim

E C

T Ra

tio

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

10

00 *

Setti

ng

1/30

00/1

1

04

C

FG S

ec E

CT

Ratio

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

1 *

Se

tting

1/

5/4

1

0F

00

SE

TTIN

G G

ROU

PS

01

Sele

ct s

ettin

g gr

oup

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r

1*

Se

tting

1/

2/1

1

02

Gro

up 1

vis

ible

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 YE

S N

O

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

03

G

roup

2 v

isib

le

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

YES

NO

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

Prot

ectio

n gr

oup

n° 1

: v

isib

le if

0F

02=

1

20

00

[49]

TH

ERM

AL

OV

ERLO

AD

0F01

=1

01

Ther

mal

ove

rload

func

tion?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

02

Ther

mal

Inhi

bitio

n?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

03

I θ

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.2

In

Se

tting

0.

2/1.

5/0.

01

1

04

Ke

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

3*

Se

tting

0/

10/1

1

05

Te

1 U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

1* m

in

Se

tting

1/

64/1

1

06

Te

2 C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

5* T

e1

Se

tting

0.

5/2.

0/0.

1 1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

71/

94

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

07

Tr

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

1.

0 *T

e1

Se

tting

1.

0/20

.0/0

.5

1

08

RT

D1

Influ

ence

? (if

opt

ion

RTD

) RT

D3

Influ

ence

? (if

opt

ion

Ther

mis

tor)

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 N

o /

Yes

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

09

θ

Alar

m?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

0A

θ

Alar

m

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

20*

%

2009

=1

Setti

ng

20/1

00/1

1

0B

θ

Forb

id s

tart?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

0C

θ Fo

rbid

sta

rt C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

20

* %

20

0B=

1 Se

tting

20

/100

/1

1

21

00

[50/

51]

SHO

RT-C

IRC

UIT

0F01

=1

01

I>>

func

tion?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

02

I>>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

10 In

*

Se

tting

1.

0/12

/0.0

1 1

03

t I

>>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

00*

s

Setti

ng

0.0/

100/

0.01

1

22

00

[50N

/51N

] EA

RTH

FA

ULT

0F01

=1

01

Ie>

func

tion?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

02

Ie>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

002

Ien*

Setti

ng

0.00

2/1.

0/0.

001

1

03

t I

e>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.00

* s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0/0.

01

1

04

Ie

>>

func

tion?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

05

Ie>

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.00

2 Ie

n*

Se

tting

0.

002/

1.0/

0.00

1 1

06

t I

e>>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

00*

s

Setti

ng

0.0/

100/

0.01

1

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

72/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

23

00

[46]

UN

BALA

NC

E

0F01

=1

01

Ii> fu

nctio

n?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

02

Ii>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

05 In

*

Setti

ng

0.05

/0.8

/0.0

25

1

03

t I

i>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.04

* s

Se

tting

0.

04/2

00.0

/0.0

1 1

04

Ii>

> fu

nctio

n?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

05

Ii>

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.25

In*

Se

tting

0.

2/0.

8/0.

05

1

24

00

[48]

EXC

ES L

ON

G S

TART

0F01

=1

01

Exce

s lo

ng s

tart

func

tion?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

02

Ista

rt de

tect

ion

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

1.0

I θ

Se

tting

1.

0/5.

0/0.

5 1

03

t I

star

t U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

1 s*

Setti

ng

1/20

0/1

1

25

00

[5

1LR-

50S]

BLO

CK

ED R

OTO

R

0F01

=1

01

Bloc

ked

roto

r fu

nctio

n?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

02

t I

stal

l C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

1 s*

Setti

ng

0.1/

60.0

/0.1

1

03

St

alle

d ro

tor?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

04

Ista

ll de

tect

ion

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

1.0

I θ∗

Se

tting

1.

0/5.

0/0.

5 1

05

Lo

cked

rot

or a

t sta

rt?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

26

00

[37]

LO

SS O

F LO

AD

0F01

=1

01

I< fu

nctio

n?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

02

I<

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

10 In

*

Se

tting

0.

1/1.

0/0.

01

1

03

t I

<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.2*

s

Se

tting

0.

2/10

0.0/

0.1

1

04

t I

nhib

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

05*

s

Setti

ng

0.05

/300

.0/0

.05

1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

73/

94

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

27

00

[49/

38]

RTD

SEN

SORS

(if o

ptio

n RT

D

or T

herm

isto

r)

0F

01=

1

01

RT

D1

func

tion?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D)

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

02

RT

D1

Alar

m

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0*

°C

Se

tting

0/

200/

1 1

03

t R

TD1

Alar

m

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0*

s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0.0/

0.1

1

04

RT

D1

Trip

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0* °C

Setti

ng

0/20

0/1

1

05

t RTD

1 Tr

ip

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0*

s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0.0/

0.1

1

06

RT

D2

func

tion?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D)

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

07

RT

D2

Alar

m

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0*

°C

Se

tting

0/

200/

1 1

08

t R

TD2

Alar

m

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0*

s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0.0/

0.1

1

09

RT

D2

Trip

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0* °C

Setti

ng

0/20

0/1

1

0A

t RTD

2 Tr

ip

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0*

s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0.0/

0.1

1

0B

RT

D3

func

tion?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

0C

RT

D3

Alar

m

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0*

°C

Se

tting

0/

200/

1 1

0D

t R

TD3

Alar

m

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0*

s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0.0/

0.1

1

0E

RT

D3

Trip

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0* °C

Setti

ng

0/20

0/1

1

0F

t RTD

3 Tr

ip

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0*

s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0.0/

0.1

1

10

RT

D4

func

tion?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

11

RT

D4

Alar

m

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0*

°C

Se

tting

0/

200/

1 1

12

t R

TD4

Alar

m

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0*

s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0.0/

0.1

1

13

RT

D4

Trip

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0* °C

Setti

ng

0/20

0/1

1

14

t RTD

4 Tr

ip

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0*

s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0.0/

0.1

1

15

RT

D5

func

tion?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

16

RT

D5

Alar

m

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0*

°C

Se

tting

0/

200/

1 1

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

74/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

17

t R

TD5

Alar

m

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0*

s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0.0/

0.1

1

18

RT

D5

Trip

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0* °C

Setti

ng

0/20

0/1

1

19

t RTD

5 Tr

ip

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0*

s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0.0/

0.1

1

1A

RT

D6

func

tion?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

1B

RT

D6

Alar

m

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0*

°C

Se

tting

0/

200/

1 1

1C

t R

TD6

Alar

m

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0*

s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0.0/

0.1

1

1D

RT

D6

Trip

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0* °C

Setti

ng

0/20

0/1

1

1E

t RTD

6 Tr

ip

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0*

s

Se

tting

0.

0/10

0.0/

0.1

1

28

00

[49]

TH

ERM

ISTO

R (if

opt

ion

ther

mis

tor)

0F01

=1

01

Th

erm

isto

r 1?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

02

Ther

mis

tor

1 C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

1 kO

hm

Se

tting

0.

1/30

.0/0

.1

1

03

Th

erm

isto

r 2?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

04

Ther

mis

tor

2 C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

1 kO

hm

Se

tting

0.

1/30

.0/0

.1

1

40

00

Prot

ectio

n gr

oup

n° 2

Sa

me

char

acte

rist

ics

than

Gro

up n

°1:

visi

ble

if 0F

03=

1

60

00

[66]

STA

RT N

UM

BER

01

Star

t num

ber

limita

tion

func

tion?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

02

Tref

eren

ce

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

10

min

*

Setti

ng

10/1

20/5

1

03

C

old

star

t num

ber

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0*

Setti

ng

0/5/

1 1

04

H

ot s

tart

num

ber

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0*

Setti

ng

0/5/

1 1

05

T

inte

rdic

tion

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1m

in*

Se

tting

1/

120/

1 1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

75/

94

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

61

00

MIN

TIM

E BE

TW 2

STA

RT

01

Tim

e be

tw s

tart

func

tion?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

02

T be

tw 2

sta

rt U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

1min

*

Se

tting

1/

120/

1 1

62

00

REA

CC

EL A

UTH

ORI

Z

01

Re

acce

l aut

horiz

func

tion?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

02

Volt

dip

dura

t Tre

acc

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.2

s *

Se

tting

0.

2/10

.0/0

.1

1

63

00

INPU

TS

01

INPU

T 3

Inde

xed

Strin

g 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0: N

ON

E *

1: E

MER

G S

T.

2: S

ET G

ROU

P 3:

VO

LT. D

IP

4: D

IST

TRIG

5:

EXT

RES

ET

6: E

XT 1

7:

EXT

2

Se

tting

0/

7/1

1

02

IN

PUT

4 In

dexe

d St

ring

=

INPU

T 3

Se

tting

0/

7/1

1

03

INPU

T 5

Inde

xed

Strin

g

= IN

PUT

3

Setti

ng

0/7/

1 1

04

EX

T 1

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0s

Setti

ng

0.0/

200.

0/0.

01

1

05

EX

T 2

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0s

Setti

ng

0.0/

200.

0/0.

01

1

06

EX

T 3

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0s

Setti

ng

0.0/

200.

0/0.

01

1

07

EX

T 4

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0s

Setti

ng

0.0/

200.

0/0.

01

1

08

In

put e

dge

type

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 0:

Up

/ 1:

Dow

n

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

76/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

64

00

AN

D L

OG

IC E

QU

ATI

ON

S1

01

Th

erm

Ove

rload

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

02

θ Al

arm

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

03

θ Fo

rbid

Sta

rt Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

04

I >>

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

05

tI >

>

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

06

Io

>

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

07

tIo

>

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

08

Io

>>

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

09

tIo >

>

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

0A

tIi

>

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

0B

tIi

>>

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

0C

Exce

ss lo

ng s

tart

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

0D

t I

stal

l Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

0E

Lock

ed r

otor

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

0F

tI <

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

10

Star

t Num

ber

limit

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

11

T

betw

2 s

tart

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

12

t R

TD1

Alar

m

(if o

ptio

n RT

D)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

13

t R

TD1

Trip

(if

opt

ion

RTD

) Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

14

t RTD

2 Al

arm

(if

opt

ion

RTD

) Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

15

t RTD

2 Tr

ip

(if o

ptio

n RT

D)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

16

t R

TD3

Alar

m

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

17

t R

TD3

Trip

(if

opt

ion

RTD

or

Ther

mis

tor)

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

18

t R

TD4

Alar

m

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

1 A

ND

LO

GIC

EQ

UA

TIO

NS

- 4

bits

:

bit 0

: eq

uatio

n A

bi

t 1:

equa

tion

B

bi

t 2:

equa

tion

C

bi

t 3:

equa

tion

D

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

77/

94

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

19

t R

TD4

Trip

(if

opt

ion

RTD

or

Ther

mis

tor)

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

1A

t R

TD5

Alar

m

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

1B

t R

TD5

Trip

(if

opt

ion

RTD

or

Ther

mis

tor)

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

1C

t R

TD6

Alar

m

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

1D

t R

TD6

Trip

(if

opt

ion

RTD

or

Ther

mis

tor)

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

1E

Th

erm

. 1

(if o

ptio

n th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

1F

Th

erm

. 2

(if o

ptio

n th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

20

EX

T1

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

21

EX

T2

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

22

EX

T3

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

23

EX

T4

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

24

Su

cces

s st

art

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

65

00

AN

D L

OG

IC E

QU

AT

T D

ELA

Y

01

EQ

U. A

Top

erat

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

0 s*

Setti

ng

0.0/

3600

.0/0

.1

1

02

EQ

U. A

Tre

set

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0

s*

Se

tting

0.

0/36

00.0

/0.1

1

03

EQ

U. B

Top

erat

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

0 s*

Setti

ng

0.0/

3600

.0/0

.1

1

04

EQ

U. B

Tre

set

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0

s*

Se

tting

0.

0/36

00.0

/0.1

1

05

EQ

U. C

Top

erat

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

0 s*

Setti

ng

0.0/

3600

.0/0

.1

1

06

EQ

U. C

Tre

set

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0

s*

Se

tting

0.

0/36

00.0

/0.1

1

07

EQ

U. D

Top

erat

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

0 s*

Setti

ng

0.0/

3600

.0/0

.1

1

08

EQ

U. D

Tre

set

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.0

s*

Se

tting

0.

0/36

00.0

/0.1

1

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

78/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

66

00

AU

X O

UTP

UT

RLY2

01

Ther

m O

verlo

ad

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

02

θ

Alar

m

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

03

θ

Forb

id S

tart

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

04

I >

>

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

05

tI

>>

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

06

Io >

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

07

tIo >

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

08

Io >

>

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

09

tIo

>>

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

0A

tIi >

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

0B

tIi >

>

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

0C

Ex

cess

long

sta

rt Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

0D

t Ist

all

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

0E

Lo

cked

rot

or

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

0F

tI

<

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

10

St

art N

umbe

r lim

it Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

11

T be

tw 2

sta

rt Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

12

t RTD

1 Al

arm

(if

opt

ion

RTD

) Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

13

t RTD

1 Tr

ip

(if o

ptio

n RT

D)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

14

t R

TD2

Alar

m

(if o

ptio

n RT

D)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

15

t R

TD2

Trip

(if

opt

ion

RTD

) Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

16

t RTD

3 Al

arm

(if

opt

ion

RTD

or

Ther

mis

tor)

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

17

t R

TD3

Trip

(if

opt

ion

RTD

or

Ther

mis

tor)

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

18

t R

TD4

Alar

m

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

2 A

UX

OU

TPU

T RL

Y -

4 bi

ts:

bi

t 0:

Out

put 2

bi

t 1:

Out

put 3

bi

t 2:

Out

put 4

bit 3

: O

utpu

t 5

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

79/

94

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

19

t R

TD4

Trip

(if

opt

ion

RTD

or

Ther

mis

tor)

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

1A

t R

TD5

Alar

m

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

1B

t R

TD5

Trip

(if

opt

ion

RTD

or

Ther

mis

tor)

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

1C

t R

TD6

Alar

m

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

1D

t R

TD6

Trip

(if

opt

ion

RTD

or

Ther

mis

tor)

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

1E

Th

erm

. 1

(if o

ptio

n th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

1F

Th

erm

. 2

(if o

ptio

n th

erm

isto

r)

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

20

EX

T1

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

21

EX

T2

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

22

EX

T3

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

23

EX

T4

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

24

C

lose

ord

er

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

25

Tr

ip o

rder

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

26

Ord

er 1

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

27

Ord

er 2

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

28

Succ

es s

tart

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

29

t E

QU

A Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

2A

t EQ

UB

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

2B

t E

QU

C

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

2C

t E

QU

D

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

2D

SW

ope

r tim

e Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

2E

SW o

per

nb

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

*

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

2F

SA

2 Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

30

Activ

e gr

oup

Bina

ry (4

bits

) 0

0000

* (0

: gro

up 1

/ 1:

gr

oup

2)

Se

tting

0/

15/1

1

31

La

tche

d re

lays

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

0 00

00 *

Setti

ng

0/15

/1

1

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

80/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

67

00

TRIP

OU

PUT

RLY

01

Ther

m o

verlo

ad ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

02

tI

>>

?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

03

tIo

> ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

04

tIo

>>

?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

05

tIi

> ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

06

tIi

>>

?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

07

Ex

ces

long

sta

rt ?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

08

tIb

loq

? In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

09

Lo

cked

rot

or ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

0A

tI

< ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

0B

t R

TD1

trip

?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

0C

t R

TD2

trip

?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

0D

t R

TD3

trip

?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

0E

t R

TD4

trip

?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

0F

t R

TD5

trip

?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

10

t R

TD6

trip

?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

11

Th

erm

isto

r 1

? (

if op

tion

ther

mis

tor)

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

81/

94

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

12

Th

erm

isto

r 2

? (

if op

tion

ther

mis

tor)

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

13

EX

T1 ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

14

EX

T2 ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

15

Eq

uatio

n A

? In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

16

Eq

uatio

n B

? In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

17

Eq

uatio

n C

?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

18

Eq

uatio

n D

?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

68

00

LATC

H T

RIP

ORD

ER

01

Latc

hing

Ord

er

Bina

ry (7

bits

)

0: L

atch

tI>

>

1:

Lat

ch tI

o>>

2:

Lat

ch tI

i>>

3: L

atch

EQ

UA

A 4:

Lat

ch E

QU

A B

5: L

atch

EQ

UA

C

6: L

atch

EQ

UA

D

Se

tting

0/

63/1

1

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

82/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

69

00

SW S

UPE

RVIS

ION

01

SW

Ope

ratin

g tim

e?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

02

SW

Ope

ratin

g tim

e C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

05 s

*

Setti

ng

0.05

/1.0

/0.0

1 1

03

SW

Ope

ratin

g nu

mbe

r?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

04

SW

Ope

ratin

g nu

mbe

r U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0 *

Se

tting

0/

5000

0/1

1

05

SA2n

? Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

06

Sa2n

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0

exp+

06 A

² *

Se

tting

0/

4000

/1

(*ex

p+06

) 1

07

n

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1

*

Setti

ng

1/2/

1 1

08

TR

IP t

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.2

s*

Se

tting

0.

2/5.

0/0.

05

1

09

C

LOSE

t C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

2 s*

Setti

ng

0.2/

5.0/

0.05

1

6A

00

LED

5

01

Ther

m o

verlo

ad ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

02

Th

erm

ala

rm ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

03

tI

>>

?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

04

tIo

> ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

05

tIo

>>

?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

06

tIi

> ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

07

tIi

>>

?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

08

tI

< ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

09

Ex

ces

long

sta

rt ?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

83/

94

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

0A

tIs

tall

? In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

0B

Lo

cked

rot

or ?

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

0C

Em

erg.

res

tart

? In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

0D

Fo

rbid

den

star

t ?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

0E

t R

TD1,

2,3

alar

m ?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

0F

t R

TD1,

2,3

trip

?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

10

t R

TD4,

5,6

alar

m ?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

11

t R

TD4,

5,6

trip

?

(if o

ptio

n RT

D o

r Th

erm

isto

r)

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

12

Th

erm

isto

r 1,

2 ?

(if

opt

ion

ther

mis

tor)

In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

13

EX

T 1

? In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

14

EX

T 2

? In

dexe

d st

ring

0 1 0:

NO

*

1: Y

ES

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

15

M

otor

sto

pped

?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

16

M

otor

run

ning

?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

17

Su

cces

sful

sta

rt ?

Inde

xed

strin

g 0 1

0: N

O *

1:

YES

Setti

ng

0/1/

1 1

6B

00

LED

6 (

= L

ED 5

)

6C

00

LED

7 (

= L

ED 5

)

6D

00

LED

8 (

= L

ED 5

)

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

84/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

70

00

REC

ORD

ER C

ON

TRO

L (V

ERSI

ON

A2

and

>)

01

St

art/

Trig

ger

reco

rder

In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2

Stop

ped

Trig

gere

d Ru

nnin

g *

Se

tting

1/

2/1

1

02

Re

cord

er S

ourc

e In

dexe

d St

ring

0 Sa

mpl

es *

Dat

a

20

Pre

time

Cou

rier

Num

ber

0.

1 se

cond

Setti

ng

0.1/

3.0/

0.1

1

21

Post

tim

e C

ourie

r N

umbe

r

0.1

seco

nd

Se

tting

0.

1/3.

0/0.

1 1

22

D

ist.

Reco

rder

Trig

In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 O

N IN

ST

ON

TRI

G

Se

tting

0/

1/1

1

80

00

DIS

TURB

AN

CE

REC

01

Re

cord

Num

ber

Uns

igne

d in

tege

r (1

byt

e)

0*

Setti

ng

0/5/

1 (a

ccor

ding

to

con

text

) 1

02

Tr

igge

r Ti

me

IEC

870

Tim

e &

Dat

e

dd/m

m/y

y hh

:mm

Dat

a

03

Avai

labl

e C

hann

el B

it M

ask

Bina

ry F

lag

Inde

xed

Strin

g 0 1 2 3 4

1111

1

Ia

Ib

Ic

I0

Inpu

ts/O

utpu

ts

D

ata

04

C

hann

el T

ypes

Bi

nary

Fla

g 0:

dig

ital,

1:

anal

ogue

0111

1

Dat

a

05

C

hann

el O

ffset

s Re

peat

ed g

roup

of

Cou

rier

num

bers

Upl

oad

Offs

ets

D

ata

06

Sc

alin

g Fa

ctor

s Re

peat

ed g

roup

of

Cou

rier

num

bers

Upl

oad

Scal

. Fac

tors

Dat

a

07

-0F

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

D -

rese

rved

10

Re

cord

Len

gth

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

Dat

a

11

Trig

ger

posi

tion

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

Dat

a

12

Tim

e Ba

se

Cou

rier

Num

ber

D

ata

13

N

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TED

- re

serv

ed

14

Upl

oad

Tim

er

Repe

ated

gro

up o

f In

tege

rs

D

ata

15

-1F

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

D -

rese

rved

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P2

20/E

N G

C/B

43

Com

mun

icat

ion

MiC

OM

P22

0

Page

85/

94

Col

Ro

w

Men

u Te

xt

Dat

a Ty

pe

Ind

Val

ues

(* :

def

ault)

D

epen

d C

ell T

ype

Min

/Max

/Ste

p Pa

ssw

Le

vel

20

U

ploa

d C

hann

el 0

Re

peat

ed g

roup

of

Inte

ger/

Bin.

flag

s

Dat

a

21

U

ploa

d C

hann

el 1

Re

peat

ed g

roup

of

Inte

ger/

Bin.

flag

s

Dat

a

22

U

ploa

d C

hann

el 2

Re

peat

ed g

roup

of

Inte

ger/

Bin.

flag

s

Dat

a

23

U

ploa

d C

hann

el 3

Re

peat

ed g

roup

of

Inte

ger/

Bin.

flag

s

Dat

a

24

U

ploa

d C

hann

el In

puts

/Out

puts

Re

peat

ed g

roup

of

Inte

ger/

Bin.

flag

s

Dat

a

90

00

AU

TOM

AT.

FLT

01

Re

cord

num

ber

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

5*

Setti

ng

1/5/

1 1

02

O

ccur

faul

t dat

e IE

C D

ATE

D

ata

1

03

Ac

tive

set g

roup

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

1

Dat

a

1

04

Phas

e in

faul

t AS

CII

Text

(14

byte

s)

PHAS

E A

Dat

a

1

05

Phas

e de

tect

ed b

y AS

CII

Text

(14

byte

s)

I >

>

Dat

a

1

06

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

D

ata

1

07

Ia

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

D

ata

1

08

Ib

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

D

ata

1

09

Ic

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

D

ata

1

0A

In

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

D

ata

1

BF

00

CO

MM

SYS

TEM

DA

TA

01

Dis

t Rec

ord

Cnt

rl Re

f M

enu

Cel

l (2)

0x70

00

D

ata

02

D

ist R

ecor

d Ex

tract

Ref

M

enu

Cel

l (2)

0x80

00

D

ata

03

Se

tting

Tra

nsfe

rt ?

04

Re

set D

eman

d Ti

mer

s N

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TE

05

Re

set E

vent

Rep

ort

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

P220

/EN

GC

/B43

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

Com

mun

icat

ion

Page

86/

94

M

iCO

M P

220

BLA

NK

PA

GE


IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL


BLANK PAGE


6. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE

The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported.

The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

• Initialisation (Reset)

• Time Synchronisation

• Event Record Extraction

• General Interrogation

• Cyclic Measurements

• General Commands

6.1 Physical connection and link layer

Connection is available for IEC60870-5-103 through the rear RS485 port. It is possible to select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel interface. Following a change, a reset command is required to re-establish communications.

The parameters of the communication are the following :

• Even Parity

• 8 Data bits

• 1 stop bit

• Data rate 9600 or 19200 bauds

6.2 Initialisation

Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relays transmit buffer.

The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will be contained in the data section of this ASDU:

Manufacturer Name : AREVA

The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay model number to identify the type of relay, eg P220.

In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it will also produce a power up event.


6.3 Time synchronisation

The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1 data.

6.4 Spontaneous events

The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function type/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are not used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardised messages will not be sent.

Events are categorised using the following information:

• Common Address

• Function Type

• Information number

Paragraph 2 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. The common address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay produces more events of a certain type than can be passed using the standardised messages. For example the relay provides 5 binary inputs however only 4 binary inputs can be passed using the standardised messages. Using a different common address for the 5th binary allows each binary input to be indicated. The table in Paragraph 2 shows the common address as an offset value. The common address offset will be added to the station address in order to pass these events.

6.5 General interrogation

The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, information numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GI cycle are indicated in Paragraph 2.

6.6 Cyclic measurements

The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used).

It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value.

6.7 Commands

A list of the supported commands is contained in Paragraph 2. The relay will respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.

6.8 Disturbance records

The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the mechanism defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintains compatibility with the VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with no disturbance records at the start of every GI cycle.

6.9 Blocking of monitor direction

The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.


7. IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASES

List of events produced by the relay

Two kinds of ASDU can be generated for the events : ASDU 1 (time-tagged message) or ASDU2 (Time-tagged message with relative time)

The list of events is the following with the associated values : INFORMATION NUMBER, TYPE OF ASDU ,CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION and COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU

Status indication in monitor direction :

− LED reset : INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− Local Mode: INF <22>;TYP <1>; COT<1>, < ADDRESS> ↑↓

− Setting group 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↑↓

− Setting group 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↑↓

− Aux input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↑↓




− Logic input 1 : INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> ↑↓





− Output relay 1: INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> ↑↓






Fault indications in monitor direction :

− Instantaneous I>> : INF <65>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓

− Instantaneous Ie > : INF <96>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓

− Instantaneous Ie >> : INF <97>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓

− Instantaneous Ie> or Ie>> : INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓ (general earth)

− Instantaneous I< : INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓

− Instantaneous Iinv > : INF <104>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓


− Instantaneous Iinv >> : INF <106>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓

− General TRIP : INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>

− TRIP L1 : INF <69>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>

− TRIP L2 : INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP L3 : INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↑↓ (OR of the instantaneous signals)

− TRIP I>> : INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP Ie> : INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP Ie>>: INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP I< : INF <101>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP Iinv > : INF <105>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP Iinv >> : INF <107>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− Thermal ALARM : INF <110>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↑↓

− Thermal Overload : INF <111>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− Blocked Rotor : INF <109>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− Blocked Rotor at Starting : INF <113>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− Excess Long Start : INF <120>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− RTD ALARM : INF <122>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↑↓

− RTD TRIP : INF <123>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− Thermistor TRIP : INF <125>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP Logic equation 1 : INF <86>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>




Auto reclosure indications :

− Closed Position : INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓

− Open Position : INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓

− TRIPPING contact : INF <142>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓

− Closing contact : INF <143>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> ↑↓

N.B. : The double arrow ↑ ↓ means the event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance.


List of data contained in General Interrogation

Status indication in monitor direction :

− Local Mode : INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, <ADDRESS>

− Setting group 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>

− Setting group 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>

− Aux input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>




− Logic input 1 : INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS>





− Output relay 1: INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS>






Fault indications in monitor direction :

− Instantaneous Ie> or Ie>>: INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT <9>,<ADDRESS> (General earth)

− General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> (OR of the instantaneous signals)

Auto reclosure indications :

− Closed Position : INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDRESS>

− Open Position : INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDRESS>

Cyclic measurements

First measurement : ASDU 9 (INF <148>):

Only the RMS phase currents and the measured frequency are transmitted in standard format.

The scaling factor is 2.4 for all the measurement ( e.g. 2.4* nominal values = 4096)

The other measurements in ASDU 9 are indicated as NON Significant.


Second measurement ASDU 77 (INF<149>):

5 measurements: In, I inverse, I direct, Thermal state (%), and the Full load current (%).

These values are conforms to the floating Format of the IEEE 32 bits. They are not standardised.

Third measurement ASDU 77 (INF <150>):

RTD1 to RTD6 measurements if RTD option is present.

Thermistor1 and 2 measurements plus RTD3, RTD4, RTD5, RTD6 if option is present.

These values are conforms to the floating Format of the IEEE 32 bits. They are not standardised.

List of the supported commands

− LED reset . This command corresponds to the acknowledgement of all alarms by the front plate on MiCOM P220 products : INF<19>, TYP<20>, COT <20>

− Setting group 1 : INF<23>; TYP<20>; COT <20>

− Setting group 2 : INF<23>; TYP<20>; COT <20>

− TRIPPING Contact : INF <142>; TYP<20>; COT <20>

− Closing Contact : INF <143>; TYP<20>; COT <20>

These commands make object of an acknowledgement by ASDU 1, positive if COT= <20> or negative if COT = <21>.

Technical Guide P220/EN SV/B43 MiCOM P220

Default Setting Value

Technical Guide P220/EN SV/B43 Default Setting Values MiCOM P220 Page 1/14

CONTENTS

1. DEFAULT SETTING VALUES 3

1.1 OP PARAMETERS menu 3

1.2 CONFIGURATION menu 3

1.2.1 CONFIG. SELECT submenu 3

1.2.2 CT RATIO submenu 3

1.2.3 LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus 4

1.1.4 Configuration Inputs submenu 4

1.1.5 Date Format submenu 4

1.3 COMMUNICATION Menu 5

1.3.1 Courier 5

1.3.2 MODBUSTM menu 5

1.4 PROTECTION G1 and G2 Menus 5

1.4.1 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu. 5

1.1.2 [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu 5

1.4.3 [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu 6

1.4.4 [46] UNBALANCE submenu 6

1.4.5 [48] EXCES LONG START submenu 6

1.4.6 [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu 6

1.4.7 [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu 6

1.4.8 [49/38] RTD submenu (optional) 7

1.4.9 [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional) 8

1.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 8

1.5.1 [66] START NUMBER submenu 8

1.5.2 MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu 8

1.5.3 REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu 8

1.5.4 INPUTS submenu 8

1.5.5 AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu 9

1.5.6 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu 10

1.5.7 AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu 10

1.5.8 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu 11

1.5.9 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu 12

1.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu 12

1.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu 13

1.6 CONSIGNATION Menu 13

1.6.1 DISTURB RECORD submenu 13

P220/EN SV/B43 Technical Guide Default Setting Values Page 2/14 MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE


1. DEFAULT SETTING VALUES

The MiCOM P220 relay leaves the factory with the following default setting values :

1.1 OP PARAMETERS menu

Password AAAA

Reference ALST

Frequency 50 Hz

Date 29/01/94

Time 00:00:00

1.2 CONFIGURATION menu

1.2.1 CONFIG. SELECT submenu

Change Group Input EDGE

Setting Group 1

Default display IA RMS (phase A current)

Start detection criterion 52A (closing of the CB)

Analogue output type (optional) 4 - 20 mA

Value transmitted by the analogue output (optional)

IA RMS (phase A current)

RTD type (optional) PT100

Thermistor 1 type (optional) PTC

Thermistor 2 type (optional) PTC

1.2.2 CT RATIO submenu

Primary rating of the phase CT 1

Secondary rating of the phase CT 1

Primary rating of the earth CT 1

Secondary rating of the earth CT 1


1.2.3 LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus

LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

Allocation : Thermal overload No No No No

Allocation : Thermal alarm θ ALARM No No No No

Allocation : tI>> No No No No

Allocation : tIo> No No No No

Allocation : tIo>> No No No No

Allocation : tIi> No No No No

Allocation : tIi>> No No No No

Allocation : tI< No No No No

Allocation : Excessive long start No No No No

Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while running)

No No No No

Allocation : Locked rotor (at start) No No No No

Allocation : Emergency restart No No No No

Allocation : Forbidden start No No No No

Allocation : tALARM RTD1, tALARM RTD2, tALARM RTD3

(optional) No No No No

Allocation : tDECL RTD1, tDECL RTD2, tDECL RTD3


Allocation : tALARM RTD4, tALARM RTD5, tALARM RTD6


Allocation : tDECL RTD4, tDECL RTD5, tDECL RTD6


Allocation : Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (optional)

No No No No

Allocation : EXT 1 No No No No

Allocation : EXT 2 No No No No

Allocation : Motor Stopped No No No No

Allocation : Motor running No No No No

Allocation : Successful start No No No No

1.2.4 Configuration Inputs submenu

Inputs : 54321 11111

1.2.5 Date Format submenu

Date Format PRIVATE

Only if Courier Protocol, otherwise, this submenu will be implemented in COMMUNICATION Menu.


1.3 COMMUNICATION Menu

1.3.1 Courier


Relay address 255

1.3.2 MODBUSTM menu


Data rate 19 200 Bauds

Parity Without

Numbe of data bits 8

Number of stop bits 1

Relay address 1

Format date Private

1.4 PROTECTION G1 and G2 Menus

1.4.1 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu.

PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2

Thermal overload function enabled ? No No

« Thermal inhibition on starting » function enabled ?

No No

Threshold Iθ> 0,2 In 0,2 In

Ke 3 3

Te1 1 minute 1 minute

Te2 1 minute 1 minute

Tr 1 minute 1 minute

Influence RTD (optional) No No

Thermal alarm enabled ? No No

Thermal alrm θALARM threshold 20 % 20 %

Thermal inhibition of start enabled ? No No

θ FORDID START threshold 20 % 20 %

1.4.2 [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu


Short-circuit function enabled ? No No

Threshold I>> 1 In 1 In

tI>> 0 second 0 second


1.4.3 [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu


Io> element of the earth fault function enabled ?

No No

Threshold Io> 0,002 In 0,002 In

tIo> 0 second 0 second

Io>> element of the earth fault function enabled ?

No No

Threshold Io>> 0,002 In 0,002 In

tIo>> 0 second 0 second

1.4.4 [46] UNBALANCE submenu


Ii> element of the unbalance function enabled ?

No No

Threshold Ii> 0,05 In 0,05 In

tIi> 0,04 second 0,04 second

Ii>> element of the unbalance function enabled ?

No No

Threshold Ii>> 0,2 In 0,2 In

1.4.5 [48] EXCES LONG START submenu


Excessive long start function enabled ? No No

Threshold Istart 1 Iθ 1 Iθ

TIstart 1 second 1 second

1.4.6 [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu


Block rotor function enabled ? No No

tIstall 0,1 second 0,1 second

Stalled rotor function enabled ? No No

Threshold Istall 1 Iθ 1 Iθ

Locked rotor at start function enabled ? No No

1.4.7 [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu


Loss of load function enabled ? No No

Threshold I< 0,1 In 0,1 In

tI< 0,2 second 0,2 second

Tinhib 0,05 second 0,05 second


1.4.8 [49/38] RTD submenu (optional)


RTD1 enabled ? No No

ALARM RTD1 0 °C 0 °C

tALARM RTD1 0 second 0 second

DECL RTD1 0 °C 0 °C

tDECL RTD1 0 second 0 second



























1.4.9 [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional)


Thermistor 1 enabled No No

Thermist 1 0,1 kΩ 0,1 kΩ

Thermistor 2 enabled No No

Thermist 2 0,1 kΩ 0,1 kΩ

1.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu

1.5.1 [66] START NUMBER submenu

Start Number Limitation function eneabled ?

No

Treference 10 minutes

Cold start number 0

Hot start number 0

Tinterdiction 1 minute

1.5.2 MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu

Time Between Start function enabled ? No

Tentre 2 dem 1 minute

1.5.3 REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu

Reacceleration authorization function enabled ?

No

Treacc 0,2 second

1.5.4 INPUTS submenu

Allocation : input n°3 NONE



Time delay EXT 1 0 second





1.5.5 AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu

D C B A

Allocation : Thermal overload 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Thermal alarm θ ALARM 0 0 0 0

Allocation : θ FORBID START 0 0 0 0

Allocation : I>> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tI>> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Io> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tIo> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Io>> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tIo>> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tIi> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tIi>> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Excessive long start 0 0 0 0


0 0 0 0

Allocation : Locked rotor (at start) 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tI< 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Start Nb Limitation 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Tbetw 2 Start 0 0 0 0

Allocation : t ALARM RTD1 (optional) 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tDECL RTD1 (optional) 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tALARM RTD2 (optional) 0 0 0 0










Allocation : Thermist 1 (optional) 0 0 0 0


Allocation : EXT 1 0 0 0 0




Allocation : Successful start 0 0 0 0


1.5.6 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu

EQU. A Toperat 0 second

EQU. A Treset 0 second

EQU. B Toperat 0 second

EQU. B Treset 0 second

EQU. C Toperat 0 second

EQU. C Treset 0 second

EQU. D Toperat 0 second

EQU. D Treset 0 second

1.5.7 AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu

5 4 3 2

Allocation : Thermal overload 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Thermal alarm θ ALARM 0 0 0 0

Allocation : θ FORBID START 0 0 0 0

Allocation : I>> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tI>> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Io> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tIo> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Io>> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tIo>> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tIi> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tIi>> 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Excessive long start 0 0 0 0


0 0 0 0

Allocation : Locked rotor (at start) 0 0 0 0

Allocation : tI< 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Start Nb Limitation 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Tbetw 2 Start 0 0 0 0

Allocation : t ALARM RTD1 (optional) 0 0 0 0









5 4 3 2











Allocation : Close order (com RS485) 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Trip order (com RS485) 0 0 0 0

Allocation : order 1 (com RS485) 0 0 0 0

Allocation : order 2 (com RS485) 0 0 0 0

Allocation : Successful start 0 0 0 0

Allocation : t EQU. A 0 0 0 0

Allocation : t EQU. B 0 0 0 0

Allocation : t EQU. C 0 0 0 0

Allocation : t EQU. D 0 0 0 0

Allocation : SW Operating Time 0 0 0 0

Allocation : SW Operation Nb 0 0 0 0

Allocation : S A n 0 0 0 0

Active Group 0 0 0 0

1.5.8 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu

OUTPUT 2 No

OUTPUT 3 No

OUTPUT 4 No

OUTPUT 5 No


1.5.9 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu

Allocation output relay n°1 : Thermal overload No

Allocation output relay n°1 : tI>> No

Allocation output relay n°1 : tIo> No

Allocation output relay n°1 : tIo>> No

Allocation output relay n°1 : tIi> No

Allocation output relay n°1 : tIi>> No

Allocation output relay n°1 : Excessive long start No

Allocation output relay n°1 : tIbloq (stalled rotor while running) No

Allocation output relay n°1 : Locked rotor (at start) No

Allocation output relay n°1 : tI< No

Allocation output relay n°1 : tDECL RTD1 (optional) No






Allocation output relay n°1 : Thermist 1 (optional) No

Allocation output relay n°1 : Thermist 2 (optional) No

Allocation output relay n°1 : EXT 1 No

Allocation output relay n°1 : EXT 2 No

Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation A No

Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation B No

Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation C No

Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation D No

1.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH tI>> No

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH tIo>> No

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH tIi>> No

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa A No

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa B No

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa C No

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa D No


1.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu

SW Operating Time function enabled ? No

SW Operating Time 0 ,05 second

SW Operation Number function enabled ?

No

SW Operation Number 0

S A n function enabled ? No

S A n 0

Exponent n value 1

Trip T 0,2 second

Close T 0,2 second

1.6 CONSIGNATION Menu

1.6.1 DISTURB RECORD submenu

Pre-Time 0,1 second

Post-Time 0,1 second

Disturbance Rocord Trig ON INST


BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P220/EN IN/B43 MiCOM P220

Installation Guide

Technical Guide P220/EN IN/B43 Installation Guide MiCOM P220 Page 1/8

CONTENT

1. RECEPTION OF THE RELAYS 3

2. HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 3

3. STORAGE 4

4. UNPACKING 4

5. INSTALLING THE RELAYS 4

6. DIMENSIONS 5

6.1 Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals 5

6.2 Communication port RS485 6

6.3 Earthing 6

7. CASE DIMENSIONS 7

P220/EN IN/B43 Technical Guide Installation Guide Page 2/8 MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE


1. RECEPTION OF THE RELAYS

Protection relays are generally robust. However it is appropriate to treat them with care before installing them on site. As soon as they arrive, the relays should be examined immediately, looking for any deterioration which could have occurred during transport. If there is any deterioration, make a claim against the forwarding company and inform AREVA T&D as soon as possible.

Relays not intended for immediate installation must be stored in their protective polyethylene packaging.

2. HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

The usual movements of a person easily generate electrostatic energy which may reach several thousand volts. The discharging of this voltage into devices comprising semiconductors, when handling electronic circuits, can cause severe deterioration. Such damage is not necessarily visible immediately. Nevertheless, it reduces the reliability of the circuit.

Electronic circuits are completely protected against any electrostatic discharge when inside their housing. Do not expose them to any risk by needlessly taking the modules out of their housings.

Each module has the best possible protection for its devices consisting of semiconductors. However, should it be necessary to withdraw the module from its housing, please take the following precautions to preserve the great reliability and long service life for which the equipment was designed and manufactured.

1. Before taking the module out of its housing, touch the housing to balance your electrostatic potential.

2. When handling the module, hold it by its front plate, or by its frame or by the edges of the printed circuit board. Do not touch the electronic components, the printed circuit conductors and the connectors.

3. Before passing the module to another person, shake hands with him or her for example to balance your electrostatic potential.

4. Place the module on an antistatic surface or an electrically conductive surface with the same potential as yourself.

5. To store or transport the module, place it in conductive packaging.

If you carry out any measurements on the internal electronic circuits of a device in service, earth yourself to exposed conductive parts by linking yourself to the housing by a conductive strap attached to your wrist. The resistance to earth of the conductive strap which you attach to your wrist and to the housing must be between 500 kΩ and 10 MΩ. If you do not have a device of this type, you must remain permanently in contact with the housing to prevent any static energy accumulating. The instruments used to take the measurements must be earthed to the housing insofar as this is possible.

For further information on the procedures for safe working with all the electronic equipment, please consult standards BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. In a special handling area we strongly advise you to undertake a detailed analysis of the electronic circuits and working conditions according to the BS and IEC standards mentioned above.


3. STORAGE

If the relays do not have to be installed immediately on reception, they must be stored protected against dust and humidity in their original carton. If dehumidifying crystals are placed in the relay packaging, it is advisable not to remove them. The effect of the dehumidifying crystals is reduced if the packaging is exposed to ambient conditions. To restore their original effectiveness, you need only to heat the crystals slightly for around an hour, before replacing them in their delivery carton.

As soon as the packaging is opened, the dust which has accumulated on the carton risks settling on the relays. In the presence of moisture, the carton and the packaging can become humidified to the point where the effectiveness of the dehumidifying crystals is reduced.

The temperature for storage should remain between - 25 °C and + 70 °C.

4. UNPACKING

When unpacking and installing relays, take great care to avoid damaging the parts and changing the settings. Relays must be handled only by people who are experts in this field. As far as possible, the installation must remain clean, dry, free from dust and free from excessive vibration. The site must be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays removed from their housings must not be exposed to dust or humidity. To this end, it is necessary to take great care when installing relays whilst construction work is taking place on the same site.

5. INSTALLING THE RELAYS

The relays are supplied either individually or mounted in a cubicle. If separate relays have to be installed according to a particular drawing, please follow the mounting details indicated in publication R7012. If a MMLG test unit has to be incorporated, position it to the right of the set of relays (looking at them from the front). The modules must still be protected in their metal housings during installation on a cubicle. The design of the relays makes it possible to reach the mounting holes easily without taking off the cover. For individually mounted relays, a positioning diagram is normally supplied to indicate the centre of the holes and the layout of the cubicle. The corresponding dimensions are also indicated in publication N 1509.


6. DIMENSIONS

6.1 Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals

The individual equipment are delivered with sufficient M4 screws to connect the relay via annular terminals, with a maximum recommended of two annular terminals per contact.

If necessary, AREVA can provide annular terminals to crimp. 5 references exist according to the section of the wire (see below). Each reference corresponds to a sachet of 100 terminals.

Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8 (wire size 0.75 - 1.5mm²)AREVA T&D reference: ZB9128 015

Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8mm (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm²)AREVA T&D reference: ZB9128 016

P0166ENb

M4 90˚ Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 0.25 - 1.65mm²)AREVA T&D reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 901

M4 90˚ Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm²)AREVA T&D reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 900

P0167ENb

M4 90° Ring Tongue Terminal (wire size 2.53-6.64 mm²)/12-10AWG. Reference AREVA T&D, Stafford part number ZB9124 904 Not isolated.


To insure the insulation of the terminals and to respect the security and safety instructions, an isolated sleeve can be used.

We recommend the following cable cross-sections:

− Auxiliary sources Vaux : 1.5 mm²

− Communication Port see paragraph 6.2

− Other circuits 1.0 mm²

Because of the limitations of the annular terminals, the maximum wire cross-section which can be used for the connector blocks (for current inputs and signals) is of 6mm² by using non -insulated annular terminals. When only pre- insulated terminals can be used, the maximum wire cross-section is reduced to 2, 63 mm² per annular terminal. If a more significant wire cross-section is necessary, two wires can be put in parallel, each one finished by a separate annular terminal.

All the terminal blocks used for connections, except of the port RS485, must be able to withstand a nominal voltage of minimum 300V peak value.

We recommend to protect the auxiliary source connection by using a fuse of type NIT or TIA with a breaking capacity of 16A. For security reasons, do never install fuses in current transformers circuits. The other circuits must be protected by fuses.

6.2 Communication port RS485

Connections to RS485 is made using annular terminals. It is recommended that a two core screened cable, is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or a200nF total cable capacitance.


− Each core : 16/0.2 mm copper conductor, PVC insulated.

− Nominal conductor area : 0.5 mm² per core

− Screen : Overall braid, PVC sheathed

− Linear capacitance between conductor and earth : 100pF/m

Refer to chapter 2 paragraph 2.7.5 of this technical guide to get the RS232/RS485 converter references.

6.3 Earthing

Each equipment must be connected to a local earth terminal by the intermediary of a M4 earth terminals. We recommend a wire of minimal section of 2,5 mm², with annular terminals on the side of the equipment. Because of the limitations of the annular terminals, the possible maximum section is of 6mm² by wire. If a larger section is necessary, one can use cables connected in parallel, each one ending with an annular terminal separated on the side of the equipment. One can also use a metal bar.

NOTE: To prevent any electrolytic risk between copper conductor or brass conductor and the back plate of the equipment, it is necessary to take precautions to isolate them one from the other. This can be done in several ways, for example by inserting between the conductor and the case a plated nickel or insulated ring washer or by using a tin terminals.


7. CASE DIMENSIONS

MiCOM P220 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or flush mounting.

Weight : about 2.5 Kg

External size : Height Case 152.2 mm Front panel 177 mm Width Case 148,1 mm Front panel 155 mm Depth Case (flush part) 140,8 mm Case + Front panel 166 mm

NOTE : For flush mounting, use the screws supplied by AREVA or others with head diameter smaller than the hole of the front face. In contrary, the active part will not be able to be plugged properly (do not add washers).


BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P220/EN CM/B43 MiCOM P220

Commissioning and Maintenance of the MiCOM P220 Relay

Technical Guide P220/EN CM/B43 Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220 Page 1/32

CONTENT

1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING 3

2. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TESTING 3

2.1 Important notes 3

2.1.1 Warning concerning the test methodology 3

2.1.2 Injection test boxes 3

2.1.3 Additional test equipments 3

2.1.4 Communication 3

2.2 Commissioning test records 4

3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS 4

3.1 Allocation of terminals 4

3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 4

3.3 Visual inspection 4

3.4 Earthing 4

3.5 Current transformers (CTs) 5

3.5.1 Use of a Core Balance CT for earth faults. 5

3.5.2 Cable shields and core balance CT 5

3.5.3 Phase CTs orientation 6

3.6 Auxiliary supply 6

4. COMMISSIONING 7

4.1 Settings 7

4.2 Measurements 7

4.3 Thermal replica 7

4.3.1 Test wiring diagram 8

4.3.2 Alarm threshold θALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te1 test. 9

4.3.3 Alarm threshold θALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te2 test. 10

4.3.4 Cooling down constant time Tr test. 10

4.3.5 θ FORBID START threshold test. 11

4.3.6 Numerical example 12

4.4 Phase overcurrent: I>> 13


4.4.2 I>> threshold 13

4.5 Earth overcurrent : Io>, Io>> 14

P220/EN CM/B43 Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance Page 2/32 MiCOM P220


4.5.2 Io> threshold 15

4.5.3 Io>> threshold 15

4.6 Negative phase sequence threshold(46) 16


4.6.2 I2> threshold 17

4.6.3 I2>> threshold 17

4.7 Automation functions 18

4.7.1 Latching of relay outputs 18

4.7.2 Wiring diagram 19

4.8 Commissioning parameters data base 20

4.8.1 PROTECTION Menu 20

4.8.2 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 21

5. INTRODUCTION 22

6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE 22

7. MAINTENANCE CHECKS 23

7.1 Alarms 23

7.2 Opto-isolators 23

7.3 Output Relays 23

8. METHOD OF REPAIR 24

9. CHANGING THE BATTERY 25

10. TYPES OF FAULTS 26

10.1 Equipment failure 26

10.1.1 Minor faults 26

10.1.2 Major faults 26

10.2 Problem solving 27

10.2.1 Password lost or not accepted 27

10.2.2 Communication 27

11. LIST OF THE RELAY ALARM MESSAGES 28

12. LIST OF THE MOTOR ALARM MESSAGES 29


1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING

BEFORE COMMISSIONING THE RELAY, THE SAFETY SECTION OF THE MANUAL MUST BE READ.

When commissioning the MiCOM relay for the first time, 1/4 hour should be allowed to become familiar with the menu (MENU OF THE HMI section).

With a laptop computer and AREVA setting software MiCOM S1, the user can configure the MiCOM P220 relay and save this setting on to a floppy disk. This file can subsequently be downloaded via the RS232 front port or via the RS 485 link on the rear of the MiCOM relays.

2. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TESTING

2.1 Important notes

2.1.1 Warning concerning the test methodology

The test methodology described in this document tries as much as possible not to modify the settings of the MiCOM P220 relay once these have been set so as to help the tests and avoid errors.

A reference commissioning configuration file (MiCOM P220) is provided in Chapter 8-3.

All the tests of the MiCOM P220 relays are carried out by injecting currents to the secondary of the earth and/or phase CTs using appropriate injection test sets provided for this purpose.

2.1.2 Injection test boxes

For reasons of convenience (weight, spatial requirement, transportation), a single-phase injection test set is more suitable for the tests and is able to perform all the tests relating to the MiCOM P220 relay.

Thus, the following descriptions indicate how to conduct the tests with a single-phase injection test set.

However, for certain tests, the three-phase wiring diagrams are easier to understand and, in this case, the description is also given in three-phase format.

Single-phase injection test set

1 current (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).

Three-phase injection test set

3 currents (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).

2.1.3 Additional test equipments

⇒ 2 multimeters (precision 1%),

⇒ 1 clip-on ammeter to measure the currents exceeding 10 A (precision 2%),

⇒ Test plugs and wires to carry out injections to the CTs secondary (dimensions according to the currents injected).

2.1.4 Communication

For all tests, the records can be made by using either the RS 485 rear port or the RS232 front port of the relay.


2.2 Commissioning test records

Commissioning test records are available in the Chapter 8-3.

The presentation of the Commissioning test records follows the sequence of the tests of this chapter.

The contents of these Commissioning test records enable you to log:

• The name of the relay, station and circuit/plant

• The characteristics of the MiCOM P220 relay

• The various settings

• The results of the tests

3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS

3.1 Allocation of terminals

It is necessary to consult the appropriate wiring diagram of the MiCOM P220 whilst observing the various polarities and ground/earth connection.

3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Before any handling of the module (active part of the relay), please refer to the recommendations in the SAFETY section.

3.3 Visual inspection

Carefully examine the relay to see if there has been any possible deterioration following installation.

Check the serial number under the upper flap of the front panel. Also inspect the stated nominal values and the model number.

Check if the external wiring corresponds to the appropriate relay diagram or the assembly diagram.

When the relay is withdrawn from its case, use a continuity tester to check if the current short-circuits (phases and earth CTs) between the terminals indicated on the wiring diagram are closed.

3.4 Earthing

Check if the earth connection of the case situated above the rear terminal block is used to connect the relay to a local earth bar. With several relays present, make sure that the copper earth bar is properly installed for solidly connecting the earthing terminals of each case.


3.5 Current transformers (CTs)

DANGER : NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.

3.5.1 Use of a Core Balance CT for earth faults.

If a core balance CT is used to detect earth faults, prior to any test, the user must check the following points:

1. MV cable screens and core balance CT,

2. No current flow through the MV cables.

3.5.2 Cable shields and core balance CT

When mounting a core balance CT around electric cables, check the connection to the earth of the cable shields. It is vital that the earth cable of the shield moves in the opposite direction through the core balance CT. This cancels the currents carried by the cable shields through the core balance CT.

S1

S2

P1

P2

Electrical cables directed to the busbar Screen shields

Other endsof electrical cables

P0041ENa

FIGURE 1 - SCREEN SHIELDS AND CORE BALANCE CT


3.5.3 Phase CTs orientation

It is necessary to check the orientation of the phase CTs by using the following method for instance:

Have available a centre point analogue ammeter. Temporarily short-circuit the battery by checking the diagram polarities (+ on P1 and on P2). A positive current pulse traverses the milliammeter and the needle shall turn in a positive direction .

Proceed this test for each phase CT.

+P1

P2

S1

S2

+

mA

_

_

P0043ENa

FIGURE 2 - PHASE CT ORIENTATION TEST

NOTE : De-magnetise the CT after the test. Inject a current starting from zero and slowly cross the CT nominal value and then decrease slowly to zero.

3.6 Auxiliary supply

Check the value of the auxiliary supply voltage (terminals 33 and 34). The value measured shall be between 0.8 and 1.2 times the auxiliary supply nominal voltage indicated on the MiCOM P220 front panel (under the upper flap).

Cortec code Relay auxiliary voltage range *

(Volts) Auxiliary voltage range for the

logic inputs * (Volts)

A 24 60 Vdc 19 60 Vdc

F 48 150 Vdc 32 150 Vdc

M 130-250 Vdc

100-250 Vca

48 250 Vdc

* The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations is 20/+20%.


4. COMMISSIONING

The various operations described in this section are not exhaustive, but combine functions of MiCOM P220 relay which are able to confirm that the relay is operational. The use of appropriate AREVA T&D setting software connected to either the RS485 rear port or the RS232 front is not obligatory. The various indications associated with each commissioning module are described for the MiCOM P220 front panel display (LCD and LEDs).

Commissioning covers the following points:

1. Input of settings,

2. Validation of measurements,

3. Validation of the thermal replica : Iθ>, θALARM, θFORBID START, Te1, Te2, Tr (49)

4. Validation of phase protection thresholds and time delays : I>>, tI>> (50/51)

5. Validation of earth protection thresholds and time delays : Io>, tIo>, Io>>, t Io>> (50N/51N)

6. Validation of the Negative Sequence thresholds I2> and I2>> (46)

7. Validation of the automation function: latching of the relay outputs.

4.1 Settings

Input into the Commissioning Test Report file all of the settings of the MiCOM P220 relay.

4.2 Measurements

The MiCOM P220 relay measures phase and earth currents as a True RMS value up to the 10th harmonic. The value(s) indicated take account of the phase and/or earth CT ratio.

WARNING: MiCOM P220 RELAY HAS 1 AND 5 AMP CURRENT INPUTS. CHECK THAT THE INJECTED CURRENT IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE SELECTED RANGE

• Bring forward to the Setting report the values of phase and earth CTs.

• Energise the MiCOM P220 relay.

• Apply to each current input (as per wiring diagram) a current and check the values on the LCD display.

• Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test report (Applied values and relay values displayed)

4.3 Thermal replica

Assign the thermal overload protective function to the trip output contact (relay RL1) and assign the θALARM protective function to an auxiliary output contact, RL2 for example. Set Ke equal to 3. In order to save time during testing, it is advisible to set all the thermal time constants to 5 minutes.


The thermal operating time is given by the following:

t = T ln [((Ieq / Iθ>)2 θi) / [((Ieq / Iθ>)2 θthresh] = T ln [(K2 θi) /(K2 θthresh)]

where : t = operating time in seconds

T = thermal time constant value in seconds

Ieq = equivalent thermal current value

Iθ> = thermal overload current threshold

K = Ieq / Iθ> ratio

θi = initial thermal state value ; in our case θi equal to 0.

θthresh = alarm threshold (settable) or tripping threshold (fixed value equal to 1)

This test is done by a single-phase injection, it results in that the relay sees equal current magnitudes for both positive and negative phase sequence quantities. Upon injection of a single phase current value equal to Iinject, the relay will see current magnitudes of Iinject/3 for both positive and negative phase sequences quantities. The equivalent thermal current value Ieq calculated by the relay will be given by the following:

Ieq = (Ipositive2 + Ke . Inegative

2 )0.5 = [(Iinject/3)2 + 3 . (Iinject/3)2]0,5 = 2/3 . Iinject

Therefore, for an inject current value (Iinject ) equal to 3/2 . K . Iθ> , the thermal equivalent current seen by the relay will be equal to K . Iθ>.

NOTE: When the Ke factor is not set to 3, in order for the relay to see a current equal to K. Iθ>, the injected current value Iinject, ,will need to be equal to : [3/(1+Ke)0,5] . K . Iθ>

4.3.1 Test wiring diagram

The following diagram should be followed to tests the thermal replica.

This diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp phase current inputs (terminals 41-42, 43-44, 45-46). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp phase inputs, perform the same test on the 1 Amp inputs (terminals 49-50, 51-52, 53-54).


MiCOMP220

33

34

Case earth

29 -

Communication port

RS 48531

32

+

-

30*Programmable output

246

81012

RL1

RL2

Trip output

INJECTIONTEST SET

CURRENT 1 A

CURRENT5 A

N

A

N

A

AUXILIARYSUPPLY

+ Vaux- Vaux

TIMERS Stop

49

5051

5253

54

41

4243

4445

465 A

5 A

5 A

1 A

1 A

1 A

SWITCH Binary input 1

22

24 L1

Programmable output141618

RL3

Stop

Watchdog powered onWD

37

3635

P0213ENa

FIGURE 3 - THERMAL REPLICA TESTS WIRING

4.3.2 Alarm threshold θALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te1 test.

1. The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) should be kept energise during this test.

2. Within the PROCESS menu, reset the thermal status value θ to 0.

3. Inject a single-phase current equal to 2.7 times the Iθ> threshold value into the phase A relay current input, this corresponds to an overload ratio of K = 1.8

4. Record the operating times of both alarm and trip threshold.

Checks:

1. « θ ALARM» alarm message on the LCD display.

2. Alarm LED flashes.

3. θALARM LED flashes (if programmed).

4. Operation of the RL2 output contact (if θALARM is assigned to RL2).

5. Check RL2 operates at a time equal to «Te1. ln [1,82/(1,82 - θALARM)] ».

6. Then occurrence of « TH OVERLOAD » alarm message on the LCD display.

7. Trip LED flashes.

8. « THERM OVERLOAD » LED flashes (if programmed).

9. Operation of the trip output contact (relay RL1).

10. Check RL1 operates at a time equal to « 0.369 .Te1 ».


4.3.3 Alarm threshold θALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te2 test.

1. The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) should be kept energise during this test.


3. Inject a single-phase current equal to 3.9 times the Iθ> threshold value into the phase A relay current input, this corresponds to an overload ratio of K = 2.6.

4. Record the operating times of both alarm threshold and trip threshold.

Checks :

1. « θ ALARM» alarm message on the LCD display.


3. θALARM LED flashes (if programmed).

4. Operation of the RL2 output contact (if θALARM is assigned to RL2).

5. Check RL2 operates at a time equal to « Te2 . ln [2.62/(2.62 - θALARM)] ».

6. Then occurrence of « TH OVERLOAD » alarm message on the LCD display.


8. « THERM OVERLOAD » LED flashes (if programmed).

9. Operation of the trip output contact (relay RL1).

10. Check RL1 operates at a time equal to « 0.160 . Te2 ».

4.3.4 Cooling down constant time Tr test.

1. The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) should be kept unenergise during this test.

2. If required, inject a single phase current into the relay in order that the thermal status θ value reaches 90%.

3. When the injected current is removed, record the θ value. Note this value θi.

4. Wait several minutes in order to give time for the thermal status to reduce to 30% (e.g. θf<60%). Record the θ value. Note this value θf. Note also the time from when the injected current was removed.

Checks :

1. Check the time from when the injected current was removed is approximately equal to « Tr . ln (θi / θf ) ».

CAUTION : A TIME DIFFERENCE MAY EXIST BETWEEN THE THEORETICAL TIME VALUE AND THE TEST TIME VALUE. CONSIDERING A TR VALUE EQUAL TO 5 MN, THE TIME DIFFERENCE IS TYPICALLY 17 SECONDS. THIS TIME DIFFERENCE CAN EASILY REACH100 SECONDS FOR A TR VALUE EQUAL TO 60 MN. SINCE COOLING OF THE THERMAL REPLICA FOLLOWS A LOGARITHMIC RULE AND THE θ VALUE IS DISPLAYED IN 2 DIGITS, A CHANGE IN 1% STEPS OF θ TAKES TIME. THIS TIME DIFFERENCE IS DUE TO THE RESOLUTION OF THE STEP DISPLAY, NOT THE A DRIFT IN THE RELAY ACCURACY.


4.3.5 θ FORBID START threshold test.

1. Set the θFORBID START order to an auxiliary output contact (RL3 for instance), not the same than the one for which θALARM has been already assigned to.

2. The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) shall be kept not energise during this test.


4. Inject a single-phase current equal to 3.9 times the Iθ> threshold value into the phase A relay current input, which corresponds to a K = 2.6 overload ratio. Let the current injection during a time longer than à « Tr. ln [2.62/(2.62 θFORBID

START)] », the θ value is greater than the θFORBID START threshold.

Checks :

1. « θ FORBIDDEN START » alarm message on the LCD display.


3. « FORBIDDEN START » LED flashes (if programmed).

4. Operation of the RL3 output contact (if θFORBIDDEN START is assigned to RL3) after a time equal to « Tr. ln [2.62/(2.62 θFORBID START)] ».

CAUTION : THE THERMAL BASE START INHIBITION IS SELF-RESET WHEN THE θ VALUE FALLS UNDER THE θFORBID START THRESHOLD, SO THE CHECKING OF THE ABOVE ITEMS SHALL BE DONE QUICKLY AFTER THE CURRENT INJECTION STOPPAGE.


4.3.6 Numerical example

For each thermal replica test, the hereafter table mentions the operating time values relevant to the following relay setting values :

Iθ = 1 In

Ke = 3

Te1 = Te2 = Tr = 5 mn

θALARM = 90%

θFORBID START = 60%.

Injected current value single phase current (in Ampère)

Theoretical time value (in seconds)

Measured time value (in seconds)

Iθ> threshold value test and constant time Te1 value test

θALARM threshold operating time

2.7 (In =1A) 98 s

Chapter « 4.3.2 » Trip thermal threshold operating time

13.5 (In=5A) 111 s

Iθ> threshold value test and constant time Te1 value test

θALARM threshold operating time

3.9 (In =1A) 43 s

Chapter « 4.3.3 » Trip thermal threshold operating time

19.5 (In=5A) 48 s

Constant time Tr valuetest

Chapter « 4.3.4 »

Initial thermal value θi= 90%

Final thermal value θf= 60%

No injection of current

122 s

θFORBID START threshold value test

Chapter « 4.3.5 »

Minimum injection time

3.9 (In =1A)

19.5 (In=5A) 28 s


4.4 Phase overcurrent: I>>

One phase overcurrent threshold is available for the MiCOM P220 relay. Set the threshold on the trip output.


This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the threshold.

The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp phase current inputs (terminals 41-42, 43-44, 45-46). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp phase inputs, perform the same test on the 1 Amp inputs (terminals 49-50, 51-52, 53-54).

MiCOMP220

33

34

Case earth

29 -

RS 485 communication port31

32

+

-

30*

Programmable output

246

81012

RL1

RL2

Trip output

INJECTIONTEST SET

CURRENT 1 A

CURRENT5 A

N

A

N

A

AUXILIARYSUPPLY

+ Vaux-Vaux

TIMER Stop

49

5051

5253

54

41

4243

4445

465 A

5 A

5 A

1 A

1 A

1 A


37

3635

P0214ENa

FIGURE 4 - I>> TESTS WIRING

4.4.2 I>> threshold

Values to be recorded

1. l>> threshold for each phase

2. tl>> time delay for each phase

I>> threshold check:

1. If tI>> time delay is short, gradually increase the injected current up to the value of I>> threshold.

2. If tI>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip output is close.

3. Gradually decrease the injected current and note the value of the drop out of the I>> threshold.


Checks:

1. Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD.



4. I>> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).

5. Trip output closes.

6. I>> threshold output closes (if programmed).

tI>> time delay check : 1. Apply a current on one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by pre-

setting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).

2. Apply a current on one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by pre-setting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).

4.5 Earth overcurrent : Io>, Io>>

Two earth overcurrent thresholds are available in the MiCOM P220 relays. Each threshold is adjusted independently. Set the various thresholds on the trip output.


This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the Io> and Io>> thresholds.

The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp earth current input (terminals 47-48). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp earth input, perform the same test on the 1 Amp input (terminals 55-56).

MiCOMP220

33

34

55

56

47

48

5 A

1 A

Case earth29 -


32

+

-

30*

Programmable output

246

81012

RL1

RL2

Trip output

INJECTIONTEST SET

CURRENT 1 A

CURRENT5 A

N

A

P1

P2

S1

S2

N

A

P1

P2

S1

S2

AUXILIARYSUPPLY

+Vaux- Vaux

TIMER Stop


37

3635

P0215ENa

FIGURE 5 - IO> AND IO>> TESTS WIRING


4.5.2 Io> threshold

Values to be recorded :

1. Io> threshold

2. Time delay tIo>.

Io> threshold check:

1. If the time delay tIo> is short, gradually increase the injection current up to the value of the Io> threshold.

2. If the time delay tIo> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no tripping. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip.

3. Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out Io> threshold.

Checks :

1. Alarm message on the LCD display.



4. Io> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).


6. Io> threshold output closes (if programmed).

tIo> time delay check :

1. Apply a current on the earth input and measure the time delay tIo> by pre-setting the current above the Io> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).

2. Apply a current on the earth input and measure the time delay tIo> by pre-setting the current above the Io> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).

4.5.3 Io>> threshold

Values to be recorded

1. lo>> threshold

2. tlo>> time delay.

Io>> threshold check : .

1. If tIo>> time delay is short, gradually increase the injected current up to the value of Io>> threshold.

2. If tIo>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip output is closed.

3. Gradually decrease the injected current and note the value of the drop out Io>> threshold.


Checks :

1. Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD.



4. Io>> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).


6. Io>> threshold output closes (if programmed).

tIo>> time delay check : .

1. Apply a current on to the earth and measure the time delay tIo>> by pre-setting the current above the Io>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).

2. Apply a current on to the earth and measure the time delay tIo>> by pre-setting the current above the Io>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).

4.6 Negative phase sequence threshold(46)

Two overcurrent thresholds based on the negative sequence component are available in the MiCOM P220 relays. Each threshold is adjusted independently. The threshold I2> has a definite time characteristic while the second threshold I2>> is associated with an IDMT characteristic.

Set the various thresholds on the trip output.


This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the I2> and I2>> thresholds.

The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp earth current input (terminals 41-42). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp earth input, perform the same test on the 1Amp input (terminals 49-50).

MiCOMP220

33

34

Case earth

29 -


32

+

-

30*

Programmable output

246

81012

RL1

RL2

Trip output

INJECTIONTEST SET

CURRENT 1 A

CURRENT5 A

NA

NA

AUXILIARYSUPPLY

+ Vaux-Vaux

TIMER Stop

49

5051

5253

54

41

4243

4445

46

5 A

1 A


37

3635

P0216ENa

FIGURE 6 - I2> AND I2>> TESTS WIRING


Reminder: the MiCOM P220 relay calculates the negative phase sequence component using the formula:

I2 = 1/3 (Ia + a2 Ib + a Ic)

With a = cos (2/3) + j sin (2/3)

With a single phase injection such as the proposed figure 5: Ib = 0 and Ic = 0

And thus I2 = 1/3 Ia

In this case, the negative sequence current measured by the MiCOM P220 is equal to one third of the injected current.

4.6.2 I2> threshold

Values to be recorded:

1. I2> threshold

2. Time delay tI2>.

I2> threshold check:

1. If the time delay tI2> is short, gradually increase the injected current up to the value of the I2> threshold.

2. If the time delay tIo> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no tripping. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip.

3. Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out I2> threshold.

Checks:




4. I2> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).


6. I2> threshold output closes (if programmed).

tI2> time delay check:

1. Apply a current on to the earth input and measure the time delay tI2> by pre-setting the current above the I2> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).

2. Apply a current on to the earth input and measure the time delay tI2> by pre-setting the current above the I2> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).

4.6.3 I2>> threshold

Values to be recorded:

1. I2>> threshold

2. Time delay tI2>>.


I2>> threshold check:

Inject a current equal to 2 x I threshold on one of the phase current inputs. Repeat the operation for various current values (n x I threshold with n ranging from 4 to 10, for example). Check that the values measured correspond to the following formula:

Operating time t = 1.2/ (I2 / I threshold).

Checks:




4. I2>> threshold LED flashes (if programmed).


6. I2>> threshold output closes (if programmed).

tI2>> time delay check:

1. Apply a current onto the earth input and measure the time delay tI2>> by pre-setting the current above the I2>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).

2. Apply a current onto the earth input and measure the time delay tI2>> by pre-setting the current above the I2>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).

4.7 Automation functions

The MiCOM P220 relay has several automation functions (refer to the User Guide)

The use of these functions is optional.

4.7.1 Latching of relay outputs

All output relays of MiCOM P220 can be kept closed after the fault has disappeared (Relay Latching function in the AUTOMATION menu).

The following test is suggested for the tIo>> threshold on the tripping output.

The other thresholds and output relays can be tested identically.

Set tIo>> threshold on the trip output with the relay latched. Leave the other threshold tIo> not latched.


4.7.2 Wiring diagram

This wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct the test relating to the trip output latch on the tIo>> threshold. The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp earth current input (terminals 47-48). To carry out an injection on the 1 Amp earth input, perform the same tests on the earth 1 Amp input (terminals 55-56).

MiCOMP220

33

34

55

56

47

48

5 A

1 A

Case earth

29-


32

+

-

30*246

RL1 Trip output

INJECTIONTEST SET

CURRENT 1 A

CURRENT5 A

N

A

P1

P2

S1

S2

N

A

P1

P2

S1

S2

AUXILIARYSUPPLY

+ Vaux-Vaux

TIMER Stop

SWITCH Binary input 3

13

15 L3


37

3635

P0217ENa

FIGURE 7 - LATCHING TEST SCHEME FOR tIO>>

Trip output latched check

1. Inject a current equal to 1.2 x I threshold Io>> on the earth input and check that the trip output relay is closed after tIo>>time delay.

2. Gradually decrease the current down to zero and check that the trip output relay is still closed.

3. Reinitialise the trip output relay either by clearing the alarm message (alarm menu) or by activation of the Logic Input 3 (Terminals 22-24).

Checks

1. Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD



4. Trip output relay closes.

5. Trip output relay opens after alarm message cleared.


4.8 Commissioning parameters data base

The various parameters shown below make possible to test functions of MiCOM P220 relays according to the commissioning tests (see section 4). Settings in accordance with the commissioning tests only are given.

4.8.1 PROTECTION Menu

THERMAL OVERLOAD FUNCTION ? NO/YES*

θ INHIBIT ? NO

Iθ> 1 In

Ke 3

Te1 5 mn

Te2 5 mn

Tr 5 mn

RTD1 INFLUENCE ? NO

θ ALARM ? YES

θ ALARM 90%

θ FORBID START ? YES

θ FORBID START 60%

I>> FUNCTION ? NO/YES*

I>> 1 In

tI>> 20 s

Io> FUNCTION ? NO/YES*

Io> 0.1 Ion

tIo> 20 s

Io>> FUNCTION ? NO/YES*

Io>> 1 Ion

tIo>> 10 s

I2> FUNCTION ? NO/YES*

I2> 0.2 In

tI2> 20 s

I2>> FUNCTION ? NO/YES*

I2>> 0.5 In

* During the commissioning tests, all the protective functions shall be preferably set off (NO) excepted the one which is being tested.


4.8.2 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu

TRIP THERM OVERLOAD ? YES (Trip order via output RL1)

TRIP tI>> YES (Trip order via output RL1)

TRIP tIo> YES (Trip order via output RL1)

TRIP tIo>> YES (Trip order via output RL1)

TRIP tI2> YES (Trip order via output RL1)

TRIP tI2> YES (Trip order via output RL1)

θ ALARM 0001 (allocation to output RL2)

θ FORBID START 0010 (allocation to output RL3)

LATCH tI>> NO

LATCH tIo>> YES

LATCH tI2>> NO

INPUT 3 EXT RESET


5. INTRODUCTION

The MiCOM P220 Motor protection relays are fully numerical in design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the maintenance does not need to be as extensive as with non-numerical electronic or electro-mechanical relays.

As soon as an internal fault is detected , depending on its type (minor or major), an alarm message is displayed as a priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED is illuminated (fixed or flashing) and the watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a major one).

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE HANDLING AND SAFETY SECTION

6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

It is recommended that products supplied by AREVA T&D receive regular monitoring after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is inevitable. In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals.

AREVA protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years.

MiCOM P220 relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodical tests should be done to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact.

If a Preventative Maintenance Policy exists within the customers organisation then the recommended product checks should be included in the regular programme. Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as:

• the operating environment

• the accessibility of the site

• the amount of available manpower

• the importance of the installation in the power system

• the consequences of failure


7. MAINTENANCE CHECKS

Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by utilising the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted to checking that the relay is measuring the applied currents accurately and checking the circuit breaker maintenance counters. Therefore it is recommended that maintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the plant itself).

7.1 Alarms

The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. If so, press the read key ! repeatedly to step through the alarms. Clear the alarms to extinguish the LED.

7.2 Opto-isolators

The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds on energisation using the DC auxiliary supply specified on the product.

This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P220 relay has 5 opto-isolated inputs.

The opto-isolated inputs should be energised one at a time. Ensuring correct polarity, connect the DC auxiliary supply to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested.

The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed using the OP.PARAMETERS menu.

The opto-isolated input terminal allocations are given in the following Table:

DC auxiliary supply to terminals INPUT

-Vaux +Vaux OP.PARAMETRS/INPUT value

Opto input 1 22 24 0 0 0 0 1

Opto input 2 26 28 0 0 0 1 0

Opto input 3 13 15 0 0 1 0 0

Opto input 4 17 19 0 1 0 0 0

Opto input 5 21 23 1 0 0 0 0

7.3 Output Relays

This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. The P220 relay has 6 output relays including the watchdog relay.

Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1 given in the following Table:

Monitor terminals Output

N/C N/O OP.PARAMETERS/OUTPUTS value

RL1 2-4 2-6 0 0 0 0 1

RL2 8-10 8-12 0 0 0 1 0

RL3 14-16 14-18 0 0 1 0 0

RL4 1-3 1-5 0 1 0 0 0

RL5 7-9 7-11 1 0 0 0 0


8. METHOD OF REPAIR

If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the type of the fault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged.

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE HANDLING AND SAFETY SECTION. THIS SHOULD ENSURE THAT NO DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY INCORRECT HANDLING OF THE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.

The method is to replace the withdrawable part, but if it is necessary to replace the complete relay (with the case):

BEFORE WORKING AT THE REAR OF THE RELAY, ISOLATE ALL VOLTAGE AND CURRENT SUPPLIES TO THE RELAY. DISCONNECT THE RELAY EARTH CONNECTION FROM THE REAR OF THE RELAY

NOTE: The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the relay should replacement or repair become necessary without having to disconnect the scheme wiring. The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the withdrawable part is removed.

Upper flap

Lower flapP0218ENb

NOTE: The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.

REMOVE THE SCREWS USED TO FASTEN THE RELAY TO THE PANEL, RACK, ETC. THESE ARE THE SCREWS WITH THE LARGER DIAMETER HEADS THAT ARE ACCESSIBLE WHEN THE UPPER AND LOWER FLAPS ARE OPEN. WITHDRAW THE RELAY FROM THE PANEL, RACK, ETC. CAREFULLY BECAUSE IT WILL BE HEAVY DUE TO THE INTERNAL TRANSFORMERS.

To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay, follow the above instructions in reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the case earth is replaced.


9. CHANGING THE BATTERY

Each relay has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the auxiliary supply voltage fails. The data maintained includes event, fault and disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of failure.

Instructions for Replacing the Battery

Open the bottom flap on the front of the relay.

Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver to prize the battery free.

Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease and dust.

The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the battery holder, taking care to ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree with those adjacent to the socket.

NOTE: Only use a type ½AA Lithium battery with a nominal voltage of 3.6V.

Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket.

Close the bottom access cover.

Battery Disposal

The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.


10. TYPES OF FAULTS

10.1 Equipment failure

An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel (using the dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will acknowledge the fault and hence reset the fault LED.

10.1.1 Minor faults

Regarded by the MiCOM P220 relay as a minor fault is a communication failure. If communications are weak, MiCOM P220 protection and automation modules are not affected.

Message :

Communication fault

Cause :

Hardware or software failure of the communication module

Action :

Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.

Alternative : If communication is not used, declare communication OFF in the COMMUNICATION menu (COM. OK = NO).

10.1.2 Major faults

Major faults for MiCOM P220 relays are all software and hardware failures except the communication faults. As soon as this type of failure is detected, the watchdog (WD) is closed (36-37 terminals) and all operations are stopped (protection, automation, communication).

10.1.2.1 Hardware faults

Messages : EEPROM failure

Cause : Hardware failure (EEPROM components)

Action : Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.

10.1.2.2 Software faults

Messages : Software fault

Cause : Failure of the software (checksum incorrect for example)

Action : Restart the protection software

If the software fault still remain after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair.


10.2 Problem solving

10.2.1 Password lost or not accepted

Problem : Password lost or not accepted

Cause : MiCOM P220 relay is supplied with the password set to AAAA. This password can be changed by the user (refer to the OP PARAMETERS menu).

Action : There is an additional unique recovery password associated to the relay which can be supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the upper flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your AREVA local dealer or the AREVA T&D After Sales Department.

10.2.2 Communication

10.2.2.1 Values measured locally and remotely

Problem : The measurements noted remotely and locally (via RS485 communication) differ.

Cause : The values accessible on the front panel via the Measurement menu are refreshed every second. Those fed back via the communication and accessible by the AREVA T&D Setting software generally have skeletal refreshing frequencies. If the refreshing frequency of the supervision software differs from that of the MiCOM P220 relay (1s), there may be a difference between indicated values.

Action: Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or of the setting software to 1 second.

10.2.2.2 MiCOM relay no longer responds

Problem : No response from MiCOM P220 relay when asked by the supervision software without any communication fault message.

Cause : Normally, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P220 communication parameters.

Action : Check that the MiCOM P220 communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are in accordance with the supervision settings.

Check the MiCOM P220 network address.

Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same LAN.Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests.


11. LIST OF THE RELAY ALARM MESSAGES

HARDW ALARMS

Heading of the HARDW ALARMS messages, default display in case of either relay error alarm or RTDs/thermistor failure. To display the alarms messages, press the ! key.

COMM. ERROR Communication error (communication using the rear RS485 port).

EEPROM ERROR DATA

EEPROM memory error.

EEPROM ERROR CALIBR.

EEPROM calibration error.

CT ERROR Analog signal acquisition error.

CLOCK ERROR Internal clock error.

RAM ERROR RAM memory error.

ANA OUTPUT ERROR

Analog output error.

RTD / Therm ERROR

RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open circuit)


12. LIST OF THE MOTOR ALARM MESSAGES

MOTOR ALARMS Heading of the MOTOR ALARMS messages, default display in case of motor alarm. To display the alarms messages, press the ! key.

TH OVERLOAD Operation of the « thermal overload » function.

θ ALARM Thermal alarm element active : θALARM (self-resettable)

θ FORBIDDEN START

Start inhibition based on thermal cirterion active (self resettable)

t I >> PHASE

Operation of the « short-circuit » function : time delayed element tI>>. Display of the faulty phase.

t I0> Operation of the « earth fault » function : time delayed element t I0>

t I0>> Operation of the « earth fault » function : time delayed element t I0>>

t Ii> Operation of the « unbalance » function : time delayed element tIi>

t Ii>> Operation of the « unbalance » function : time delayed element tIi>>

LONG START tIstart

Operation of the « excessive start tim » function : time delayed element tIstart

MECHAN JAM tIstall

Operation of the « stalled rotor while running » function : time delayed element tIstall


LOCKED ROTOR

Operation of the « locked rotor at start » function

t I< PHASE

Operation of the « loss of load » function : time delayed element t I< Display the faulty phase

t RTD1 ALAR Operation of the RTD1 temperature alarm element : time delayed element tALARM RTD1 (self-resettable)

t RTD1 trip Operation of the RTD1 temperature trip element : time delayed element tDECL RTD1

and so on for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6

Thermist 1 Operation of the Thermist1 temperature element

Thermist 2 Operation of the Thermist2 temperature element

START NB LIMIT

Start inhibition based on the « limitation of starts number » function active (self resettable)

T between 2 start

Start inhibition based on the minimum time between 2starts function active . (self-resettable).

RE-ACCELER AUTHOR

Authorised motor reacceleration sequence in progress (self-resettable)

EXT 1 Operation of the auxiliary timer EXT 1.

EXT 2 Operation of the auxiliary timer EXT 2.

EQUATION A And logic equation A active and so on for the AND logic equations B, C and D


OPERATING TIME SW

Circuit breaker operating time has reached (or it has exceeded) the « SW OPERATING TIME» time threshold.

OPERATION NB SW

Circuit breaker operation number has reached (or it has exceeded) the « SW OPERATION NB » threshold.

SA2N The sum of amperesn has reached (or it has exceeded) the « SAn » threshold.

CLEAR ALL ALARMS To clear all the alarms, press the " key.

LATCHING RELAYS Information issued from an element which has been affected to a latched relay.


BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P220/EN RS/B43 MiCOM P220

Test Report

Technical Guide P220/EN RS/B43 Test Report MiCOM P220 Page 1/16

CONTENT

1. TEST REPORT 3

1.1 Relay reference 3

2. PRODUCTS CHECKS 4

2.1 Relay "OFF" 4

2.1.1 Visual inspection 4

2.1.2 External wiring 4

2.1.3 Insulation resistor > 100MΩ at 500Vdc 4

2.1.4 Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off) 4

2.1.5 Auxiliary supply measured 4

2.2 Relay "ON" 4

2.2.1 Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off) 4

2.2.2 LEDs 4

2.2.3 Logic Inputs 4

2.2.4 Output relays 5

2.2.5 Rear communication port 5

3. SETTINGS 6

3.1 EXPLOITATION menu 6

3.2 CONFIGURATION menu 6

3.2.1 CONFIG. SELECT submenu 6

3.2.2 CT RATIO submenu 6

3.2.3 LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus 6

3.2.4 Submenus CONFIGURATION INPUTS 7

3.3 COMMUNICATION menu 7

3.3.1 MODBUSTM 7

3.3.2 Courier 7

3.4 PROTECTION G1 and G2 menus 8

3.4.1 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu 8

3.4.2 [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu 8

3.4.3 [50/51] EARTH FAULT submenu 8

3.4.4 [46] UNBALANCE submenu 8

3.4.5 [48] EXCES LONG START submenu 9

3.4.6 [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu 9

3.4.7 [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu 9

3.4.8 [49/38] RTD submenu (optional) 9

3.4.9 [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional) 10

P220/EN RS/B43 Technical Guide Test Report Page 2/16 MiCOM P220

3.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL menu 10

3.5.1 [66] START NUMBER submenu 10

3.5.2 MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu 10

3.5.3 REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu 10

3.5.4 INPUTS submenu 11

3.5.5 AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu 11

3.5.6 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu 12

3.5.7 AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu 12

3.5.8 LATCHING OUTPUT RELAYS 14

3.5.9 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu 14

3.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu 14

3.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu 15

3.6 CONSIGNATION menu 15

3.6.1 DISTURB RECORD submenu 15


1. TEST REPORT

Commissioning date: ____________________________________

Motor reference: ____________________________________

Circuit-breaker/Fuse-contactor reference: ____________________________________

1.1 Relay reference

MiCOM relay type P220

Serial number

Earth current setting range

Auxiliary voltage supply

Communication protocol

Language

Have you already read the security instructions ? Yes/No*

* Delete as appropriate


2. PRODUCTS CHECKS

2.1 Relay "OFF"

2.1.1 Visual inspection

Damaged relay ? Yes/No *

Nominal values conform to installation ? Yes/No *

Relay earth connection (connected)? Yes/No *

2.1.2 External wiring

Wiring controlled according to scheme ? Yes/No *

Test unit connection (verified) ? Yes/No/No used *

2.1.3 Insulation resistor > 100MΩ at 500Vdc

Yes/No/ No Tested*

2.1.4 Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off)

Terminal 35 - 36

Terminal 36 - 37

Closed contact ?

Contact resistance

Open contact ?

Yes/No *

--------Ω / No measured

Yes/No *

2.1.5 Auxiliary supply measured

----------Vac/ dc *

2.2 Relay "ON"

2.2.1 Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off)

Terminal 35 - 36

Terminal 36 - 37

Open contact ?

Closed contact ?

Contact resistance

Yes/No *

Yes/No *

--------Ω / No measured

2.2.2 LEDs

HEALTHY LED (GREEN) is ON

ALARM LED (YELLOW) is ON

WD LED (ORANGE) is ON

TRIP LED (RED) is ON

Programmable LED correct functioning

Yes/No *

Yes/No *

Yes/No *

Yes/No *

Yes/No *

2.2.3 Logic Inputs

Correct functioning of isolated opto inputs 1 to 5 Yes/No *



2.2.4 Output relays

Relay 1 (RL1) Correct functioning

Contact resistance N/C

N/O

Yes/No *

--------Ω / No measured *




N/O

Yes/No *





N/O

Yes/No *





N/O

Yes/No *





N/O

Yes/No *



2.2.5 Rear communication port

Communication standard

Communication present

Protocol Converter Tested

K-Bus / Courier *

Modbus *

CEI 60870-5-103 *

Yes/No *

Yes/No/ No used *



3. SETTINGS

3.1 EXPLOITATION menu

Password

Reference

Frequency Hz

Date

Hour

3.2 CONFIGURATION menu

3.2.1 CONFIG. SELECT submenu

Change group input

Setting group

Default display

Start detection criterion

Analogue output type (optional)

Value transmitted by the analogue output (optional)

RTD type (optional)

Thermistor 1 type (optional)

Thermistor 2 type (optional)

3.2.2 CT RATIO submenu

Primary rating of the phase CT

Secondary rating of the phase CT

Primary rating of the earth CT

Secondary rating of the earth CT

3.2.3 LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus


Allocation : Thermal overload

Allocation : Thermal alarm θ ALARM

Allocation : tI>>

Allocation : tIo>

Allocation : tIo>>

Allocation : tIi>

Allocation : tIi>>

Allocation : tI<

Allocation : Excessive long start




Allocation : Locked rotor (at start)

Allocation : Emergency restart

Allocation : Forbidden start

Allocation : tALARM RTD1, tALARM RTD2, tALARM RTD3 (optional)

Allocation : tTRIP RTD1, tTRIP RTD2, tTRIP RTD3 (optional)

Allocation : tALARM RTD4, tALARM RTD5, tALARM RTD6 (optional)

Allocation : tTRIP RTD4, tTRIP RTD5, tTRIP RTD6 (optional)

Allocation : Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (optional)

Allocation : EXT 1

Allocation : EXT 2

Allocation : Motor Stopped

Allocation : Motor running

Allocation : Successful start

3.2.4 Submenus CONFIGURATION INPUTS

EL 54321

3.3 COMMUNICATION menu

3.3.1 MODBUSTM

Communication enabled ? (Yes/No)

Data rate Bauds

Parity

Number of data bits

Number of stop bits

Relay address

Date format

3.3.2 Courier

Communication enabled ? (Yes/No)

Relay address


3.4 PROTECTION G1 and G2 menus

3.4.1 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu


Thermal overload function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

« Thermal inhibition on starting » function enabled ?

(Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Threshold Iθ> In In

Ke

Te1 mn mn

Te2 Te1 Te1

Tr Te1 Te1

Influence RTD (optional) (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Thermal alarm enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Thermal alarm θALARM threshold % %

Thermal forbidden start function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

θ FORDID START threshold % %

3.4.2 [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu


Short-circuit function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Threshold I>> In In

tI>>

3.4.3 [50/51] EARTH FAULT submenu


Io> element of the earth fault function enabled ?

(Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Threshold Io> In In

tIo>

Io>> element of the earth fault function enabled ?

(Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Threshold Io>> In In

tIo>>

3.4.4 [46] UNBALANCE submenu


Ii> element of the unbalance function enabled ?

(Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Threshold Ii> In In

tIi>

Ii>> element of the unbalance function enabled ?

(Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Threshold Ii>> In In


3.4.5 [48] EXCES LONG START submenu


Excessive long start function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Threshold Istart Iθ Iθ

tIstart

3.4.6 [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu

PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G 2

Block rotor function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

tIstall

Stalled rotor function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Threshold Istall Iθ Iθ

Locked rotor at start function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

3.4.7 [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu


Loss of load function enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Threshold I< In In

tI<

Tinhib

3.4.8 [49/38] RTD submenu (optional)


RTD1 enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

RTD1 ALARM °C °C

tALARM RTD1

RTD1 TRIP °C °C

tTRIP RTD1


RTD2 ALARM °C °C

tALARM RTD2

RTD2 TRIP °C °C

tTRIP RTD2


RTD3 ALARM °C °C

tALARM RTD3

RTD3 TRIP °C °C

tTRIP RTD3




RTD4 ALARM °C °C

tALARM RTD4

RTD4 TRIP °C °C

tTRIP RTD4


RTD5 ALARM °C °C

tALARM RTD5

RTD5 TRIP °C °C

tTRIP RTD5


RTD6 ALARM °C °C

tALARM RTD6

RTD6 TRIP °C °C

TTRIP RTD6

3.4.9 [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional)


Thermistor 1 enabled (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Thermist 1 kΩ kΩ

Thermistor 2 enabled (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Thermist 2 kΩ kΩ

3.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL menu

3.5.1 [66] START NUMBER submenu

Start Number Limitation function eneabled ? (Yes/No)

Treference mn

Cold start number

Hot start number

Tinterdiction mn

3.5.2 MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu

Time Between Start function enabled ? (Yes/No)

tbetw 2 starts mn

3.5.3 REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu

Reacceleration authorization function enabled ? (Yes/No)

Treacc


3.5.4 INPUTS submenu

Allocation : input n°3



t EXT 1

t EXT 2

t EXT 3

t EXT 4

3.5.5 AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu

D C B A



Allocation : θ FORBID START

Allocation : I>>

Allocation : tI>>

Allocation : Io>

Allocation : tIo>

Allocation : Io>>

Allocation : tIo>>

Allocation : tIi>

Allocation : tIi>>




Allocation : tI<

Allocation : Start Nb Limitation

Allocation : Tbetw 2 starts

Allocation : t ALARM RTD1 (optional)

Allocation : tTRIP RTD1 (optional)

Allocation : tALARM RTD2 (optional)









D C B A



Allocation : Thermist 1 (optional)


Allocation : EXT 1

Allocation : EXT 2

Allocation : EXT 3

Allocation : EXT 4


3.5.6 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu

EQU. A Toperat

EQU. A Treset

EQU. B Toperat

EQU. B Treset

EQU. C Toperat

EQU. C Treset

EQU. D Toperat

EQU. D Treset

3.5.7 AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu

5 4 3 2



Allocation : θ FORBID START

Allocation : I>>

Allocation : tI>>

Allocation : Io>

Allocation : tIo>

Allocation : Io>>

Allocation : tIo>>

Allocation : tIi>

Allocation : tIi>>




Allocation : tI<


5 4 3 2

Allocation : Start Nb Limitation

Allocation : Tbetw 2 starts

Allocation : t ALARM RTD1 (optional)














Allocation : EXT 1

Allocation : EXT 2

Allocation : EXT 3

Allocation : EXT 4

Allocation : Close order

Allocation : Trip order

Allocation : order 1

Allocation : order 2


Allocation : t EQU. A

Allocation : t EQU. B

Allocation : t EQU. C

Allocation : t EQU. D

Allocation : SW Operating Time

Allocation : SW Operation Nb

Allocation : S A n

Allocation : active group


3.5.8 LATCHING OUTPUT RELAYS

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 5

3.5.9 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu

Allocation output relay n°1 : Thermal overload (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : tI>> (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : tIo> (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : tIo>> (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : tIi> (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : tIi>> (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : Excessive long start (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : tIstall (stalled rotor while running)

(Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : Locked rotor (at start) (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : tI< (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : tTRIP RTD1 (optional) (Yes/No)






Allocation output relay n°1 : Thermist 1 (optional) (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : Thermist 2 (optional) (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : EXT 1 (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : EXT 2 (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation A (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation B (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation C (Yes/No)

Allocation output relay n°1 : Equation D (Yes/No)

3.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH tI>> (Yes/No)

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH tIo>> (Yes/No)

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH tIi>> (Yes/No)

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa A (Yes/No)

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa B (Yes/No)

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa C (Yes/No)

Latching output relay n°1 : LATCH equa D (Yes/No)


3.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu

SW Operating Time function enabled ? (Yes/No)

SW Operating Time

SW Operation Number function enabled ? (Yes/No)

SW Operation Number

S A n function enabled ? (Yes/No)

S A n

Exponent n value

t Trip

t Close

3.6 CONSIGNATION menu

3.6.1 DISTURB RECORD submenu

Pre-Time

Post-Time

Disturbance Record Trig


BLANK PAGE

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

Pu

blic

atio

n:

P

22

0/E

N T

/B4

3

micom p220 - schneider electricms.schneider-electric.be/op_main/micom/micom-p220_technicalgui… ·...

Documents